FOOD FOR THOUGHT, Guest Articles

Click only if you have a Yahoo ID. Without a Yahoo ID, subscribe by sending an email to:

Short e-mail reminders are sent out twice a week: Monday and Friday. They redirect you to an online reminder that includes events scheduled each weekend, plus special messages. Click link below to read the latest

Donations made easy through PayPal.

Thank you very much.

Each title is a link to that article; and a link bar is provided at the end of each article to help you navigate the site.
Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page

This section contains articles by guest authors. All are copyrighted with all rights reserved. Permission to repost is generally granted provided all credits and contact information is included in posting. Please contact author directly for confirmation.

The following articles in this box are all listed on a separate page.

THE REST OF THE STORY a compilation of material mostly from Christopher Story
EXTENSIVE MARK HUBER COMMENTARIES on many subjects, 2008-2009 Highly recommended by Ron
RUN AWAY FROM VACCINES: Affidavit filed against Rockerfeller, et. al. by Dr. Leonard Horowitz ... MUST READ!
operation stillpoint by Christopher Story
DAVID WILCOCK: VOLCANO, DISCLOSURE & MORE - April 21, 2010 by David Wilcock
HISTORY OF THE MONEY CHANGERS - JULY 21, 2011 by Andrew Hitchcock
MEDITATION FOCUS #229: Visioneering and Pioneering the Coming Golden Age - November 27, 2011 By Jean Hudon

Posted Monday, 8-Feb-2010 17:24:18
PDF showing that U.S. is a Corporation - MUST SEE INFO!

Here's a PDF file that shows all the incorporation papers for the U.S. government and others on file with the State of Delaware.

The followiing articles are all on this page with the most recent posting on top.

THE 9TH WAVE IN THE EVOLUTION OF CONSCIOUSNESS compiled from the work of Ian lundgold
TIM TURNER INTERVIEW From the Republic for the united States of America
STAY PUT: PRODUCE THE NOTE - posted October 11, 2010
BARACK OBAMA – HERO OR VILLAIN? By Steve Beckow with more by Dale Lindsborg and Ron's commentary

Guest Articles Archive #1
Guest Articles Archive #2

NOTE: To print out an article or portion thereof, simply highlight the text you wish to print, click the "File" menu, then click "Print," then choose "selection" when it asks for page range. It will only send the selected text to your printer.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Bill Wilson, June 21, 2011

Iceland is free. And it will remain so, so long as her people wish to remain autonomous of the foreign domination of her would-be masters — in this case, international bankers. On April 9, the fiercely independent people of island-nation defeated a referendum that would have bailed out the UK and the Netherlands who had covered the deposits of British and Dutch investors who had lost funds in Icesave bank in 2008.

At the time of the bank’s failure, Iceland refused to cover the losses. But the UK and Netherlands nonetheless have demanded that Iceland repay them for the “loan” as a condition for admission into the European Union.

In response, the Icelandic people have told Europe to go pound sand. The final vote was 103,207 to 69,462, or 58.9 percent to 39.7 percent. “Taxpayers should not be responsible for paying the debts of a private institution,” said Sigriur Andersen, a spokeswoman for the Advice group that opposed the bailout.

A similar referendum in 2009 on the issue, although with harsher terms, found 93.2 percent of the Icelandic electorate rejecting a proposal to guarantee the deposits of foreign investors who had funds in the Icelandic bank. The referendum was invoked when President Olafur Ragnur Grimmson vetoed legislation the Althingi, Iceland’s parliament, had passed to pay back the British and Dutch.

Under the terms of the agreement, Iceland would have had to pay £2.35 billion to the UK, and €1.32 billion to the Netherlands by 2046 at a 3 percent interest rate. Its rejection for the second time by Iceland is a testament to its people, who feel they should bear no responsibility for the losses of foreigners endured in the financial crisis.

That opposition to bailouts led to Iceland’s decision to allow the bank to fail in 2008. Not that the taxpayers there could have afforded to. As noted by Bloomberg News, at the time the crisis hit in 2008, “the banks had debts equal to 10 times Iceland’s $12 billion GDP.”

“These were private banks and we didn’t pump money into them in order to keep them going; the state did not shoulder the responsibility of the failed private banks,” Iceland President Olafur Grimsson told Bloomberg Television.

The voters’ rejection came despite threats to isolate Iceland from funding in international financial institutions. Iceland’s national debt has already been downgraded by credit rating agencies, and now those same agencies have promised to do so once again as punishment for defying the will of international bankers.

This is just the latest in the long drama since 2008 of global institutions refusing to take losses in the financial crisis. Threats of a global economic depression and claims of being “too big to fail” have equated to a loaded gun to the heads of representative governments in the U.S. and Europe. Iceland is of particular interest because it did not bail out its banks like Ireland did, or foreign ones like the U.S. did.

If that fervor catches on amongst taxpayers worldwide, as it has in Iceland and with the tea party movement in America, the banks would have something to fear; that is, the inability to draw from limitless amounts of funding from gullible government officials and central banks. It appears that the root cause is government guarantees, whether explicit or implicit, on risk-taking by the banks.

Ultimately, such guarantees are not necessary to maintain full employment or even prop up an economy with growth, they are simply designed to allow these international institutions to overleverage and increase their profit margins in good times — and to avoid catastrophic losses in bad times.

The lesson here is instructive across the pond, but it is a chilling one. If the U.S. — or any sovereign for that matter — attempts to restructure their debts, or to force private investors to take a haircut on their own foolish gambles, these international institutions have promised the equivalent of economic war in response. However, the alternative is for representative governments to sacrifice their independence to a cadre of faceless bankers who share no allegiance to any nation.

It is the conflict that has already defined the beginning of the 21st Century. The question is whether free peoples will choose to remain free, as Iceland has, or to submit.

Bill Wilson is the President of Americans for Limited Government. You can follow Bill on Twitter at @BillWilsonALG.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE

BANK LOAN – "THAT IS HOW IT WORKS." - posted 6/24/11

Interview with a banker about a foreclosure. The banker was placed on the witness stand and sworn in. The plaintiff's (borrower's) attorney asked the banker the routine questions concerning the banker's education and background.

The attorney asked the banker, "What is court exhibit A?"

The banker responded by saying, "This is a promissory note."

The attorney then asked, "Is there an agreement between Mr. Smith (borrower) and the defendant?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Do you believe the agreement includes a lender and a borrower?"

The banker responded by saying, "Yes, I am the lender and Mr. Smith is the borrower."

The attorney asked, "What do you believe the agreement is?"

The banker quickly responded, saying, " We have the borrower sign the note and we give the borrower a check."

The attorney asked, "Does this agreement show the words borrower, lender, loan, interest, credit, or money within the agreement?"

The banker responded by saying, "Sure it does."

The attorney asked, `"According to your knowledge, who was to loan what to whom according to the written agreement?"

The banker responded by saying, "The lender loaned the borrower a $50,000 check. The borrower got the money and the house and has not repaid the money."

The attorney noted that the banker never said that the bank received the promissory note as a loan from the borrower to the bank. He asked, "Do you believe an ordinary person can use ordinary terms and understand this written agreement?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Do you believe you or your company legally own the promissory note and have the right to enforce payment from the borrower?"

The banker said, "Absolutely we own it and legally have the right to collect the money."

The attorney asked, "Does the $50,000 note have actual cash value of $50,000? Actual cash value means the promissory note can be sold for $50,000 cash in the ordinary course of business."

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "According to your understanding of the alleged agreement, how much actual cash value must the bank loan to the borrower in order for the bank to legally fulfill the agreement and legally own the promissory note?" The banker said, "$50,000."

The attorney asked, "According to your belief, if the borrower signs the promissory note and the bank refuses to loan the borrower $50,000 actual cash value, would the bank or borrower own the promissory note?"

The banker said, "The borrower would own it if the bank did not loan the money. The bank gave the borrower a check and that is how the borrower financed the purchase of the house."

The attorney asked, "Do you believe that the borrower agreed to provide the bank with $50,000 of actual cash value which was used to fund the $50,000 bank loan check back to the same borrower, and then agreed to pay the bank back $50,000 plus interest?"

The banker said, "No. If the borrower provided the $50,000 to fund the check, there was no money loaned by the bank so the bank could not charge interest on money it never loaned."

The attorney asked, "If this happened, in your opinion would the bank legally own the promissory note and be able to force Mr. Smith to pay the bank interest and principal payments?"

The banker said, "I am not a lawyer so I cannot answer legal questions."

The attorney asked, " Is it bank policy that when a borrower receives a $50,000 bank loan, the bank receives $50,000 actual cash value from the borrower, that this gives value to a $50,000 bank loan check, and this check is returned to the borrower as a bank loan which the borrower must repay?"

The banker said, "I do not know the bookkeeping entries."

The attorney said, "I am asking you if this is the policy."

The banker responded, "I do not recall."

The attorney again asked, "Do you believe the agreement between Mr. Smith and the bank is that Mr. Smith provides the bank with actual cash value of $50,000 which is used to fund a $50,000 bank loan check back to himself which he is then required to repay plus interest back to the same bank?"

The banker said, " I am not a lawyer."

The attorney said, "Did you not say earlier that an ordinary person can use ordinary terms and understand this written agreement?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney handed the bank loan agreement marked "Exhibit B" to the banker. He said, "Is there anything in this agreement showing the borrower had knowledge or showing where the borrower gave the bank authorization or permission for the bank to receive $50,000 actual cash value from him and to use this to fund the $50,000 bank loan check which obligates him to give the bank back $50,000 plus interest?"

The banker said, "No."

The lawyer asked, "If the borrower provided the bank with actual cash value of $50,000 which the bank used to fund the $50,000 check and returned the check back to the alleged borrower as a bank loan check, in your opinion, did the bank loan $50,000 to the borrower?"

The banker said, "No."

The attorney asked, "If a bank customer provides actual cash value of $50,000 to the bank and the bank returns $50,000 actual cash value back to the same customer, is this a swap or exchange of $50,000 for $50,000."

The banker replied, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Did the agreement call for an exchange of $50,000 swapped for $50,000, or did it call for a $50,000 loan?"

The banker said, "A $50,000 loan."

The attorney asked, "Is the bank to follow the Federal Reserve Bank policies and procedures when banks grant loans."

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "What are the standard bank bookkeeping entries for granting loans according to the Federal Reserve Bank policies and procedures?" The attorney handed the banker FED publication Modern Money Mechanics, marked "Exhibit C".

The banker said, "The promissory note is recorded as a bank asset and a new matching deposit (liability) is created. Then we issue a check from the new deposit back to the borrower."

The attorney asked, "Is this not a swap or exchange of $50,000 for $50,000?"

The banker said, "This is the standard way to do it." The attorney said, "Answer the question. Is it a swap or exchange of $50,000 actual cash value for $50,000 actual cash value? If the note funded the check, must they not both have equal value?"

The banker then pleaded the Fifth Amendment.

The attorney asked, "If the bank's deposits (liabilities) increase, do the bank's assets increase by an asset that has actual cash value?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Is there any exception?"

The banker said, "Not that I know of."

The attorney asked, "If the bank records a new deposit and records an asset on the bank's books having actual cash value, would the actual cash value always come from a customer of the bank or an investor or a lender to the bank?"

The banker thought for a moment and said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Is it the bank policy to record the promissory note as a bank asset offset by a new liability?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney said, "Does the promissory note have actual cash value equal to the amount of the bank loan check?"

The banker said "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Does this bookkeeping entry prove that the borrower provided actual cash value to fund the bank loan check?"

The banker said, "Yes, the bank president told us to do it this way."

The attorney asked, "How much actual cash value did the bank loan to obtain the promissory note?"

The banker said, "Nothing."

The attorney asked, "How much actual cash value did the bank receive from the borrower?"

The banker said, "$50,000."

The attorney said, "Is it true you received $50,000 actual cash value from the borrower, plus monthly payments and then you foreclosed and never invested one cent of legal tender or other depositors' money to obtain the promissory note in the first place? Is it true that the borrower financed the whole transaction?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Are you telling me the borrower agreed to give the bank $50,000 actual cash value for free and that the banker returned the actual cash value back to the same person as a bank loan?"

The banker said, "I was not there when the borrower agreed to the loan."

The attorney asked, "Do the standard FED publications show the bank receives actual cash value from the borrower for free and that the bank returns it back to the borrower as a bank loan?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney said, "Do you believe the bank does this without the borrower's knowledge or written permission or authorization?"

The banker said, "No."

The attorney asked, "To the best of your knowledge, is there written permission or authorization for the bank to transfer $50,000 of actual cash value from the borrower to the bank and for the bank to keep it for free?

The banker said, "No."

Does this allow the bank to use this $50,000 actual cash value to fund the $50,000 bank loan check back to the same borrower, forcing the borrower to pay the bank $50,000 plus interest? "

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney said, "If the bank transferred $50,000 actual cash value from the borrower to the bank, in this part of the transaction, did the bank loan anything of value to the borrower?"

The banker said, "No." He knew that one must first deposit something having actual cash value (cash, check, or promissory note) to fund a check.

The attorney asked, "Is it the bank policy to first transfer the actual cash value from the alleged borrower to the lender for the amount of the alleged loan?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Does the bank pay IRS tax on the actual cash value transferred from the alleged borrower to the bank?"

The banker answered, "No, because the actual cash value transferred shows up like a loan from the borrower to the bank, or a deposit which is the same thing, so it is not taxable."

The attorney asked, "If a loan is forgiven, is it taxable?"

The banker agreed by saying, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Is it the bank policy to not return the actual cash value that they received from the alleged borrower unless it is returned as a loan from the bank to the alleged borrower?"

"Yes", the banker replied.

The attorney said, "You never pay taxes on the actual cash value you receive from the alleged borrower and keep as the bank's property?"

"No. No tax is paid.", said the crying banker.

The attorney asked, "When the lender receives the actual cash value from the alleged borrower, does the bank claim that it then owns it and that it is the property of the lender, without the bank loaning or risking one cent of legal tender or other depositors' money?"

The banker said, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Are you telling me the bank policy is that the bank owns the promissory note (actual cash value) without loaning one cent of other depositors' money or legal tender, that the alleged borrower is the one who provided the funds deposited to fund the bank loan check, and that the bank gets funds from the alleged borrower for free? Is the money then returned back to the same person as a loan which the alleged borrower repays when the bank never gave up any money to obtain the promissory note? Am I hearing this right? I give you the equivalent of $50,000, you return the funds back to me, and I have to repay you $50,000 plus interest? Do you think I am stupid?"

In a shaking voice the banker cried, saying, "All the banks are doing this. Congress allows this."

The attorney quickly responded, "Does Congress allow the banks to breach written agreements, use false and misleading advertising, act without written permission, authorization, and without the alleged borrower's knowledge to transfer actual cash value from the alleged borrower to the bank and then return it back as a loan?"

The banker said, "But the borrower got a check and the house."

The attorney said, "Is it true that the actual cash value that was used to fund the bank loan check came directly from the borrower and that the bank received the funds from the alleged borrower for free?"

"It is true", said the banker.

The attorney asked, "Is it the bank's policy to transfer actual cash value from the alleged borrower to the bank and then to keep the funds as the bank's property, which they loan
out as bank loans?"

The banker, showing tears of regret that he had been caught, confessed, "Yes."

The attorney asked, "Was it the bank's intent to receive actual cash value from the borrower and return the value of the funds back to the borrower as a loan?"

The banker said, "Yes." He knew he had to say yes because of the bank policy.

The attorney asked, "Do you believe that it was the borrower's intent to fund his own bank loan check?"

The banker answered, "I was not there at the time and I cannot know what went through the borrower's mind."

The attorney asked, "If a lender loaned a borrower $10,000 and the borrower refused to repay the money, do you believe the lender is damaged?"

The banker thought. If he said no, it would imply that the borrower does not have to repay. If he said yes, it would imply that the borrower is damaged for the loan to the bank of which the bank never repaid. The banker answered, "If a loan is not repaid, the lender is damaged."

The attorney asked, "Is it the bank policy to take actual cash value from the borrower, use it to fund the bank loan check, and never return the actual cash value to the borrower?"

The banker said, "The bank returns the funds."

The attorney asked, "Was the actual cash value the bank received from the alleged borrower returned as a return of the money the bank took or was it returned as a bank loan to the borrower?"

The banker said, "As a loan."

The attorney asked, "How did the bank get the borrower's money for free?"

The banker said, "That is how it works."

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Ron, here is a break down with start and stop dates for the 9th wave. I pulled this from Ian Lungold's old work for the last 8th levels and recalculated the dates for the 9th level. This may be helpful. Thanks for your work.


February 11th - 1st Day
First 20 day Tun cycle - 1st Day
February 11th. is 1 and the start of the first 20 day Tun Cycle. 1 = Initiates

Cycle one is a period of light or an opening for the growth of consciousness. The seed is planted and it is time for a new beginning to create the flow in a new direction. For some it may have been a time of being unsure as we entered a new millennium. One is the beginning of all things and new perceptions are available.

March 3rd - 1st Night
Second 20 day Tun cycle -- 1st Night
March 3rd is 2 and the next 20 days. 2 = Creates a reaction

Cycle two is a period of dark or the opportunity to apply the enlightenment just received from creations flow. The germination of the seed allows for new points of view. To be or not to be is the question. We are separate but one. We are 2 sides of the same coin and the coin will not be whole if we only look at one side. It is the application of "initiates". After the seed is planted, does the seed grow or not? Have you noticed that before something begins we hold our breath in anticipation? Breathe in and let go with trust.

March 23rd - 2nd Day
Third 20 day Tun cycle - 2nd Day
March 23rd. is 3 and the next 20 days. 3 = Activates

Cycle three is another period of light, in nature the seed sprouts and displays 2 leaves. New points of view override old ones. History has shown this period to be a time of civil turmoil. This is the new light that brings the movement. The question is answered through communication. Sept 11, 2001, a big movement was communicated to the world.

April 20th - 2nd Night.
Forth 20 day Tun cycle -- 2nd Night
April 12th is 4 and the next 20 days. 4 = Stabilizes

Cycle four is a period of dark when polarized factions come to blows over their differences. In human history these are peeks of violence. The 4 sides of a square bringing complete balance. The 4 directions connect with the center to bring about freedom from past barriers.

May 2nd - 3rd Day
Fifth 20 day Tun cycle -- 3rd Day
May 2nd. is 5 and the next 20 days. 5 = Empowers

Cycle five is another period of light and in nature the development of a root system and the second set of leaves that will be the permanent part of the plant. Lies are disclosed so that progress is not blocked.

May 22nd - 3rd Night
Sixth 20 day Tun cycle -- 3rd Night
May 22nd. is 6. 6 = Creates flow

Cycle six is another period of dark and the seedling set of leaves are dropped from the plant as another set of leaves spring from the top. Failed systems are washed away, usually be force.

June 11th - 4th Day
Seventh 20 day Tun cycle -- 4th Day
June 11th. is 7 and the next 20 days. 7 = Reveals

Cycle seven is a period of light where in the plants life good progress is made for it to develop into a strong tree, the taproot grows deep to firmly attach the plant while the stock thickens and branches form. It is a period of expansion of the foundations laid. New points of view and ways of doing things take dominance.

July 1st - 4th Night
Eighth 20 day Tun cycle -- 4th Night
July 1st. is 8 and the next 20 days. 8 = Harmonizes

Cycle eight is a period of dark and brings the application of new procedures. The plant multiplies its leaves and root system abundantly. In human evolution it has been a time of rebuilding and healing.

July 21st - 5th Day
Ninth 20 day Tun cycle -- 5th Day
July 21st. is 9 and the next 20 days. 9 = Creates forward movement

Cycle nine is the brightest period of light (Quetzalcoatl -- God of Light -- Christ consciousness) and in the plants life it is when the chemicals are produced that carry information for the buds to form. In this period was when art was invented, the message of Jesus moved over Earth, Einstein discovered the theory of relativity and America with the victory of WW1 rose to world power.

August 10th - 5th Night
Tenth 20 day Tun cycle -- 5th Night
August 10th is 10 and the next 20 days. 10 = Challenge

Cycle ten is the darkest period of dark and in the plants life it is the growth of the bud. In your life it was puberty. This has been a time of great physical hardships or major conflict. Going back in time, the Illonian Ice Age, Neanderthals going extinct, World War II, the Great Depression of the 1930's and more recently the World markets finding challenges and crashing in December 2008 were examples of this cycles energy.

August 30th - 6th Day
Eleventh 20 day Tun cycle -- 6th Day
August 30th is 11 and the next 20 days. 11 = Creates clarity

Cycle eleven is an enlightenment period of light and this brought the flower in a plants life. For you it was adolescence. In human history this was the creation of the 1st tools, the 1st attempts at agriculture and constructed shelter, the renaissance and the flower children of the 1960's. This has also recently seen the Flowering of our spiritual consciousness on a galactic level. Many of us are meeting our galactic friends.

September 19th - 6th Night
Twelfth 20 day Tun - 6th Night
September19th. is 12 and the next 20 days. 12 = Creates understanding

Cycle twelve is the last period of dark. In the plant's life the flower wilts and dies, setting the stage for the fruit development or of seedpods that will dry. This is what happened to the Maya civilization right on queue. Throughout human history there have been conflicts and revolts during this period, most recent of these being the Vietnam War.

October 9th - 7th Day
Thirteenth 20 day Tun cycle - 7th Day
October 9th. is 13 and the next 20 days. 13 = Completes

Cycle thirteen and a period of bright light, a time of readiness for something new and different. This is a time of ascension -- going from one level to the next higher level. The plant spreads the seeds or drops the fruit to begin again a thousand times over. In human history it was during these repeated cycles of seed to mature fruit that consciousness developed Homo sapiens, agriculture and domesticated herds, signed treaties to establish the sovereignty of nations and their people and put up the Internet creating a planetary consciousness in 1992.

October 28th 2011 Unity- A New Dawn

NOTE: When does the ninth wave actually begin? This is from Carl Calleman's website, "I have probably contributed myself to the confusion that reigns when it comes to the beginning date of the Universal wave movement and have given different times for this. What we know is that the calendar develops according to nine wave movements, where the longest one goes back to the birth of the universe, and they all differ from one another with a factor of twenty. According to such a fractal view of the prophetic Mayan calendar system the ninth wave would then be only 234 days long made up of 13 different uaxaclahunkin (18 day) periods. This places the beginning of the ninth wave at March 9, 2011 and that of the preceding wave (Conscious Convergence) at July 17, 2010. These are points in time that are expected to mark significant frequency increases and accelerations of time." (

Originally, the date given was February 10 or 11, 2011 – depending on when the source was recorded. Ian lundgold was the one that first introduced me, through his videos, to the entire concept of the evolution of consciousness regarding the Mayan Calendar. Before that, I had bought into the December 21, 2012 scenario. After listening to Ian's description, I simply felt that that was more correct than all that I had looked at previously. It just felt better, just as it feels better to me to use 13 20-day periods. Not only is this more in keeping with the numerical system of the Mayan calendars, it also comes closest to the period of human gestation, which somehow seems significant to me.

In the final analysis, I don't think it really matters which is correct. It will be obvious that the energies of this ninth wave will continue to produce radical, visible changes in our world. This is the awakening.


Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE

GLOBAL FRAUD: GLOBAL HOPE - posted 2/28/11

Address to the International UFO Congress
Fort McDowell Resort, Scottsdale, Arizona

Saturday, February 26, 2011

by Hon. Paul Hellyer, P.C.
Former Canadian Minister of National Defence

The world financial system is a total fraud. It is one gargantuan Ponzi scheme, no better than the one Bernie Madoff used to swindle his friends and neighbors, and thousands of times worse if you add up the total number of victims it has ripped off over countless generations.

The principal difference between the two schemes is that Madoff was acting outside the law while the international banking cartel has persuaded generation after generation of monarchs, presidents and prime ministers to provide legislative protection for their larceny.

The banks Ponzi scheme is alarmingly simple. They lend the same money to several people or institutions at the same time and collect interest on it from each. What the banks really lend, however, is their credit, and what they take back in compensation for that privilege is a debt that must be repaid with interest.

The number of times they lend the same money is called leverage. The practice is as old as the hills but for our purposes we can start with the goldsmiths of Lombard Street in London, England, who accepted deposits for which they issued certificates redeemable on demand. They paid their depositors a nominal interest rate on the understanding that they could lend the money to their customers at higher interest rates. They soon found that they could lend more than they had in their vaults because only a few depositors came in to redeem their gold or silver at any one time. It was a scam. It was illegal. Nevertheless they got away with it for a long while and the scam was legitimized when the Bank of England was chartered to help King William finance his war. Rich people subscribed £1,200,000 in gold and silver, as capital, to found the bank, which then was lent to the government at 8 percent. To show his appreciation the King allowed the bank to print £1,200,000 in banknotes and lend them at high interest rates. In effect, the bank was allowed to lend the same money twice – once to the government and once to the people.

Over the years, due to the avarice of the banks and the complicity of the politicians, that ratio has increased dramatically. In the early days of the 20th century, federal chartered U.S. banks were required to keep gold reserves of 25 percent. That means they were allowed to lend the same money four times. I remember when Canadian banks were required to maintain a cash reserve of 8 percent. That means they were allowed to lend the same money 12½ times.

Today, thanks to Milton Friedman’s irrational flip-flop from being a proponent of 100% cash reserves to the opposite extreme of zero reserves, and the adoption of his ideas by the major central banks of the world in 1974, multiples have increased dramatically – in some cases to as much as 20 to 1 or more. Banks only keep enough cash to meet day-to-day demands for those few customers who go in and request it, and consequently the fraud is virtually total.

The system works this way. Suppose that you want to borrow $35,000 to buy a new car. You visit your friendly banker and ask for a loan. He or she will ask you for collateral – some stocks, bonds, a second mortgage on your house or cottage or, if you are unable to supply any of these, the co-signature of a well-to-do friend or relative. When the collateral requirement is satisfied you will be asked to sign a note for the principal amount with an agreed rate of interest.

When the paperwork is complete, and the note signed, your banker will make an entry on the bank’s computer and, presto, a $35,000 credit will appear in your account which you can use to buy your car. The important point is that seconds earlier that money did not exist. It was created out of thin air – so to speak.

The banking equation is a species of double-entry bookkeeping where your note becomes an asset on the bank’s books, and the new money that was deposited to your account is a liability. The profit for the bank comes from the difference between the low rate of interest, if any, you would be paid on your deposit if you didn’t spend the borrowed money immediately, and the much higher rate you would be obliged to pay on your note – the technical term is “the spread.”

At some point, however, you have to pay off your note and any interest owing. And not only you but everyone else who has borrowed “money” from banks – including governments which, by the way, own the right to print money but that have irresponsibly handed the right over to an elite group of private bankers. Anyone who defaults is in big trouble. Individuals who default will have the assets they pledged as collateral seized by the bank. A government that is in danger of defaulting, will be forced to borrow from the International Monetary Fund, which will then tell that government how to run its affairs including cutting back on services and selling off public assets to the international vulture capitalists.

In reality, then, the banks have turned the world into one humongous pawn shop. You hock your stocks, bonds, house, business, rich mother-in-law or country and the bank(s) will give you a loan based on the value of the collateral.

A world system where all the money is created as debt is a perpetual disaster in the making. It is like a giant balloon that the banks pump full of debt. The balloon gets larger and larger until the debt load becomes too heavy to carry, and then it is like a balloon with a pin stuck in it. The system crashes and thousands or sometimes millions of innocent people lose their jobs, homes, farms and businesses.

Almost any high school student should be able to see that any monetary system based on debt creation is totally insane. The total world debt, mathematically, is always tending toward infinity – and there is no possible way of paying it off. The real money (legal tender) to do so doesn’t exist. And the real economy that depends on cash to grow shifts into low gear whenever the supply of credit money dries up.

Not surprisingly, there have been 25 recessions and depressions in the United States since 1890. In several cases, including the Great Depression of the 1930s and the current Great Recession, the evidence indicates that the meltdown was anticipated by a few insiders who helped trigger the catastrophe.

In the wake of the Great Depression, the U.S. Senate Banking and Currency Committee Report that became widely known as the Pecora Report on the Practices of Stock Exchanges, indicated that there were insiders who benefitted from the crash. “Legal chicanery and pitch darkness were the banker’s stoutest allies,” Pecora wrote in his memoir. Similar allegations were evident in Charles Ferguson damning documentary “Inside Job,” relating to the 2007-2008 meltdown. These reports, and other historical evidence prove beyond any doubt that much of Wall Street is rotten to the core. It has become one gigantic millstone around the neck of both the American and world economies.

The collateral damage from the recent meltdown has been staggering. The U.S. Bureau of Labor estimated that 8.4 million jobs were lost in the U.S. alone. Most countries experienced similar dramatic losses. The reduction in asset values worldwide has been estimated at $20 trillion U.S. dollars, yet not a single one of the culprits is in jail. You would think that someone would have had the decency to launch a class action for at least $10 trillion against every individual and every organization that contributed to the catastrophe in any way.

It boggles the mind that a system so vulnerable to manipulation would ever have come into existence in the first place. The evolution did not happen by accident. It was not guided by the mythical invisible hand of Adam Smith. On the contrary, for more than a century-and-a-half, it was engineered by the barely visible hand of the Rothschild family and its allies, and since World War II by the Rockefeller family. The two dynasties combined forces to exercise influence on many fronts sheltered by the cloak of secrecy established by the Bilderberg Group.

The long term influence of the banking cartel is incalculable. Their biggest coup was the establishment of the Federal Reserve System in the United States. The big New York banks really didn’t like the idea of genuine competition, so a small group held a secret meeting at the private resort of J.P. Morgan on Jekyll Island, off the coast of Georgia. Their scheme, devised by Paul M. Warburg, and subsequently adopted by Congress, is a legal private monopoly of the U.S. money supply operated for the benefit of the few under the guise of protecting and promoting the public interest.

It is a tribute to the skill of the international bankers that they were able to draft a bill, revise it, change its name and make the few window dressing compromises necessary to get it adopted by Congress just before Christmas when quite a few Representatives must have been dreaming of sugar plum fairies instead of exercising due diligence. Only Charles Lindberg Sr. seemed to grasp the essence of what was going on.

To put it bluntly, the Congress transferred its sovereign constitutional right to create money to the sole custody of a group of private bankers. The magnitude of the hoist is unprecedented in the history of the world – the numbers now are in the high trillions.

Soon after the bill was passed the magnitude of the tragedy began to be recognized. William Jennings Bryan, who acted as Democrat whip, later said: “In my long political career, the one thing I genuinely regret is my part in getting the banking and currency legislation (Federal Reserve Act of 1913) enacted into law.” President Woodrow Wilson, just three years after passage of the Act, wrote: “A great industrial nation is controlled by its system of credit. Our system of credit is concentrated (in the Federal Reserve System). The growth of the nation, therefore, and all our activities are in the hands of a few men…. We have come to be one of the worst ruled, one of the most completely controlled and dominated governments in the civilized world.” But the bill was not repealed; almost 100 years later the sell-out is still the law. This makes you wonder what the people’s representatives have been doing to earn their salaries.

The people in charge of the original deception were very far-seeing. They realized that when future governments had to borrow from them they would need a constant income stream to pay the interest on the bonds. So they persuaded the government to introduce income taxes, first as a temporary measure, but later permanently, so it would be able to meet its obligations to the bondholders. In fiscal year 2005 total individual income taxes in the U.S. totalled $927 billion. Of that amount $352 billion, or 38%, was required just to pay interest on the federal debt. The figure would be higher now.

The banksters, as they were often called, then decided that an independent press might catch on to the chicanery. Oscar Callaway is reported in the Congressional Record of February 9, 1917 as follows.

“In March, 1915, the J.P. Morgan interests, the steel, shipbuilding, and powder interests, and their subsidiary organizations, got together 12 men high up in the newspaper world, and employed them to select the most influential newspapers in the United States and sufficient number of them to control generally the policy of the daily press of the United States… They found it was only necessary to purchase the control of 25 of the greatest papers. The 25 papers were agreed upon; emissaries were sent to purchase the policy, national and international, of these papers; … an editor was furnished for each paper to properly supervise and edit information regarding the questions of preparedness, militarism, financial policies, and other things of national and international nature considered vital to the interests of the purchasers [and to suppress] everything in opposition to the wishes of the interests served.”

It has been suggested that the Bilderberger Group may have taken a leaf from the Morgan precedent to protect their interests in the late 20 th and early 21 st centuries. That is impossible to prove because its members are sworn to secrecy, and the press won’t report on its meetings. Could it be mere coincidence that the monetary system, the downside of globalization and the decades-long cover-up of the extraterrestrial presence and technology (especially the clean energy sources that would impact the value of oil stocks), the three subjects of most direct beneficial interests of the banksters, are the three subjects that are avoided like the plague by the mainline press?

I am not willing to go so far as to say that the men behind the international banking system are evil men because their thoughts are private. But Sir Josiah, later Baron Stamp, a former director of the Bank of England, has given us a rare snapshot of the truth.

“Banking was conceived in iniquity and was born in sin. The Bankers own the earth. Take it away from them, but leave them the power to create money, and with a flick of the pen they will create enough money to buy it back again. However, take that power away from them and all the great fortunes like mine will disappear, and they ought to disappear, for this would be a happier and better world to live in. But if you wish to remain the slaves of Bankers, and pay the cost of your own slavery, let them continue to create money.”

In the latest meltdown of 2007-2008, the Fed acted quickly to prevent the Ponzi pyramid from collapsing completely. It printed trillions of dollars to bail out the banks and a few industries that were highly indebted to banks.

But what did the Fed do for the taxpayers whose money was so wildly diluted to save the banks? Nothing! They were left to fend for themselves. Millions of people lost their jobs, their farms, their houses, their hopes, and their dignity as a result of circumstances beyond their control. The taxpayers bailed out the banks, but got nothing in return.

The same is true of governments who came so quickly to the rescue. As a result of the meltdown their revenues were decreased so they were forced to incur or increase their deficits, as well as to start cutting back on essential services.

The Fed pretended to be helping stimulate the economy by reducing interest rates to near zero. It would be an interesting exercise to find out what happened to all of this low-cost money. It would be a good subject for Congressional attention. How much did the banks use to buy up domestic and foreign assets at fire-sale prices? Was any of it used by financial institutions to try to corner world food markets and raise prices at a time when millions are starving?

No doubt some taxpayers did take advantage of the low interest rates available but were they warned about the old bait and switch game? Anyone who acquires assets with cheap money runs the risk of losing their property when the Fed ultimately raises rates. It’s all part of the boom-bust cycle inherent in our infinitely silly monetary system.

The Economics Profession

What does all this have to say about the economics profession? What it really says isn’t fit to print. Someone once said that if you put 20 economists in a room you will get 21 opinions.

That is not my experience. If you get 20 economists together they are likely to give you one stock answer, or at most two. And if there is one dissenter he or she is likely to be drowned out by the 19, squawking like a flock of parrots the words memorized from what their professors taught them.

I have witnessed this herd-like mentality firsthand. When I was first elected to the House of Commons in 1949 there were only a handful of Keynesians in Ottawa. Twenty years later nearly everyone was a Keynesian including, I am told, Richard Nixon.

At that time there were only a few monetarists around. But they spread like mushrooms and soon dominated the economic landscape. It reached the stage when Keynes was anathema, and it was almost impossible to get a tenured position in a school of economics unless you were part of Milton Friedman’s monetarist revolution.

Apparently little if any thought was given to the possibility that neither Keynes nor Friedman had got it right. The former was a bit closer to reality than the latter, but both theories foundered on the rocks of one inescapable truth. Both assumed that the economic system is self-correcting, yet more than two centuries of experience has demonstrated clearly that it is not! Someone has to be at the tiller charged with steering clear of the shoals and rocks of economic disaster and that person has to be someone who is responsible to the people and not the self-serving boom-busters.

Global Warming

While bank reform is the most urgent problem facing the world today, it is global warming that has equally or even greater long term consequences. It is a total fraud to pretend that we have thirty, forty or fifty years to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. There are reputable scientists who think we may already have crossed the Rubicon. Even if that is true, we can’t roll the clock back; we can only influence the present and the future. Each of the past three decades has been the hottest on record, according to a report released in July 2010 by the U.S. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. The report pulled together data from ten climate change indicators, measured by 160 research groups in 48 countries.

The data shows sea levels are rising; snow cover in the Arctic melts earlier; the average air temperature is rising; ocean surface temperatures have also been rising; the summer sea ice cover is declining; sea air temperature has been rising; for 19 years glaciers have lost mass; land air temperature has been rising – a global trend.

All of this puts the lie to the propaganda of the oil industry aimed at creating doubt about the reliability of scientific data. Taking a leaf from the tobacco industry, which managed to create doubt about the safety of their products years after they privately knew the facts, the oil industry has been attempting to raise doubt about the urgency of replacing fossil fuels with clean energy, and with considerable success. In their case, however, the stakes are higher. It was a tragedy that so many people lost their lives through lack of sound information about the consequences of smoking. In the case of global warming, however, many times more people will have their lives put at risk.

Still the oil cartel is making plans as if nothing is going to change, and that we are going to be stuck with a fatal oil economy for decades until the damage is irreversible. It is too late to begin more offshore drilling. It is too late for new developments in the Alberta oil sands. It is too late for more noisy windmill farms. The transition must start now, with a 10-year deadline.

Is that possible? Of course it’s possible but only with the kind of mobilization essential to win a war for survival. One excuse for inaction has been the lack of money due to government deficits and debt. But that obstacle can be overcome in less than a year if governments and legislatures change the system and exercise their sovereign right to make what is physically possible financially possible. Heaven knows there are millions of unemployed workers worldwide waiting to rise to the challenge.

The other major obstacle has been a lack of consensus on the form of clean energy to use to replace fossil fuels. And that brings me, finally, to the subject of the day, the extraterrestrial presence and technology.

The Extraterrestrial Presence and Technology

It is a fraud for the U.S. government to pretend that it is not interested in UFOs. In fact, it has been a matter of high and probably pre-eminent interest for decades.

An early Canadian ufologist, Wilbert Smith, who was a senior employee at the Department of Transport, where I became minister not long after his retirement, wrote a top secret memorandum to the Controller of Communications dated November 21, 1950 asking permission to set up a group to study the geomagnetic aspects of UFOs propulsion systems.

As part of his memorandum Smith said that he had made discreet enquiries through the Canadian embassy staff in Washington where he obtained the following information.

(a) The matter is the most highly classified subject in the United States Government, rating higher even than the H-bomb.
(b) Flying saucers exist.
(c) Their modus operandi is unknown but concentrated effort is being made by a small group, headed by Doctor Vannevar Bush.
(d) The entire matter is considered by the United States authorities to be of tremendous significance.

So, Dr. Vannevar Bush, one of America’s pre-eminent scientists, and a team of experts he had assembled, were already working on back-engineering by 1950. (Back-engineering is the combined art and science of analyzing an object, in this case parts of a crashed vehicle, in order to determine its characteristics for possible replication or adaptation.)

Many people who are interested in the subject of UFOs use one of the Roswell crashes of July 1947 as their starting line. Recent evidence, however, confirms that the U.S. Army Air Corps was in the crash retrieval business before that. Paola Harris, on July 5, 2010 interviewed two men, Jose Padilla and Reme Baca, aged 9 and 7 at the time, who witnessed a saucer crash on Padilla land near San Antonio, New Mexico, in August 1945. In her new book Exopolitics: Stargate to a New Reality, Paola gives the detailed account of what these men saw as children, the actual crash, the creatures’ appearance, the pieces of the craft they took, the military clean up, and an in-depth analysis of the significance of the case.

I had the opportunity to chat with Reme Baca by telephone recently and the thing that stuck in my mind was that when Sgt. Avila came to ask Mr. Padilla’s permission to enter his land to retrieve the “object,” he referred to it as “an experimental weather balloon.” That was exactly the same ruse that Brigadier General Roger Ramey used in reference to the Roswell incident two years later. Apparently there was a considerable lack of imagination on the Army’s part.

In later years the Air Force, that had succeeded the Army Air Corps, became much more sophisticated in its misinformation and disinformation techniques. These include having the Star Visitors portrayed in movies as sinister beings that we should be fearful of – probably without justification.

Another fascinating case that Paola brought to my attention not long ago was that of Charles Hall, the physicist and information technology professional, who worked as an airman meteorologist at the USAF bombing and gunnery range at Indian Springs, Nevada, in the 1960s.

Charles worked in close contact with Tall Whites, a species that I had been previously unfamiliar with. Over a period of months he learned to lose his fear of the aliens who lived, worked and played on Air Force property.

In a two-hour telephone conversation he gave me many of the characteristics of the Whites, described the scout ships in which they travelled and said most of them were assembled in the U.S. Furthermore, he talked about the mother ship arriving on the nights of the full moon and sliding into its hangar cut into the side of a mountain nearby.

It was all fascinating stuff that included the fact that the Tall Whites were working closely with the USAF and exchanging technology in the mid-1960s. So it is very difficult to imagine how much has been achieved in 60 years of back-engineering alien technology that was much more advanced than our own. There is no doubt that myriad scientists, technicians, and many of America’s most advanced aircraft and weapons corporations must have achieved what would have been classified as miracles just a few years ago.

It is alleged that the U.S. engineers working in one of the vast underground facilities have built vehicles that are virtually indistinguishable from those of other planets. If this is true, to what purpose will they be put, and will it be for good purposes or military purposes?

The area of discovery that is most relevant to this presentation, however, is the question of exotic energy sources. Years ago it was reported that both zero point and cold fusion energy had been developed. These are energy sources that could facilitate the 10-year target date and not only revolutionalize the world for the better, but help preserve it as a happy habitat for Earthlings.

In the unlikely event that these sources are not yet commercially viable, all we would have to do is ask one of the friendly species to help us and they would because they are deeply concerned about our stewardship. In the event that we are still treating them as enemy aliens, and doing our best to shoot them down, we would have to curb our lust of conflict and adopt an acceptable level of intergalactic civility.

Better People

The third essential change is for us as individuals. A just and peaceful world is not possible when it is riddled with graft, fraud and corruption of all kinds. Greed is king and mammon rules the world.

Institutions have to change too. For centuries major religions have been selling their alleged superiority or exclusiveness at the point of a sword, leading to the deaths of thousands of innocents. The three Abrahamic religions, for example, all claim the inside route to paradise. Mathematically that is impossible. It is far more probable, mathematically, that they are all wrong and that the truth is larger and more inclusive.

Ancient and modern history both suggest that there is no hope of a just and peaceful world unless all religions, and those with no religion, forget their differences and start working together to build the Kingdom of God on Earth. I define this as a world where every child can expect food to eat, clean water to drink, adequate clothing to wear, a roof overhead, access to medical support and enough education to be able to determine how best he or she can serve humankind positively, with dignity and self-fulfillment.

What a wonderful world that would be! But it would require a 180-degree change in policies and priorities and a serious effort to apply the Golden Rule that all religions claim as a common thread.

The application of the Golden Rule would mean an end to empire building, and the pursuit of military power and advantage. The U.S., for example, would have to stop being its own worst enemy. The declaration of the war on terror was the biggest strategic blunder I have seen.

On the 11 th day of September 2001, following the attacks on the World Trade Center, the United States enjoyed the sympathy of the world, including Arab states and populations. The threat from al-Qaeda was limited and quite within the potential of police and intelligence operations to cope with.

The situation changed dramatically with the launch of a war on Iraq. The goodwill began to evaporate overnight. Soon, instead of a few dozens insurgents the numbers of young Muslims willing to die for their cause multiplied to thousands and a great chasm of hate and mistrust enveloped much of the world.

The U.S. has consistently refused to be even-handed in the Israeli-Palestinian dispute, and the Israelis deceive themselves, and the world, when they claim to be the victims. For a long while peace has been within their grasp if they could have agreed to a just settlement, and establishment of a vibrant Palestinian state. But a handful of fundamentalists have always succeeded in disrupting the peace process because they are not willing to accept the great Rabbi Hillel’s admonition. “So always treat others the way you would like them to treat you; that is the message of the Law and the Prophets.” Meanwhile the peace and stability of the world remains in jeopardy.

The world community must adopt principles and practices that override fundamentalists of any stripe whether they be Christian, Muslim, Jewish or Economic. In addition, religious people should pay more attention to their holy books. There is nothing in the Bible that would legitimize a preventive war, with its carpet bombing, or the launch of a drone or missile intended to kill one person when there is risk that innocent bystanders will also die. Similarly, there is nothing in the Qur’an that would justify suicide bombing that results in the random death of innocents.

Global Hope

If you get the impression that the world is going to hell in a hand basket you have heard me correctly. But it doesn’t need to be so. There are remedies but they involve massive change in the areas discussed – none of which are even on the political radar at present. There is light at the end of the tunnel but, as Sir John Quinton, a former chairman of Barclay’s Bank said, “Bankers sometimes look on politicians as people who, when they see light at the end of the tunnel, order more tunnel.”

What we are really talking about is restoring democracy to countries that not only claim they have it, but also take pride in trying to export it, even though they don’t really qualify as democratic as defined in the dictionary. In Webster’s it is: “government in which supreme power is vested in the people and exercised by them or their elected representatives.” To begin, Wall Street has been the dominant power in the U.S. for decades, and still is. Add to that the fact that the Commander-in-Chief of the Armed Forces, the President of the United States, does not have the security clearance for a number of projects controlled by troops under his command, and you have to conclude that the U.S. is not really a democracy.

The same can be said about Canada, the United Kingdom, Germany and myriad countries that are really puppets of the International Financial System. In each case the real interests of citizen voters is subjugated to the demands of international finance.

There is a sad irony in reading U.S. history of the pre-revolutionary and revolutionary days. Historians often attribute the revolution to the tax on tea. On the other hand, “[Benjamin] Franklin cited restrictions upon paper money as one of the main reasons for the alienation of the American provinces from the mother country.” The U.S. won the revolutionary war but then lost the next critical one when it adopted the British banking system instead of pursuing the better model their provinces had been experimenting with.

For the U.S. now to inflict the British practice on countries around the world, using the International Monetary Fund and World Bank as enforcers, is comparable to the King’s edict that gave birth to the United States. So the financial chains of oppression have to be broken and freedom restored to citizens everywhere.

It’s time to forget the tea party and address the critically important issues facing the U.S. and the world. All of these issues are non-partisan by definition and deserve the attention and support of all genuine patriots without distinction of race, color, religion or political affiliation – both in the U.S. and worldwide. We must unite to preserve and enhance the beautiful satellite that is our birthright.

An Agenda for Action

The first and most urgent project is to clip the wings of the bankers and democratize the money-creation function. In the U.S. the Federal Reserve System must be abolished and its alleged function of regulating the money supply be assumed by the federal government or an agency under its direct control. The most powerful and valuable tool in the economic arsenal must be available to the representatives of the people who can be held responsible for their success or failure.

Some monetary reformers recommend that governments create 100% of new money in a debt free form, greenbacks or equivalent. In the interests of a fast and smooth transition I am suggesting that a ratio of 34% government-created money to 66% bank-created money would work satisfactorily. Banks would be required to maintain 34% cash reserves against their deposits.

The important thing is that governments must immediately create the large sums necessary to balance their budgets and get their economies running at maximum output again. I am talking about an infusion of perhaps $10 trillion U.S. dollar equivalent to start and more if needed to get economies up to speed and to reduce unemployment worldwide by at least half, with the creation of millions of new jobs.

Is this likely to cause massive inflation, as the financial cartel will immediately allege, because it is one of its longest running and most successful bugbears? The answer to their phony phonetics is a resounding “no.” As any economist should know, it is the amount of money that is created that influences prices, and not who prints it. So as long as governments limit what economists call “the multiplier effect” there will be no problem.

Certainly the present system has been inflationary. A 1950 U.S. dollar is only worth 7.5 cents today. A common sense monetary system should produce better results than that. So there is no reason why the banking system should not be fundamentally reformed – at once!

There are four other actions that I think we, the people of the world should demand of our politicians.

1. A law must be passed at once to prohibit all politicians, candidates for political office and political parties from accepting money from any financial institution as well as make it a criminal offense for any such institution either directly or indirectly to offer it.
2. World leaders must adopt a 10-year time frame to reduce greenhouse emissions by 90 percent.
3. That will only be possible if the U.S. discloses its knowledge of the ET presence and technology, and what has been accomplished in 60 years of back-engineering.
4. The U.N. should declare 2012 the year of forgiveness and reconciliation – a new era of cooperation and (agape) love between races, tribes, religions, nations, and regions both mondial and intergalactic. We have so much to learn from our star visitors in many areas including medicine and food production.

So the U.S. must relinquish its privileged position as the center of “the loop” as part of a new kind of leadership in creating the better world we all dream of.

International Finance vs. The People of the World

None of this vision of a just and peaceful world will be possible unless the all-pervasive power of the international banks has been broken. In 1999 I wrote a book in which I said the next world war would be between the banks and the people of the world. There have been skirmishes for centuries and, so far, the banks have always come out on top. They are now taking advantage of the recent meltdown, and the resulting sovereign debt crisis to line up their heavy artillery including the International Monetary Fund, the World Bank, the Federal Reserve System and the Bank for International Settlements for a final conclusive battle.

As always the aim of the game is to rob the people of the world of their sovereign right to govern their own affairs, and to entrench the power of the international banks, their elite industrial allies and a small cabal of military insiders who run the world as their private fiefdom. The word “unjust” is too small a word by far to describe what they are up to.

If any skeptics think I am overstating the case don’t take my word for it. Go to and read some of the books that can be used as references. A hundred pages of The Web of Debt, for example, setting out the history of money, will probably be enough to make you sick at your stomach. I stopped reading it at night because if often made me so angry I couldn’t sleep.

I entered politics more than 60 years ago because I thought recessions were quite unnecessary. They were monetary phenomena with a relatively easy fix. I have made hundreds of speeches on the subject and convinced a few thousand people. But never the movers and shakers. And the mainline press were less than helpful. They were so jaundiced that they were not interested in a maverick speaking truth to power. So it was always a case of David vs. Goliath, to use a Biblical analogy.

Now, for the first time, the power exists to turn the tables and go for the jugular. The internet is providing power to the people that they have never enjoyed before. The young people of the world, in concert with the thousands of their parents and others who care about the state of the world can use the power of social networking to effect a miracle on their own behalf and that of succeeding generations.

The valiant people of Tunisia and Egypt have shown the way by achieving what was believed to be impossible. We share their euphoria. At the same time they, and we, must acknowledge that it is only the beginning. Real freedom will only be possible when they have escaped from the tyranny of international banks, and Wall Street is no longer able to manipulate the price of their daily bread.

A good start might be to distribute a million copies of this speech and translate it into a number of languages. Then the rising generation can bombard the barricades through their social networks. Regime change is not necessary except for leaders who refuse to see the light. But concerned citizens of the world should band together and rattle the cages of all federal politicians. Tell them bluntly that they must vigorously support the above agenda or face inevitable defeat at the next election. It is a simple message, but the only one they understand.

At a press conference on March 29, 2001 announcing the U.S. was backing out of the Kyoto Protocol, President George W. Bush said, “A friend is someone who tells you the truth.” That is what I have been doing today. It is a message of global hope for every race, color, religion and nationality in the world and of peaceful relations with visitors from other realms.


Paul Hellyer
20 Bay St., 12 th Floor
Toronto, Ontario M5J 2N8 Canada

Tel: 416/850-1375

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


By GRETCHEN MORGENSON, Published: January 24, 2011,

Since the government took over Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, taxpayers have spent more than $160 million defending the mortgage finance companies and their former top executives in civil lawsuits accusing them of fraud. The cost was a closely guarded secret until last week, when the companies and their regulator produced an accounting at the request of Congress.

The bulk of those expenditures — $132 million — went to defend Fannie Mae and its officials in various securities suits and government investigations into accounting irregularities that occurred years before the subprime lending crisis erupted. The legal payments show no sign of abating.

Documents reviewed by The New York Times indicate that taxpayers have paid $24.2 million to law firms defending three of Fannie’s former top executives: Franklin D. Raines, its former chief executive; Timothy Howard, its former chief financial officer; and Leanne Spencer, the former controller.

Late last year, Randy Neugebauer, Republican of Texas and now chairman of the oversight subcommittee of the House Financial Services Committee, requested the figures from the Federal Housing Finance Agency. It is the regulator charged with overseeing the mortgage finance companies and acts as their conservator, trying to preserve the company’s assets on behalf of taxpayers.

“One of the things I feel very strongly about is we need to be doing everything we can to minimize any further exposure to the taxpayers associated with these companies,” Mr. Neugebauer said in an interview last week.

It is typical for corporations to cover such fees unless an executive is found to be at fault. In this case, if the former executives are found liable, the government can try to recoup the costs, but that could prove challenging.

Since Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac were taken over by the government in September 2008, their losses stemming from bad loans have mounted, totaling about $150 billion in a recent reckoning. Because the financial regulatory overhaul passed last summer did not address how to resolve Fannie and Freddie, Congress is expected to take up that complex matter this year.

In the coming weeks, the Treasury Department is expected to publish a report outlining the administration’s recommendations regarding the future of the companies.

Well before the credit crisis compelled the government to rescue Fannie and Freddie, accounting irregularities had engulfed both companies. Shareholders of Fannie and Freddie sued to recover stock losses incurred after the improprieties came to light.

Freddie’s problems arose in 2003 when it disclosed that it had understated its income from 2000 to 2002; the company revised its results by an additional $5 billion. In 2004, Fannie was found to have overstated its results for the preceding six years; conceding that its accounting was improper, it reduced its past earnings by $6.3 billion.

Mr. Raines retired in December 2004 and Mr. Howard resigned at the same time. Ms. Spencer left her position as controller in early 2005. The following year, the Office of Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, then the company’s regulator, published an in-depth report on the company’s accounting practices, accusing Fannie’s top executives of taking actions to manipulate profits and generate $115 million in improper bonuses.

The office sued Mr. Raines, Mr. Howard and Ms. Spencer in 2006, seeking $100 million in fines and $115 million in restitution. In 2008, the three former executives settled with the regulator, returning $31.4 million in compensation. Without admitting or denying the regulator’s allegations, Mr. Raines paid $24.7 million and Mr. Howard paid $6.4 million; Ms. Spencer returned $275,000.

Fannie Mae also settled a fraud suit brought by the Securities and Exchange Commission without admitting or denying the allegations; the company paid $400 million in penalties.

Lawyers for the three former Fannie executives did not respond to requests for comment. A company spokeswoman did not return a phone call or e-mail seeking comment.

In addition to the $160 million in taxpayer money, Fannie and Freddie themselves spent millions of dollars to defend former executives and directors before the government takeover. Freddie Mac had spent a total of $27.8 million. The expenses are significantly larger at Fannie Mae.

Legal costs incurred by Mr. Raines, Mr. Howard and Ms. Spencer in the roughly four and a half years prior to the government takeover totaled almost $63 million. The total incurred before the bailout by other high-level executives and board members was around $12 million, while an additional $18 million covered fees for lawyers for Fannie Mae officials below the level of executive vice president. Many of these individuals are provided lawyers because they are witnesses in the matters.

Employment contracts and company by-laws usually protect, or indemnify, executives and directors against liabilities, including legal fees associated with defending against such suits.

After the government moved to back Fannie and Freddie, the Federal Housing Finance Agency agreed to continue paying to defend the executives, with the taxpayers covering the costs.

But indemnification does not apply across the board. As is the case with many companies, Fannie Mae’s by-laws detail actions that bar indemnification for officers and directors. They include a person’s breach of the duty of loyalty to the company or its stockholders, actions taken that are not in good faith or intentional misconduct.

Richard S. Carnell, an associate professor at Fordham University Law School who was an assistant secretary of the Treasury for financial institutions during the 1990s, questions why Mr. Raines, Mr. Howard and others, given their conduct detailed in the Housing Enterprise Oversight report, are being held harmless by the government and receiving payment of legal bills as a result.

“Their duty of loyalty required them to put shareholders’ interests ahead of their own personal interests,” Mr. Carnell said. “Had they cared about the shareholders, they would not have staked Fannie’s reputation on dubious accounting. They defied their duty of loyalty and served themselves. At a moral level, they don’t deserve indemnification, much less payment of such princely sums.”

Asked why it has not cut off funding for these mounting legal bills, Edward J. DeMarco, the acting director of the Federal Housing Finance Agency, said: “I understand the frustration regarding the advancement of certain legal fees associated with ongoing litigation involving Fannie Mae and certain former employees. It is my responsibility to follow applicable federal and state law. Consequently, on the advice of counsel, I have concluded that the advancement of such fees is in the best interest of the conservatorship.”

If the former executives are found liable, they would be obligated to repay the government. But lawyers familiar with such disputes said it would be difficult to get individuals to repay sums as large as these. Lawyers for Mr. Raines, for example, have received almost $38 million so far, while Ms. Spencer’s bills exceed $31 million.

These individuals could bring further litigation to avoid repaying this money, legal specialists said.

Although the figures are not broken down by case, the largest costs are being generated by a lawsuit centering on accounting improprieties that erupted at Fannie Mae in 2004. This suit, a shareholder class action brought by the Ohio Public Employees Retirement System and the State Teachers Retirement System of Ohio, is being heard in federal court in Washington. Although it has been going on for six years, the judge has not yet set a trial date. Depositions are still being taken in the case, suggesting that it has much further to go with many more fees to be paid.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Posted on January 22, 2011 by concernedcitizensofflorida (in metagroups website on 1/25/11)


The Honorable Barack Obama
The President of the United States
1600 Pennsylvania Avenue
Washington, D.C. 20500

Re: The environmental impact of dispersing Corexit during and after the oil spill

Dear Mr. President;

The BP incident in the Gulf of Mexico has now been acknowledged as the greatest manmade disaster in history but there is yet another manmade disaster that must not be overlooked and has not been adequately addressed in the recently released report of the National Commission on the BP Deepwater Horizon oil disaster.

That second major disaster has been caused by the unnecessary use of the toxin Corexit dispersant. In early May of 2010 just after the crisis began, I requested that our Louisiana Attorney General Buddy Caldwell use whatever legal means were necessary to stop the use of this toxin. Shortly thereafter, Louisiana Governor Bobby Jindal requested that the use of this toxic dispersant be discontinued because of the long-term environmental damage. And still later, it was reported in the media that you also ordered BP to stop using Corexit. Surprisingly, I also read in the media that they even refused your request.

Mr. President, my concern is that this toxic and damaging chemical is still being used and it will compound the long-term damage to our state, our citizens, our eco-system, our economy, our seafood industry, our wildlife and our culture.

I am well aware that our emphasis, resources and energy is currently engaged working through the administrative and legal proceedings of the oil disaster but we must also recognize and begin the same process to address the damage Corexit has done and will continue to do as we go forward.

As the State Senator for District 1 in the southeastern corner of the State of Louisiana representing the parishes of St. Tammany, St. Bernard, Orleans and Plaquemines, I respectfully request that you have your administrative officials provide the information requested in this letter. I need to make that information available to my constituents who are seeing their lives and lands threatened and their way of life hanging in the balance. Due to the threats to public safety and ecological realities, I am compelled to write this letter requesting answers to my questions regarding the role of the United States Government in administering the response to the crises in the Gulf. It is apparent that the response directed by our government was inadequate because it allowed the use of Corexit dispersants which increased the toxicity level of the spilled oil and delivered no substantial benefit.

Corexit dispersants increased the toxicity of the oil itself when the two were mixed together. Its use caused the cross contamination of the Gulf water column by forcing the transfer of the surface oil downward through the water column, causing the oil to sink to the Gulf floor. The result was an unnecessary elevated negative impact as this same oil moved ashore later to the tidal zones delivering toxic weathered oil to coastal residents, tourists and businesses and workers in the Gulf region.

Government officials stated over and over that the use of the dispersants was designed to break up the oil into smaller digestible parts to be consumed by the sub-sea living micro-organisms. This strategy is unsubstantiated. In fact, the Corexit dispersant created the opposite results since Corexit contains toxic ingredients which act as biocides to prevent microbial digestion of the oil. Physical evidence supports that the entire response administered by government agencies have been inadequate.

Independent scientists have reported the waters and our shores of the Gulf are toxic. It has been reported that the toxins in the Gulf waters are directly linked to the distribution of dispersants (Corexit 9500 and 9527A) introduced this summer (and since then) during the BP disaster. It has not all evaporated (gassed off) or digested by the microbes and the remaining contamination needs to be cleaned up and not hidden so that the toxins can be removed quickly from our Gulf for the safety of our citizens and to allow what remaining species of sea and wild life to recover; if at all possible.

Immediately following the accident, I spent a great deal of time researching this issue and met with numerous eminently qualified scientists and professionals with the hope of being able to save our coastal zone with the use of “bio-friendly” oil dispersants which I learned was available, safer, non-toxic and proven to be effective.

Today, 9 months after the accident, there is still no plan by the United States Government to clean up the toxin Corexit. Many are concerned that the oil laced with this toxic dispersant is still in the Gulf being moved constantly by currents throughout the ecosystem spreading contamination.

It is well known by many reputable scientists and environmental watchdog groups that non-toxic bio-remediation products, such as “OSE-II” was and is available. It has been used all over the world by many countries, contractors, private industry and the United States military and has been proven to be a safe solution in the past. Moreover, these types of products possess unique properties such as hydraulic lift (causes oil to float) so that the sunken oil can be raised from the sediments and detoxified.

I believe that the officials at the BP science labs have been disingenuous about their supposed desire to protect the aquiculture of the Gulf and the livelihood of the families who harvest the fisheries of the Gulf, in that they have intentionally excluded safe, non-toxic and proven bio-remediation technology to clean up the oil and toxins. BP’s refusal to use bio-remediation products to restore Gulf waters to pre-spill conditions is very disturbing to me since the EPA and USCG has approved bio-remediation for the Exxon Valdez spill in Alaska years ago. BP has also used non-toxic bio-remediation technology in the Caribbean and in Africa. RPT 6 of the EPA has used OSE-II in U.S. waters as well.

Was the toxin Corexit used because it dropped the oil from the surface so it would appear that the problem was solved? Was it ever discussed that the dropping of the oil would render the huge undertaking of placing booms useless? The earthen berms called for by Plaquemines Parish President Nungesser and Governor Jindal was our only defense after the use of Corexit was employed as we witnessed in disbelief oil coming to our shores under the booms.

Please have your administration provide answers to the following questions.

1. Have acutely toxic chemical compounds been formed by the mixing of Gulf crude with toxic dispersants (Corexit 9500 and 9527A) applied individually or in a mixed ratio? If such chemicals have been mixed, please provide the ratios and provide the names of the other chemicals with which Corexit was mixed.

2. Other acutely toxic compounds have been found in the air, water, and sediments in the Gulf. Have they evaporated off with the aid of dispersants? Have your scientist reported that these compounds have come ashore, contaminating our coastal communities?

3. Is the oil spilled truly cleaned up, or has it been transformed through the evaporation and loss of lighter-chain hydrocarbons, leaving the heavier, longer-chain hydrocarbons in the water and sediments to continue delivering toxins to those exposed to them through time, which includes all the aquatic life within the Gulf waters?

4. What levels of toxins can humans safely tolerate if these toxins are taken in either by ingestion or by direct exposure from the air or water?

5. Are the Gulf waters safe? If so, define “safe.” Please define the test methods used to determine water quality and safety to assist independent scientists to verify these results.

6. Is Gulf seafood safe? If so, define “safe.” Please define the test methods used to determine safety to assist independent scientists to verify these results. The independent smell test by the USDA has on occasion proven to be inaccurate. What test equipment is being employed? USDA Director Steve Wilson will not declare verbally.

7. Were our Gulf waters safe prior to the recent 4,200 square mile ban by NOAA? If so, when? Please describe the testing methods and proof that it was safe. Where are the test data and a description of test methods that proved it was safe? What tests or methods were used to prove it was unsafe?

8. Have our Gulf onshore breezes been safe, specifically from May/June and from 2010 to present? Environmental monitoring by the federal government has surely occurred since the accident and test results as well as a description of test methods and findings should be available by now. Much is still missing in this area of data on numerous agency web sites. Please provide them. Independent scientists have reported the presence of PAH’s, 2-butoxy-ethanol and other toxic compounds in the air and in onshore rainfall. Please provide any data available on this issue, including their effects on humans, and confirm if the public should be concerned about bio-accumulation in commercial seafood or not. If indeed there is any risk of bio-accumulation, then know that it is possible to detoxify the soil and ground water, if necessary. Both NOAA and the EPA data together with some of BP’s data are contradictory within their own summations. We just need transparency regarding these issues.

9. What is the impact of prolonged exposure to these chemicals on humans in terms of toxicity and illness? What are the symptoms associated with various exposures? I ask this because in the Exxon-Valdez accident, it has been reported that all who participated in the clean up activity died within 20+ years of the accident. Understanding the chemical characteristics of the toxins used and mixed with the oil is important.

10. With respect to water samples taken by EPA and NOAA, please provide the test data and a description of test methods regarding poly-propanol, 2-butoxy ethanol, ethylene glycol, total hydrocarbons and PAH’s in the water column, not just the surface waters. Reports of chemicals in the water melting the plastics or rubber products such as diving suits and gasket seals have been reported and documented. Also, fishermen have discovered the bottoms of their crab traps dissolved or were heavily coated with rubbery tar-type oil.

11. Does the toxic effects of the dispersant Corexit 9500/9527A mixed with light sweet crude confirm that the toxicity level is increased for living organisms?

Understanding that bacteria are living organisms, I have yet to discover any definitive proof that natural bio-remediation of the weathered oil is possible by using Corexit. The claims by EPA officials and Coast Guard personnel have been confirmed to be false since 1992 (EPA/NETAC Test 1992). This is critical because it is apparent that the toxin Corexit administered did nothing but drop and hide the oil allowing for vast amounts of oil and toxins to be released well below the surface in to the water columns and the food chain. Further, it has been suggested that the toxicity level may increase with time after a spill. There is definitive proof that natural bio-remediation was a viable alternative for use at the time of the disaster and that it can still be used after the natural crude has been dispersed. It is still possible to clean up the water, the coastal lands, the marsh grass areas, the sandy beaches, the water column and the oil on the Gulf floor. EPA has approved bio-remediation products on the NCP list such as OSE-II that can raise the sunken oil to the surface for a safe natural conversion to CO2 and water which will detoxify the water column and restore the Gulf waters to pre-spill conditions. It was recommended for use in the clean up effort by the USCG Testing lab on July 10, 2010 to the FOSC (Federal on Scene Coordinator), however no action was taken. For unknown reasons, the EPA has blocked its use and continues to deny requests for use by both BP and the Louisiana DEQ.

Today in Louisiana and the other affected Gulf states, the health and welfare of our citizens, public safety, economic pain and environmental unknowns exist and the time to address this critical issue is now.

We will not be fooled in to believing that the oil and the toxins are gone. Because the toxic dispersants have been, and are still being used today, the oil is being forced downward in to the water columns and then carried endlessly around and about by the Gulf currents adversely affecting our environment.

On behalf of the citizens of all of the states on the Gulf coast, I strongly urge you to employ all of the resources you have available to guarantee a safe and healthy future for those of us in the Gulf coast states by joining with us to make sure safe non-toxic bio-remediation technology is put in to use immediately.

It is my sincere hope that this request is answered in a timely fashion so that I can advise my constituents.

I appreciate your understanding and cooperation in this matter.


A.G. Crowe
State Senator
District 1
State of Louisiana

cc: Vice President Biden: Vice President of the United States of America
Dept of Environmental Protection Agency: (Secretary Lisa. P. Jackson, Dana Tullis, Sam Coleman, Craig Carroll, Gregory J Wilson
Dept. of Defense: (Robert Gates)
Members of the Joint Chiefs: Secretary of the Navy / Secretary of the Army
(US Coast Guard) Incident Commander Ret. Admiral Thad Allen,
Adm. James A Watson, Adm. Mary E Landry, Adm. Paul Zunkunft)
Dept of Justice: (Attorney General-Eric H. Holder, Jr.)
Dept of Interior: (Kenneth Salazar)
Dept. of Agriculture: (Thomas J. Villach)
Dept. of Commerce: (Gary F. Locke)
Dept of Health and Human Services: (Kathleen Sebelius)
Dept of Energy: (Steven Chu)
Dept of Homeland Security: (Janet Napolitano, Thad Allen)
Louisiana Governor Bobby Jindal
New Orleans Mayor Mitch Landrieu
Alabama Governor Robert Bentley
Florida Governor Rick Scott
Mississippi Governor Haley Barbour
Texas Governor Rick Perry
Louisiana Attorney General Buddy Caldwell
Alabama Attorney General Troy King
Florida Attorney General Pam Bondi
Mississippi Attorney General Jim Hood
Texas Attorney General Greg Abbott
Louisiana Secretary of Wildlife & Fisheries Robert Barham
Louisiana Secretary of Dept. of Environmental Quality Peggy Hatch
Garret Graves, Louisiana Governor’s Office of Coastal Protection
Louisiana Secretary of Department of Health & Hospitals Bruce Greenstien
Senator Mary L. Landrieu
Senator David Vitter
Congressman Steve Scalise
Congressman Cedric L. Richmond
Congressman Jeff Landry
Congressman John Fleming
Congressman Rodney Alexander
Congressman Bill Cassidy
Congressman Charles Boustany
Louisiana Senate President Joel T. Chaisson, III
Louisiana Speaker of the House Tucker
Alabama Speaker of the House Mike Hubbard
Florida Speaker of the House Dean Cannon
Mississippi Speaker of the House William J. McCoy
Texas Speaker of the House Joe Straus
Alabama Senate President, Lt. Governor, Jim Folsom, Jr.
Florida Senate President Mike Haridopolos
Mississippi Senate President, Lt. Governor, Phil Bryant
Texas Senate President, Lt. Governor, David Dewhurst
Mr. Sean Hannity
USA Today
Wall Street Journal
Plaquemines Parish President Billy Nungesser
St. Bernard Parish President Craig P. Taffaro, Jr.
Acadia Parish President A. J. Credeur
Ascension Parish President Tommy Martinez
Assumption Parish President Martin S. Triche
Calcasieu Parish President Guy Brame
Cameron Parish President Charles Precht, III
Iberia Parish President Ernest Freyou
Iberville Parish President J. Mitchell Ourso, Jr.
Jefferson Parish President John F. Young, Jr.
Jefferson Davis Parish President Donald Woods
Lafayette Parish President Joey Durel
Lafourche Parish President Charlotte Randolph
St. Charles Parish President V. J. St. Pierre, Jr.
St. James Parish President Dale Hymel, Jr.
St. John the Baptist Parish President Natalie Robottom
St. Martin Parish President Guy Cormier
St. Mary Parish President Paul P. Naquin, Jr.
St. Tammany Parish President Kevin Davis
Terrebonne Parish President Michel Claudet
Vermilion Parish President Wayne Touchet

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE



By Zaid Jilani on Jan 8th, 2011

On New Year’s Day, a devastating terrorist bombing at a Coptic church in Egypt killed 21 people and injured 79 others. Although the identity of the culprits was not known, it was assumed that they were Muslim extremists, intent on targeting those they saw as heretics. Religious tensions immediately rose in the country, and angry Copts stormed streets, battled with police, and even vandalized a nearby mosque. The riots and heightened tensions between the Muslim and Coptic communities was likely what the terrorists wanted — to divide the Egyptian community and create sectarian strife between different religious groups.

Yet by Coptic Christmas Eve, which took place Thursday night in Egypt, things had changed completely. As Egyptian Copts attended mass at churches across the country, “thousands” of Muslims, including “the two sons of President Hosni Mubarak,” joined them, acting as “human shields” to protect from terrorist attacks by extremists. The Muslims organized under the slogan “We either live together, or we die together,” inspired by Mohamed El-Sawy, an Egyptian artist:

Egypt’s majority Muslim population stuck to its word Thursday night. What had been a promise of solidarity to the weary Coptic community, was honoured, when thousands of Muslims showed up at Coptic Christmas eve mass services in churches around the country and at candle light vigils held outside. From the well-known to the unknown, Muslims had offered their bodies as “human shields” for last night’s mass, making a pledge to collectively fight the threat of Islamic militants and towards an Egypt free from sectarian strife.

“We either live together, or we die together,” was the sloganeering genius of Mohamed El-Sawy, a Muslim arts tycoon whose cultural centre distributed flyers at churches in Cairo Thursday night, and who has been credited with first floating the “human shield” idea. Among those shields were movie stars Adel Imam and Yousra, popular preacher Amr Khaled, the two sons of President Hosni Mubarak, and thousands of citizens who have said they consider the attack one on Egypt as a whole. “This is not about us and them,” said Dalia Mustafa, a student who attended mass at Virgin Mary Church on Maraashly. “We are one. This was an attack on Egypt as a whole, and I am standing with the Copts because the only way things will change in this country is if we come together.”

Al Jazeera English covered the attacks and reported from the site of one of the solidarity events where Muslims and Christians stood side by side, protesting discrimination against Copts and calling for an end to violence. Watch it:

Midnight mass in tense Egypt

It is a frequent complaint among opinion makers in the United States that the global Muslim community does not condemn and prevent terrorism. New York Times columnist Thomas Friedman has even said that Islam needs a civil war similar to the one the United States fought in order to deal with its extremists. But the truth is that moderate and progressive Muslims all over the world are battling extremism. Here in the United States, one-third of al-Qaeda related terror plots have been broken up thanks to intelligence provided by Muslim Americans. It is up to the press to report these positive stories and not exaggerate the sway that extremists hold over the global Muslim community.


"There are only two religions: Love and tolerance or war and self righteousness." - Jim Stahr

"This gave me shivers. To my brothers and sisters out there in the world, regardless of creed or political stance, this is the kind of thinking and acting we should all emulate." - Jamie Martin

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE

TIM TURNER INTERVIEW from January 5, 2011 - posted 1/13/11

NOTE: Tim Turner is the Presisdent of the Republic for the united States of America. This, and all positions within the restored Republic, are basically voluteer and interim positions being filled by those that have become secuared party creditors and withdrawn from the corporate government, as I, personally, have done.

Sovereign Solution Seeking Americans, listen and take heart. Interim President Tim Turner discusses the Republic for two hours on Morning Liberty Radio show. Very informative, very encouraging.

Titanic America – Economic Collapse – Tim Turner interview
Robert Hender " R J "
Wed Jan 5, 2010
Subject: Republic Working to Set America Free

Some Americans are in fear. Every day more people are losing their jobs and their homes. Banks seem to be okay with this arrangement. When a bank forecloses upon a house, it is an act of theft. JP Morgan Chase officials know they are out of money. Bank of America is out of money. The Federal Reserve system is out of money.

In this 2 hour Radio Interview with Tim Turner and Kelby Smith help to spell out more options for the future of America, than the " Main Press, " have been delivering for some time.

People need to be re-educated on the " True History, " of America. We need to realize who we are and how much America needs us now. If America has any chance of turning this crisis around, we must be a people of Faith.

NWO thugs want to destroy America. Men and Women of the Republic for the united States are working and praying hard to save our country and it's future. The FBI and the Joint Terrorism Task Force have attended our meetings. A body of Freedom Lovers need to be organized in every County in America, 30 to 50 to 100 to 5,000 people who are ready to be educated and armed with the tools to Act Lawfully upon our Land. Are you one of these?



Take a look at " the Republic. " America needs you now!


Who are “We”- We are Americans.  All of us may not agree with all of these qualities/virtues, but we are Americans that want true freedom.  We are Americans like all the many others out there that know something is wrong.  We are Americans that have taken action, using a pen, through peaceable means. 

Conservative/Or Maybe Not  -  Honorable  -  Pro-Liberty  -  Freedom to Worship God  -  Pro-Smaller Government   -   Non-Confrontational  -  Pro-Freedom  -  Hard Working  -  Pro-Securing Our Borders  -  Non-Violent  -   Pro-Justice  -  Tax Paying  -  Peace Loving  -  Children Loving  -  Patriotic  -  Truth Seeking

We believe that the Declaration of Independence and the Constitution for the united States of America as conceived by the founding fathers would if administered as conceived, return Americans back to a freedom and prosperity that cannot fully be comprehended.  We believe at this time in history it is the people who may best save our nation.  We believe that the current policies and practices by actors that purport to have America’s best interest in mind are morally bankrupt.   It is the people then that must create an alternate proposal.

What have “We” done- What a group of Americans have done then is simple!  We have restored “The Republic of the united States of America”.  The vehicle used to accomplish this task were Americans who stood up.  The fuel was left for us over 220 years ago in the Declaration of Independence, the Constitution for the united States of America, the Bill of Rights, Amendments, 11, 12, and the original 13th.  A plan supported by many Americans in all 50 republic “states” was implemented.  That plan created a provisional structure where Americans can peaceably assemble and re-inhabit the de Jure seats of government as intended by our founding fathers. 

What can “We” offer – We, being the people who stood up, through the construct of the “Restored Republic” offer to all Americans true liberty, freedom, and justice for all.  All that is required is your say so.

What will it do? – When all Americans that are not happy with the path our nation is clearly headed down, join those that have already signed onto “The Republic of the united States of America”, our future can and will be transformed back to a de Jure form of governance as originally intended.  The specific benefits shall be described in forthcoming press releases.

NOTE: I haven't listened to this one yet, but this is the download link to the interview from 1/12/2011

Open Republic Call
Republic Call is Open to Public
Wednesday - Last Call 01/12/2010
6:00 P.S.T. / 9:00 E.S.T.
Conf #:  (323) 843-0075
Code:  819054

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


By Jonathan Stempel and Dena Aubin

NEW YORK | Fri Jan 7, 2011 4:58pm EST

NEW YORK (Reuters) - In a decision that may slow foreclosures nationwide, Massachusetts' highest court voided the seizure of two homes by Wells Fargo & Co and US Bancorp after the banks failed to show they held the mortgages at the time they foreclosed.

Bank shares fell, weighing on broader stock indexes, on fears the decision could threaten lenders' ability to work through hundreds of thousands of pending foreclosures.

The Supreme Judicial Court of Massachusetts' unanimous decision on Friday upheld a lower court ruling. It is among the earliest cases to address the validity of foreclosures done without proper documentation.

That issue, including the use of "robo-signers" who approved foreclosure documents without reviewing them, last year prompted an uproar that led lenders such as Bank of America Corp, JPMorgan Chase & Co and Ally Financial Inc to temporarily stop seizing homes.

"A ruling like this will slow down the foreclosure process" for lenders, said Marty Mosby, an analyst at Guggenheim Securities in Memphis, Tennessee. "They're going to have to be really precise and get everything in order. It doesn't leave a lot of wiggle room."

Wells Fargo and U.S. Bancorp lacked authority to foreclose after having "failed to make the required showing that they were the holders of the mortgages at the time of foreclosure," Justice Ralph Gants wrote for the Massachusetts court.

In a concurring opinion, Justice Robert Cordy lambasted "the utter carelessness" that the banks demonstrated in documenting their right to own the properties.

Courts in other U.S. states are considering similar cases, and all 50 state attorneys general are examining whether lenders are forcing people out of their homes improperly.

Friday's decision applies in Massachusetts, and need not be followed by federal judges or by courts in other states.

Nonetheless, "it will be certainly cited as persuasive authority by anybody in a similar scenario who's trying to hold onto his home," said Robert Nislick, a real estate lawyer at Marcus, Errico, Emmer & Brooks PC in Braintree, Massachusetts.


Analysts said the decision may also raise the specter that loans transferred improperly will need to be bought back.

"What they were doing was peddling these mortgages and leaving the paperwork behind," said Michael Pill, a real estate partner at Green, Miles, Lipton & Fitz-Gibbon LLP in Northampton, Massachusetts who is not involved in the case.

The Massachusetts court rejected a request by the banks to apply the decision only in future cases, leaving homeowners already foreclosed upon without a remedy. Gants chided the banks for ignoring settled rules in their "rush" to sell mortgage-backed securities.

A spokeswoman for San Francisco-based Wells Fargo, Teri Schrettenbrunner, had no immediate comment on the decision.

U.S. Bancorp spokesman Steve Dale said the decision has no financial impact on the Minneapolis-based bank, which has "no responsibility" for the terms or means of transfer of mortgages used in the securitization trusts it oversees as trustee.

Martha Coakley, Massachusetts' attorney general, praised Friday's decision. "In their careless and hasty stampede to securitize loans, the banks moved at their own peril," she said. "They should bear the brunt and the cost of the remedy."

In Friday trading, Wells Fargo shares closed down 65 cents, or 2 percent lower, at $31.50, while U.S. Bancorp shares fell 20 cents, or 0.8 percent, at $26.09.

Bank of America stock fell 1.3 percent and JPMorgan fell 1.9 percent, and the KBW Bank Index fell 0.9 percent. Broader share indexes declined about 0.2 percent.

Bank shares recovered some losses after it was revealed that Maine's highest court on Thursday allowed JPMorgan to conduct a foreclosure proceeding despite not having possessed the underlying mortgage until after that process began.


In the Massachusetts case, U.S. Bancorp and Wells Fargo had said they controlled through different trusts the respective mortgages of Antonio Ibanez and the married couple Mark and Tammy LaRace, who lost their homes to foreclosure in 2007.

The banks bought the Springfield, Massachusetts, homes in foreclosure, and sought court orders confirming they had title. A lower court judge ruled against them in March 2009.

"It is the first time the supreme court of a state has looked straight at securitization practices and told the industry, you are not immune from state statutes and homeowner protections," Paul Collier, a lawyer for Ibanez, said in an interview.

Massachusetts is one of 27 U.S. states that do not require court approval to foreclose.

"I'm ecstatic," Glenn Russell, a lawyer for the LaRaces, said in an interview. "The fact the decision applies retroactively could mean thousands of homeowners can seek recovery for homes wrongfully foreclosed upon."

Russell said the LaRaces moved back to their home after the 2009 ruling, while Collier said Ibanez has not. "U.S. Bancorp will have to compensate him in exchange for the deed, or will have to walk away," Collier said.

Analysts said the decision could make it harder to sell homes, and perhaps weigh on the nation's economic recovery.

"The inventory on foreclosures will keep a lid on housing prices for some time," said Blake Howells, head of equity research at Becker Capital Management in Portland, Oregon.

Gants did suggest in his opinion how banks might properly transfer mortgages via securitization trusts.

"The executed agreement that assigns the pool of mortgages, with a schedule of the pooled mortgage loans that clearly and specifically identifies the mortgage at issue as among those assigned, may suffice to establish the trustee as the mortgage holder," Gants wrote. "However, there must be proof that the assignment was made by a party that itself held the mortgage."

The American Securitization Forum, a trade group, in a statement said it "is confident securitization transfers are valid and fully enforceable."

The cases are U.S. Bank N.A. v. Ibanez and Wells Fargo Bank NA v. LaRace et al, Supreme Judicial Court of Massachusetts, No. SJC-10694.

(Reporting by Jonathan Stempel and Dena Aubin; Additional reporting by Joe Rauch and Dan Wilchins; Editing by Matthew Lewis, Dave Zimmerman and Tim Dobbyn)

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


By Matt Brockman,

As a result of the recent investigation launched by the Florida Attorney General’s office, Bank Of America, GMAC Bank, JP Morgan Chase, and others, have all been found guilty of foreclosure fraud.

Depositions by the banks employees revealed that the banks have been forging, falsifying, and fabricating documents in order to foreclose on millions of homes owned by unsuspecting American homeowners.

Additionally, Wells Fargo Bank has admitted to 55,000 counts of perjury in submitting false affidavits to the courts in its efforts to fraudulently foreclose on homeowners.

To add to this disgusting, and arrogant display of lawlessness by the banks, nothing has been done by the Justice Department, or any other federal officials in the way of civil or criminal charges against the banks, until now.

Recently, The Arizona and Nevada Attorney Generals have filed a civil lawsuit against Bank Of America for fraud against homeowners seeking loan modification, and hopefully there will be more lawsuits on the way, as the Obama Administration has also launched a Financial Fraud Enforcement Task Force to investigate and prosecute financial crimes in the lending and financial markets. As bank fraud has already proved to be pervasive, lets hope that this task force has the political will and integrity to prosecute the banks, and the corrupt attorneys who represent them.

These are essentially mortgages that the banks knew they did not own, but were willing to break the law in order to put homeowners out on the streets to satisfy their insatiable greed for even more money.

In spite of clear and convincing documented evidence, in the forms of deposition testimony by bank employees, the banks have been carrying on as if nothing ever happened, and federal officials have seemingly given them the green light to continue to break the law with impunity.

Until such time as the Department Of Justice, the SEC, and the Attorney Generals of each state decide to take action against these criminal banks, homeowners have no choice but to implement their own available legal strategies to fight to save their homes. Because most of these foreclosure cases involve the banks inability to produce the promissory note in order to prove they have any legal rights to foreclosure; homeowners have several legal strategies available to them in order to stop the banks from fraudulently foreclosing on their homes.

One of the more popular strategies employed of late is the “Produce The Note” Strategy. As a large percentage of mortgage loans were securitized, and sold to investors all over the world, it has been difficult, if not impossible, for the banks to produce the required documents that would establish their right to foreclosure, as those documents have been lost in the Wall Street ether. This is why the banks have attempted to forge and falsify the documents, but have been recently caught, and found guilty of fraud.

Secondly, the homeowner can also file a civil suit against the banks for fraud, and make them prove they are the rightful owner of the note who is authorized to foreclose on the homeowner’s property.

Last, but definitely not least, is the latest, and possibly most powerful strategy available, which does not require a homeowner to go to court at all. It is strictly an administrative process pursuant to The Administrative Procedures Act Of 1946, by which the homeowner is legally able to reconvey the property title back into his/her name, thereby revoking any authority by the bank to foreclose on the property, and taking the property back free & clear usually within 90 days.

This effectively puts the homeowner back in control, and forces the bank to deal with the homeowner, who now is negotiating from a position of strength, instead of begging the bank for help. The bank now has to go to the homeowner to resolve any title issues.

Until such time as our government officials decide that they will uphold, and enforce the rule of law, and the U.S Constitution, and not allow themselves to be bought by the banks lobbyist, the American homeowner must be willing to fight for their constitutional rights, and homes by any legal means necessary against the Federal Reserve, the banks, and the wealthy Wall Street barons, who created this mess with the full intention of fleecing the American citizens from all of their remaining wealth in the form of equity in their homes.

Matt Brockman... About the Author: The Homeowners Revolt.Com has 14 years experience in Civil Litigation. 25 years experience in Mortgage and Real Estate Investment Acquisitions. Mortgage/Foreclosure Specialist M.B.A. Business Administration. Toll Free: (877) 356-2528 begin_of_the_skype_highlighting (877) 356-2528 end_of_the_skype_highlighting. We have the forms you will need along with a tutorial that will walk you through step-by-step and show you how to fight your foreclosure and WIN!

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Note from Paul: I consider this one of the most important articles I’ve ever written. If after reading it you feel so inspired, please forward this to all of your friends and lists. The next part of the article will be sent out in about a week or so.

By Paul Levy,

In the book Columbus and other Cannibals, indigenous author Jack D. Forbes lucidly explores a psychological disease that has been informing human self-destructive behavior that Native American people have known about for years. After reading his book, it was clear to me that he was describing the same psycho-spiritual disease of the soul that I wrote about in my book, The Madness of George W. Bush: A Reflection of our Collective Psychosis. I introduce the idea that from the dawn of human history our species has fallen prey to a collective psychosis which I call malignant egophrenia. Speaking about this very same psychic epidemic, Forbes writes, “For several thousands of years human beings have suffered from a plague, a disease worse than leprosy, a sickness worse than malaria, a malady much more terrible than smallpox.”[i] Indigenous people have been tracking the same ‘psychic’[ii] virus that I call malignant egophrenia for many centuries and calling it ‘wetiko,’ a Cree term which refers to a diabolically wicked person or spirit who terrorizes others. Professor Forbes, who was one of the founders of the Native American movement during the early sixties, says, “Tragically, the history of the world for the past 2,000 years is, in great part, the story of the epidemiology of the wetiko disease.”[iii] Wetiko/malignant egophrenia is a ‘psychosis’ in the true sense of the word as being a ‘sickness of the soul or spirit.’ Though calling it by different names, Forbes and I are both pointing at the same illness of the psyche, soul and spirit that has been at the root of humanity’s inhumanity to itself.

As if performing a magic ritual, in exploring the entity of wetiko, we first have to invoke its spirit and enter into relationship with it. We must contemplate and engage wetiko as objectively as we are able, as if it exists outside of ourselves, lest we get too ‘mixed up’ with the object of our contemplation. Due to its unique psychic origin, the epidemiology of wetiko is different than any other disease. An intrinsic challenge to our investigation of the wetiko virus is that it is incarnating in the very psyche which itself is the means of our investigation. Aware of this conundrum, Forbes explains that he is attempting to examine the disease, “from a perspective as free as possible from assumptions created by the very disease being studied.”[iv] If we are not aware of the frame of reference through which we are examining the wetiko virus, our investigation will be tainted by the disease, obscuring the clear vision needed to start the healing process. Studying how wetiko disease manifests in others, as well as in the ‘other’ part of ourselves, will help us to see ‘it’ more objectively. Seeing this psychological disease manifesting in the world is the looking glass through which we can potentially recognize this same illness as it arises subjectively within our own minds.

After evoking an entity like wetiko, in order to study it as objectively as possible, we have to hermetically seal it within an alchemical container. This ensures that its mercurial spirit doesn’t vaporize back into the invisibility of the unconscious, where it would act itself out through us. Jung continually emphasized the importance of developing a container or vessel in which to catch troublesome spirits like wetiko. He writes, “Therefore, if anything is wrong, take it out of its place and put it in the vessel that is between your neighbor and yourself…For love of mankind, create a vessel into which you can catch all that damned poison. For it must be somewhere – it is always somewhere – and not to catch it, to say it doesn’t exist, gives the best chance to any germ.”[v] Wetiko is an elusive spirit that is challenging to pin down and say it is ‘this’ or ‘that.’ At the same time, it is critical that we attempt to delineate its properties. Unlike a physical virus, the wetiko bug can not be isolated materially, but its characteristic signature can be detected and seen in the peculiar operations of a psyche that is under its spell. To not recognize the existence of the wetiko germ – ‘to say it doesn’t exist’ – allows the psychic infection to act itself out unrestrained. Being ‘always somewhere’ is to be nonlocal, which means that it is always around, even potentially, or especially, within ourselves. In calling forth the wetiko spirit, we are simultaneously creating, through our inquiry itself, the container in which we can study this bug so as to understand what in fact we are dealing with, see how it operates out in the world, in others, and subjectively, within ourselves. In order to come full circle in our contemplative exercise/exorcise, we have to homeopathically take our contemplation back within ourselves. As if in a dream where the inner is the outer, we can recognize that the wetiko virus that we have been tracking ‘out there,’ outside of ourselves, is a reflection of and co-related to the same process within ourselves. Encoded in wetiko’s symptomology is a revelation, something that is most important for us to know.


 Wetiko/malignant egophrenia is a disease of civilization, or lack thereof. To quote Forbes, “To a considerable degree, the development of the wetiko disease corresponds to the rise of what Europeans choose to call civilization. This is no mere coincidence.”[vi] The unsustainable nature of industrial civilization is based on, and increasingly requires violence to maintain itself. Genuine ‘civilization,’ in essence, means not killing people. Referring to the lack of ‘civility’ in modern society, Gandhi was asked what he thought of Western civilization and responded by saying, “I think it would be a good idea.” It makes sense that native people would know about malignant egophrenia, as they were both oppressed by, but weren’t, at least initially, under the ‘curse’ of modern civilization. Being under the sway of modern civilization can feel like something foreign to our nature is being imposed upon us, as if we are living in an occupied land. Modern civilization suffers from the overly one-sided dominance of the rational, intellectual mind, a one-sidedness that seemingly dis-connects us from nature, from empathy, and from ourselves. Due to its disassociation from the whole, wetiko is a disturber of the peace of humanity and the natural world, a sickness which spawns aggression and is capable of inciting violence amongst living beings. The wetiko virus is the root cause of the inhumanity in human nature, or shall we say, our seemingly inhuman nature. This ‘psychic virus,’ a ‘bug’ in ‘the system, in-forms and animates the madness of so-called civilization, which, in a self-perpetuating feedback loop feeds the madness within ourselves.

Forbes continues, “this disease, this wetiko (cannibal) psychosis, is the greatest epidemic sickness known to man.”[vii] We, as a species, are in the midst of a massive psychic epidemic, a virulent collective psychosis that has been brewing in the cauldron of humanity’s psyche from the beginning of time. Like a fractal, wetiko operates on multiple dimensions simultaneously – intra-personally (within individuals), inter-personally (between ourselves), as well as collectively (as a species). “Cannibalism,” in Forbes words, “is the consuming of another’s life for one’s own private purpose or profit.”[viii] Those afflicted with wetiko, like a cannibal, consume the life-force of others – human and nonhuman – for private purpose or profit, and do so without giving back something from their own lives. One example that symbolizes our self-destructive, collective madness is the oil companies destruction of the Amazonian rainforest, the lungs of our planet. This is literally a full-bodied revelation showing us what we are doing to ourselves. Another literal example that is symbolically illustrating the wetiko complex in action is Monsanto genetically engineering terminator seeds that do not reproduce a second generation, thus forcing farmers to buy new seeds from Monsanto for each year’s new crop. This makes survival for many poor farmers impossible, which has triggered a wave of suicides among farmers, as Monsanto grows richer from the process.

Forbes writes, “The overriding characteristic of the wetiko is that he consumes other human beings, that is, he is a predator and a cannibal. This is the central essence of the disease.”[ix] Predators, ‘full-blown’ wetikos are not in touch with their own humanity, and therefore can’t see the humanity in others. Instead, they relate to others either as potential prey or as a threat to their dominance. As if a different breed who is more animal-like predator than ordinary human being, someone fully taken over by the wetiko psychosis consumes others lives, physically, emotionally, psychically and meta-physically, beyond just the material body and physical possessions to the level of meaning itself. Wetikos are the ‘anti-artists’ of our culture, embodying the opposite of what creative artists do. Unlike an artist (please see my article “The Artist as Healer of the World”), who creates life-enhancing meaning and enriches the world without robbing others, a wetiko takes and consumes without giving anything back, continually draining and impoverishing the planet of resources.

We are currently in the midst of ‘the greatest epidemic sickness known to man’ (please see my article “Diagnosis: Psychic Epidemic”). Many of us don’t even realize this, as our collective insanity is so pervasive that it has become normalized. Our collective madness has become transparent to us, as we see and interpret the world through it, rendering our madness invisible, thereby unwittingly colluding with the collective psychosis that is wreaking incredible death and destruction on our planet. Being ‘trans-parent,’ our madness is beyond its mere appearance, which is to say, ‘beyond being apparent,’ i.e., not visible. Our collective psychosis is invisible to us, as it expresses itself both in the very way we are looking, as well as all of the unspoken ways we have been conditioned not to perceive. Due to its cloak of invisibility, we don’t see our madness, a psychic blindness which makes us complicit in the creation of our madness.

Many of us can’t fathom the level of evil to which full-blown wetikos have fallen prey, and of which they are capable. Our lack of imagination of the evil existing in potential in humanity is a direct reflection of a lack of intimacy with our own potential evil, which enables the malevolence of wetiko to have nearly free rein in our world (please see my article “Shedding Light on Evil”). In our psychic blindness we are complicit in the spreading of the evil of the wetiko psychosis, a systematic evil whose depth is beyond the capacity of words to fully describe. Evil paralyzes the ability to language our experience, creating a seemingly unbridgeable gap between language and the event it is supposed to describe. Finding that place of no words, we simultaneously discover and create a new language, a language which is universal and transcends language itself, a language known as art.


When people are infected by the wetiko virus, Forbes writes, they are “the host for the wetiko parasites.”[x] The wetiko germ is a psychic tapeworm, a parasite of the mind. Just like certain computer viruses or malware infect and program a computer to self-destruct, mind-viruses like wetiko can program the human bio-computer to think, believe and behave in ways that result in our self-destruction. Wetiko is a virulent, psychic pathogen that insinuates thought-forms into our mind which, when unconsciously en-acted, feed it, and ultimately kills its host (us). It doesn’t want to kill us too quickly however, for to successfully implement its agenda of reproducing and propagating itself throughout the field, it must let the host live long enough to spread the virus. If the host dies too soon, the bug would be prematurely evicted and would suffer the inconvenience of having to find a new residence.

Like a cancer of the mind that metastasizes, in wetiko disease, a pathological part of the psyche co-opts and subsumes all of the healthy parts of the psyche into itself so as to serve its pathology. The personality then self-organizes an outer display of coherence around this pathogenic core, which ‘masks’ the inner dysfunction, making it hard to recognize. In a psychic coup d’etat, the wetiko bug can usurp and displace the person, who becomes its puppet and marionette. Like a parasite, the wetiko virus can take over the will of an animal more evolved than itself, enlisting that creature into serving its nefarious agenda. Once the parasite becomes sufficiently entrenched within the psyche, the prime directive coordinating a person’s behavior comes from the disease, as it is now the one calling the shots. Just as someone infected with the rabies virus will resist drinking water, which would flush out the infection, someone taken over by the wetiko parasite will have nothing to do with anything that will help them get rid of the disease. Wetikos are phobic towards the light of truth, which they avoid like the plague. In advanced stages, this process takes over the person so completely that we could rightfully say the person is no longer there; they are just an empty shell carrying the disease. In a sense there is just the disease, operating through what appears to be a human being. The person becomes fully identified with their mask, their persona, but it is as if there is no one behind the mask.


Speaking in his own language about the predation of the wetiko virus, the spiritual teacher Don Juan, of the Carlos Castaneda books, mentions that the ancient shamans called this “the topic of topics.”[xi] Don Juan explains, “We have a companion for life…We have a predator that came from the depths of the cosmos and took over the rule of our lives. Human beings are its prisoners. The predator is our lord and master.”[xii] This sounds just like the state of affairs being pointed at in the Bible when, for example, The Gospel of John refers to the devil as “the ruler of this world” (14:30; 16:11), and Paul speaks of Satan as “the god of this world” (Cor. 4:4). The Gnostic Gospel of Phillip, talking about the root of evil that lies within all of us, makes the similar point that unless this evil is recognized, “It masters us. We are its slaves. It takes us captive.” (II, 3, 83.5-30) Speaking about the predator, Don Juan continues, “It has rendered us docile, helpless. If we want to protest, it suppresses our protest. If we want to act independently, it demands that we don’t do so.”[xiii] It is striking how Don Juan’s description of the effects of these predators is being enacted in our increasingly militarized society, as our freedoms and liberties get taken away step by step. It is as if an inner, invisible state of affairs existing as a yet unrealized archetypal pattern deep within the soul of humanity is revealing itself by materializing in, as, and through the outside world.

To quote Don Juan, “Indeed we are held prisoner! This was an energetic fact for the sorcerers of ancient Mexico.”[xiv] Don Juan is referring to an ‘energetic fact’ that I imagine most of us can relate to; i.e., there is ‘something’ within us that stops us from expressing our true creative genius and attaining our full potential. These predators are ‘time-bandits,’ consuming the precious hours of our lives, as if we are wage-slaves on a prison-planet ‘doing time.’ Deepening his description of these predators, Don Juan elaborates, “They took over because we are food for them…we are their sustenance. Just as we rear chickens in chicken coops, gallineros, the predators rear us in human coops, humaneros.”[xv] The wetiko virus particularly flourishes in overpopulated cities, where people are ‘coop-ed up.’ When we buy into group-think and are enlisted as a member of the herd, we become like sheep that are being led over the edge of a cliff, or cattle that are being raised to be slaughtered.

Don Juan continues, “The predators give us their mind, which becomes our mind.”[xvi] It is as if these predators are in competition with us for a ‘share’ of our own mind. The predator shape-shifts and assumes our form, and if we are unaware of its masquerade, we will identify with its invasive thought-forms as if they are our own, and act them out. We will mistakenly believe that we are acting on our own impulses, with our best interests in mind. This predator, Don Juan continues, “fears that any moment its maneuver is going to be uncovered and food is going to be denied.”[xvii] The wetiko predator has an inner necessity, a brute compulsion born out of terror, as it continually has to feed itself so as to postpone its ever-approaching death. Don Juan continues, “Through the mind, which, after all, is their mind, the predators inject into the lives of human beings whatever is convenient for them [the predators].”[xviii] Cloaking itself in our form, this predator gets under our skin and ‘puts us on’ as a disguise, fooling us to ‘buy’ into its false version of who we are. (This is why the shortened name of Malignant Egophrenia is ‘ME disease,’ referring to a distortion of our identity, i.e., our sense of ‘me’-ness). Instead of being in our power and serving ourselves, we ‘unwittingly’ (which means to be ‘out of our wits,’ i.e., not in our ‘right’ mind) become the servant of the predator. Instead of being a sovereign being who is creating with our own thoughts, we will then be created by them, as the predator literally thinks in our place. It is as if the predator is sitting in our seat.

Speaking of the predator’s scheme, Don Juan says, “it proposes something, it agrees with its own proposition, and it makes you believe that you’ve done something of worth.”[xix] It is as if there is an alien ‘other,’ an extraterrestrial, metaphysical entity which is subliminally intruding its mind into ours in such a way that we identify with its point of view and dis-connect from our own. Don Juan refers to this situation as a ‘foreign installation,’ as if some alien race has set up a space station inside of our minds. This is exactly what the Gnostics – the ones who ‘know’ – are pointing at when they talk about alien predators called ‘Archons’ who infiltrate and subvert the workings of our mind.[xx] To the extent that we are not conscious of this alien take over of our psyche, we become drafted into the predator’s sinister agenda, unwittingly becoming its slaves. This state of inner, psychological warfare is mirrored by the sinister psy-ops (psychological operations) being instituted by the powers-that-be in the outside world. The disease feeds on our unawareness of it.


Forbes writes, “The wetiko psychosis is a sickness of the spirit that takes people down an ugly path with no heart…After all, the wetiko disease turns such people into werewolves and vampires, creatures of the Europeans nightmare world, and creatures of the wetiko’s reality.”[xxi] The wetiko psychosis takes people down, period. Werewolves and vampires are shape-shifting creatures, symbolic representations of the horrific potential within all of us to be taken over by and act out the archetypal shadow, regressing to an archaic level of the psyche and become like a predatory animal or nonhuman creature. When these not-yet-humanized psychic energies break through into consciousness and are not mediated through consciousness, Jung writes, “they sweep everything before them like a torrent and turn men into creatures for whom the word ‘beast’ is still too good a name.”[xxii]

Vampires, considered to be the darkest creature of evil’s arsenal, have haunted our imagination for ages, as they are representatives of a living process that exists deep within the human psyche. A vampire is not a human figure, but rather, is a soulless creature, a being who has lost its soul; or if it hasn’t lost its soul, its soul has been ‘damned,’ which is a soul that is lost. Either way, there’s something missing. Isolated from the world, it has lost any connection with the part of itself that is related to everything else; from its point of view, the world exists simply for its use. Although it has lost connection with its heart and soul, a vampire hasn’t lost its mind (though in one sense it has), as vampires often have clever and incisive intellects that cloak their pathology, making their disease hard to see. This is similar to how people in a deep state of trauma can have brilliant minds as well, a gift that can hide the extent of their trauma, making their malady hard to recognize. The sharpness of the vampire’s mind, instead of being devoted to gaining insight into their malady and healing from it, however, is used for the ‘passing on’ and propagation of their dark art.

One of the undead, a vampire is death taking living, human form. The wetiko virus is ultimately not a living life-form, but rather, a living form of death. Wetiko, like a virus, is ‘dead’ matter; it is only in a living creature that viruses acquires a ‘quasi-life.’ Members of the living dead, vampires are neither truly alive, nor truly dead. Like a full-fledged vampire, ‘full-blown’ wetikos have forfeited their humanity, becoming a conduit for the impersonal, transpersonal and depersonalizing wetiko virus to incarnate through them. They are a living portal, an opening in the third-dimensional fabric of space/time through which this contagious, virulent higher-dimensional virus can spread itself throughout the field, both locally and nonlocally.

Lacking a sense of soul, wetikos are efficient ‘machines,’ dedicated to preserving and serving “the state,” which, to quote Forbes, “is itself a creature of the wetikos who have seized control of its power apparatus.”[xxiii] A full-fledged wetiko has become a robotic automaton, conditioned to react to certain stimuli like a reflex. They have become part of ‘the machine,’ with no spontaneity, creativity, originality, nor free thinking programmed in. De-humanized, wetikos have lost touch with any sense of aesthetics, of appreciating the inherent beauty of life, and have become ‘an-aesthetic,’ i.e., anesthetized and numb to what it is to be a human being. Emissaries of an authoritarian, militarized, patriarchal planetary ‘culture,’ the wetiko bug breeds fascism, and terror. To quote the great healer Wilhelm Reich, “Fascism is the vampire leeched to the body of the living, the impulse to murder given free rein.”[xxiv] Fascism is the outer, collective political expression of an individual’s ravaged inner landscape that has been crippled and suppressed by the authoritarian civilization of ‘the machine.’

Like a vampire, in full-blown wetikos there is nobody home, which is one of the reasons why, symbolically speaking, vampires have no reflection in a mirror (which, mythologically speaking, reflect back images of the human soul). Full-blown wetikos are empty to the core, so there is nothing to reflect. Inwardly there is just an infinite void, a sponge that can never be saturated, a devouring black hole that is feeding on the universe. Their atrophied soul has been emptied out like a piece of wood hollowed out by psychic termites. Full-blown wetikos are so compulsively possessed by and identical with the unconscious in its destructive, consciousness-negating form that they are not able to see nor think about themselves, which philosopher Hannah Arendt claims is one of the primary characteristics of evil. Unable to self-reflect, they can no longer access within themselves the faculty of the psyche from which such activity derives. One of the reasons we can’t see a vampire’s reflection in a mirror, however, is because our own inner, unconscious vampire obscures the reflection, which is to say that the unacknowledged specter of our own shadow gets in the way.

A vampire casts no shadow. In order to cast a shadow, there has to be a source of light. In a vampire there is no light, only infinite darkness. Not being a living being, a vampire has no inherent reality, no substance. Only a thing of substantial existence can produce a shadow. Vampires can’t cast a shadow, however, because they are the living embodiment of and identical with the archetypal shadow. A shadow casts no shadow of itself, as the shadow itself has no substance. There are benefits that accrue to the vampire because of its ability to not cast a shadow –  it is then easier for the vampire to hide its true identity, move in the hidden shadows, become invisible, and be able to prey on people. Not casting a shadow, the vampire, a shape-shifter who is a master of camouflage and disguise, is able to easily seduce and entice the unaware, as sugar-coated vampires entrap us through our unconscious shadow and blind-spots. This is to say that the loss and dis-owning of our shadow can lead to vampirism. The vampire archetype gets activated within us when we turn our backs on our own darkness, rendering our shadow invisible to ourselves. We can’t see vampires because we have chosen not to see those aspects of ourselves that are most like the vampire. Our reluctance to see our own vampiric qualities blinds us to the vampiric energies in others.

In addition to the weak and defenseless, vampires seek out people who are on the verge of a quantum, evolutionary leap in consciousness, but have not yet fully integrated their realizations and come out the other side.  These individuals are in an energetically sensitive and ‘charged’ condition, and their openness and vulnerability invites the vampiric entities to help themselves and gorge on the light of their expanding awareness. The strategy of these predators is to distract us so as to keep our attention directed outwards, thereby stopping us from finding the light within ourselves, which would ‘kill’ the vampires. If we hold up a mirror and reflect back the insanity being exhibited by those stricken by the wetiko psychosis, we run the very real risk of being accused of being the ones who are crazy. If we do manage to connect with the light within ourselves and try to share it with others, these nonlocal vampiric entities (what I have in previous articles called ‘nonlocal demons,’ or NLD for short), not bound by the third-dimensional laws of space and time, will try, via their ‘connections’ to the nonlocal field, to stop us by influencing other people to turn against us. This process can destroy us, or, if we have the meta-awareness to see what is happening and are able to skillfully navigate our way through, can serve to further strengthen our intention, deepen our connection with the light of lucidity, hone our skill of creatively transmitting our realizations, and cultivate more open-hearted compassion. It is as if these psychic, nonlocal vampires are guardians of the threshold of evolution.

Just like vampires, full-blown wetikos have a thirst for the very thing they lack – the mystical essence of life – i.e., the ‘blood’ of our soul. In ‘consuming other human beings, wetiko disease is a feeding thing, a psychic eating disorder in which the stricken psyche consumes other psyches, as well as, ultimately, itself. Wetikos are what are called ‘psychophagic,’ i.e., soul-eaters. Savaged by the ferocity of their unending hunger, full-blown wetikos have become possessed by an insatiable craving that can never be filled. This vampiric feeding is an unholy parody, a satanic reflection, of the self-renewal of life. This perverse inner process is mirrored collectively by the consumer society in which we live, a culture that continually fans the flames of never-ending desires, conditioning us to always want MORE. As if starving, we are in an endless feeding frenzy, trying to fill a bottomless void. This process of rabid, obsessive/compulsive consumption is a reflection of a deeper, inner shared sense of spiritual starvation. The entity of the global economic system itself is a living symbol of out-of-control wetiko disease ‘in business.’

Viruses like wetiko are all about copying themselves. A virus can’t replicate itself, however, it has to use some other vehicle as its means of reproducing itself. They need us to be their birthing chamber. To the extent we are not aware of their ploy, these higher-dimensional spirit parasites put us on, wearing us like their third-dimensional space suits. These psychic vampires are compelled to replicate themselves through us so that we can then ‘pass on’ and transmit the bug to others. This process is analogous to when someone is infected with the rabies virus. In advanced stages of the disease, like a rabid animal they will be taken over by the irresistible urge to bite other creatures so as to pass on the virus. People taken over by the rabies virus are a living, frothing symbol of what the wetiko virus does in its full-blown virulent stage.

In a vampiric lineage, the wetiko virus’s self-propagation is accomplished through the medium of the ‘family system’ (be it our family of origin, or the human family), as the legacy of abuse (be it physical, sexual, political, emotional, psychological, or spiritual) gets passed down, both individually and collectively, and transmitted over generations, continually incarnating itself through the living. It is through the traumatic shattering of our wholeness that wetiko passes its fractured logic and distorted code into the body/mind of another. As if under a curse, our species has been suffering from a collective, inherited form of PTSD (Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder). Remaking their victims in their own image, the wetikos’ victims join the legion of the ‘damned,’ themselves becoming holders of an unholy lineage. This ‘curse’ will continue until we intervene in the spreading of this vampiric mind-parasite, and the chain of never-ending abuse is stopped.


Speaking about wetikos, Forbes says, “they are insane (unclean) in the true sense of the word. They are mentally ill and tragically, the form of soul-sickness that they carry is catching.”[xxv] Wetiko psychosis is highly contagious, spreading through the channel of our shared unconsciousness. Its vectors of infection and propagation do not travel like a physical pathogen. This fluidly moving, nomadically wandering bug reciprocally reinforces, feeds off of and into each of our unconscious blind-spots, which is how it nonlocally propagates itself throughout the field. In wetiko there is a code or logic which affects/infects awareness in an analogous way to how the DNA in a virus passes into and infects a cell. People who are channeling the vibratory frequency of wetiko align with each other through psychic resonance to reinforce their shared agreement so as to uphold their deranged view of reality. Collaboratively supporting their mutual psychosis, groups of people drawn together by the unconscious can potentially become a socio-political force with which to be reckoned. When a group of people are in agreement about anything, whether it is true or not, their alignment with each other exerts a contagious, magnetic field-of-force which can sway and attract the unaware into itself.

People taken over by the wetiko virus usually don’t suspect a thing about how they have been ‘conned.’ The wetiko culture offers no incentive for them to self-reflectingly speculate upon their depraved circumstance; on the contrary, the nonlocal field configures itself to conspire, enable and further cultivate their psychosis. When someone is a full-blown, unrecognized wetiko, the field around them torques so as to protect, collude with, and feed into their psychosis in a way that en-trances everyone around them. Once under the wetiko spell, they lose the capacity to recognize the wetiko pathology in others. In a situation of ‘group narcissism,’ wetikos at different stages of the disease assume particular postures and roles relative to each other so as to protect and shield themselves from their own insanity and darkness. They feed and reinforce each others’ narcissism because it enhances their own. Speaking about the type of person who is typically susceptible to fall prey to the wetiko virus, Forbes writes that it is usually the individual “whose strings are pulled by others or who follow a life-path dictated by others. Thus they are ripe for the wetiko infection.”[xxvi] Not in touch with their inner guidance, they project authority outside of themselves, and become very suggestible to the consensus, agreed-upon opinion of the dominant pack. Losing touch with their own discernment and ability for critical thinking, the ‘mass man’ becomes part of the mindless herd and falls prey to ‘group-think,’ whose members co-dependently enable each other to uphold their shared version of the (wetiko) world. Their group consensus about the nature of reality gets increasingly harder to sustain as time passes, however, as, like a house of cards ready to collapse at any moment, their vision of the world is based on the fundamental error of not being true. Strangely enough, people under the collective enchantment of wetiko become fanatically attached to supporting an agenda that oftentimes is diametrically opposed to serving their own best interest. This is an outer reflection of the inner state of being under the sway of the self-destructive wetiko parasite.

By being ‘unclean,’ it is as if there is an un-holy or evil spirit that has taken up residence in the beings of those taken over by wetiko. They are unwittingly being used as instruments, as covert operatives of this darker, unclean spirit to proliferate itself in the wider field. Secret agents of the disease, wetikos’ secret is self-secret, in that it is secret even to themselves. As is true for any of us when we are taken over by something other than ourselves, carriers of wetiko don’t know how possessed they are at any given moment. The experience of being taken over by something more powerful than themselves always happens in their blind spot (please see my article “Are We Possessed?”).

The wetiko bug influences our perceptions by stealth and subterfuge so as to hide and obfuscate itself from being seen. Like a higher-dimensional, alien form of psychic foliage, the wetiko germ implants its seeds into and takes root and germinates within our mind, distracting and deviating us from our true vocation, calling and spiritual path. The alien, and alienating, effect of the wetiko virus, the very thing we need to see, is disguised by the way we think, perceive, and give meaning to our experience. When someone becomes a full, card-carrying member of the cult of wetiko (please see my article “The Bush Cult”), it is as if their mind has been colonized by the virus in such a way that they themselves don’t have the slightest clue about their own pathological condition. Wetikos don’t experience themselves as needing help; for them other people are always ‘the problem.’ They usually don’t mind their disease, or even recognize it, because it is all they know, and their leaders and the very society they live in encourage them in it. They neither have an appreciation of their disorder, nor do they realize how truly sick they are.

Forbes writes, “one of the major traits characterizing the truly evil and extreme form of wetikoism is arrogance.”[xxvii] In being ‘full-blown,’ wetikos are arrogantly puffed up with their own self-importance, i.e., ‘inflated.’ Instruments for evil, wetikos are arrogantly, ignorantly and self-righteously convinced they are in possession of the truth and working for the highest good. It is as if they are unable to know that what they are doing is evil, unable to register their actions as anything other than good. Forbes concludes, “In any case, the wetiko disease, the sickness of exploitation, has been spreading as a contagion for the past several thousand years. And as a contagion unchecked by most vaccines, it tends to become worse rather than better with time. More and more people catch it, in more and more places, and they become the true teachers of the young.”[xxviii] Wetiko culture gets taught both at home and in ‘the academy,’ where people become ‘certified’ in the ways of its world, and are thus accredited and empowered to spread its corrupting ways on ever grander scales.

Speaking about the rapidly spreading wetiko contagion, Forbes writes, “It is spread by the wetikos themselves as they recruit or corrupt others. It is spread today by history books, television, military training programs, police training programs, comic books, pornographic magazines, films, right-wing movements, fanatics of various kinds, high-pressure missionary groups, and numerous governments.”[xxix] All of the mainstream, culturally-sanctioned, corporatized institutions are in the business of indoctrination, telling us what to think and not think about, as well as how to think. Our mind is continually being massaged into shape by the prevailing culture, as if our ‘true face’ is being ‘lifted.’ It is as if our spiritual pockets are being picked. Our ‘civilization’ has become the mouthpiece for the propaganda organ of the disease, entrancing us to ‘buy’ into its viewpoint as we are bled to death of what really counts most. The ‘culture’ (sic) that in-forms and forms around wetiko illness is itself a channel of its transmission, and if we sign on the dotted line and subscribe to its viewpoint, its life-denying culture will gradually subsume us into itself, as we become unwitting agents doing ITS bidding. This is how the ever-expanding, self-generating psychic empire of collective psychosis ‘works,’ as it takes over and increasingly approaches ‘full-employment.’

Full-blown wetikos might be petty tyrants at home or at work but still might be one of the impoverished and oppressed, wielding no real power in the world at large. What Forbes refers to as “Big Wetikos,” are full-blown wetikos who have climbed the wetiko ladder, jumped through the wetiko hoops, and have risen in the wetiko ranks so as to find themselves occupying positions of power where they can influence and control events in our world so as to game the system. The Big Wetikos who control the levers of power, be they the super wealthy, CEO’s of corporations, bank presidents, or leaders of nation-states, are particularly dangerous, as they define the terms of our dialogue, dominating the agreed upon historical narrative. Managing our perceptions through the propaganda engines of the mainstream, corporate media which they control (please see my article “The War on Consciousness”), Big Wetikos in positions of power create the limits of our conversation and debate. Wetiko is an idealogical virus whose ‘currency’ is the syntax of ideas. Wetiko deviates our mental syntax, i.e., the rules of how we form language, thereby distorting the semantics, the meaning we place on our experience of ourselves and the world. Wetiko is a semantic disorder, as it alters the axioms through which the psyche shapes, casts and ‘spells’ its words, thereby conjuring up its experiences. The thought-forms and beliefs that express and represent the wetiko virus act as an intrinisic, built-in control system, defining the limits of what we imagine our possibilities are, as individuals, nations and as a species. Wetikoism supports and perpetuates whatever prevailing myths, stories, dogmas and (un)holy books reinforce its nefarious, self-serving agenda. Books, and other forms of information, which don’t support wetikos warped version of the way things are, are metaphorically speaking, ‘burned’ (or in some cases, literally – the books of the aforementioned Wilhelm Reich, for example, were actually burned by the United States Government. In describing what he called ‘the emotional plague,’ Reich was in his own way pointing at the evils of the wetiko virus).

We live inside of a world that, like a dream, is an interactive mirror inseparable from our own inner being. A reflection of a condition deep within ourselves, wetiko disease is an unmediated, direct manifestation of the dreamlike nature of the universe, which is the very realization that wetiko is showing us. Recognizing the dreamlike nature of our situation creates a living antibody made out of awareness itself that is custom-designed to neutralize the psychic pathogen of wetiko. This is to say that encoded within the deadly pathology of wetiko is an insight and revelation which is its own cure (please see my article “Shadow Projection is its own Medicine”). Its own self-revelation, wetiko disease provides its own psychic medicine, but in order to receive its healing ‘benefits’ we have to recognize and more deeply understand this miracle in psycho-spiritual health care. How amazing – the very thing that is potentially destroying us is at the same time waking us up. A potential catalyst for our evolution as a species, we are all co-creating and dreaming wetiko up together. Wetiko is a truly quantum phenomenon, in that it is the deadliest poison and the most healing medicine co-joined in one superposed state. Will wetiko kill us? Or will it awaken us? Everything depends upon if we recognize what it is potentially revealing to us. The prognosis for wetiko/malignant egophrenia depends upon how we dream it.

Now that we have the dia-gnosis and pro-gnosis, all we need is to discover the cure, which requires having ‘gnosis’ itself…. To be continued in Part 2.

A pioneer in the field of spiritual emergence, Paul Levy is a healer in private practice, assisting others who are also awakening to the dreamlike nature of reality. Paul is also a visionary artist and a spiritually-informed political activist. He is the author of The Madness of George Bush: A Reflection of Our Collective Psychosis, (click here to read the first chapter). Feel free to pass this article along to a friend if you feel so inspired. Please visit Paul’s website You can contact Paul at; he looks forward to your reflections. Though he reads every email, he regrets that he is not able to personally respond to all of them. © Copyright 2010.

[i] Forbes, Columbus and other Cannibals, p. xv.
[ii] ‘psychic’ is used throughout this article as the adjective form of “psyche” and not with any parapsychological connotation
[iii] Forbes, Columbus and other Cannibals, p. 46.
[iv] Forbes, Columbus and other Cannibals, p. xvii-xviii.
[v] C. G. Jung, Nietzsche’s Zarathustra, vol. 2, p. 1321.
[vi] Ibid., p. 39.
[vii] Ibid., p. xvi.
[viii] Ibid., p. 24.
[ix] Ibid., p. 49.
[x] Ibid., p. 60.
[xi] Castaneda, The Active Side of Infinity, p. 218.
[xii] Ibid., p. 218.
[xiii] Ibid., p. 218.
[xiv] Ibid., p. 219.
[xv] Ibid., p. 219.
[xvi] Ibid., p. 220.
[xvii] Ibid., p. 220.
[xviii] Ibid., p. 220.
[xix] Ibid., p. 229.
[xx] Please see Not in His Image: Gnostic Vision, Sacred Ecology, and the Future of Belief, by John Lash. His website is
[xxi] Forbes, Columbus and other Cannibals, p. 188.
[xxii] Jung, The Symbolic Life, CW 18, par. 1374.
[xxiii] Forbes, Columbus and other Cannibals,  p. 153.
[xxiv] Reich, The Mass Psychology of Fascism, p. xvii.
[xxv] Forbes, Columbus and other Cannibals, p. 18.
[xxvi] Ibid., p. 43.
[xxvii] Ibid., p. 52.
[xxviii] Ibid., p. xix.
[xxix] Ibid., p. 49.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE

FORGIVE THE DARK SIDE? - posted 12/27/10

"Not In Eternity," says reader. OK, Lets Talk About That...

By Xavier Hermes on Monday, 27-Dec-2010

Reader Nilmaa has a good rant about the dark side:

Forgive those who have held back humanity, from our inheritance?

"Odious folk": how about mass murderers, war mongers, thieves, liars, CORRUPTED ONES keeping food and progress from untold hundreds of starving millions. Criminals, and thugs in government and other positions of ransomed stolen power, controlling world drug cartels, human slavery, organ trafficking. Could go on, for a long time with the descriptions of facts, to the abomination of horrors, these so called "Odious folk" have committed over swaths of time.

Clearly, this "galactic federation of {blight} light" is a false dream, another false hope, a manipulation, from a long ago infiltrated "new age movement", by the very elite being the ones that need this so called forgiving.

Not in eternity could I summon any forgiveness for the sorry lot of the elite. No, it's the lake of fire for them, I'm afraid. Their lot I shall leave up to the Creator, as was written long ago.


Well, my first thought when I received this was, 'Here is someone whose glass is defintely half empty'. But there are several points here that are majorly important, so I thank Nilmaa for writing this. Of course, a key understanding about forgiveness is the good it does you when you come to that all-forgiving view. Otherwise, the energies of blame and negative thinking will keep eating away at you, a corrosive force within that will do much damage.

Do those who have been forgiven feel any kind of release when it is? No, I don't believe so. We should look at them with compassion, since the laws of karma indicate that they are going to have to tread every step of the path they have laid out for others. Yet that is not a completion either.

The rules that balance out the duality on Earth mean that, in our many lifetimes, we have 'been' both the light and the dark, and in every variation we can imagine (and some we can't). Sometimes we can even overdo the polarity – in either direction. There is a tradition that says that the Buddah was killed by the Angel of Restraint, for bringing too much light into duality all at once – and thus creating a huge imbalance and further activating the dark. Upping the degree of polarisation, as it were.

I remember a lady I used to know well, who is (in this life) a most enlightened person, someone you cannot imagine consciously doing harm at any level. She developed the extraordinary ability to project herself into past lives, sharing the body of a former incarnation and learning about a wide range of cultures and experiences she had come to know in other times and places. It was truly rivetting material she came back with. All was well until, one day, she returned from such a journey (in deep meditation) deeply shocked. She had gone to a lifetime where she was the abbot of a monastery, and where she was taking in young boys to 'become priests'. The parents would get a single report about their child, once a year up to a certain age, and then hear no more. But all was an evil sham. In reality, the boys were there as human sacrifices, ritually slain at the behest of, and frequently by the hand of, the abbot.

On her return, my friend wept for days! This was an unimagined aspect of who she has been along the path of soul growth. And horrifying!

So...just contemplate this:

a) Anything you see out there that deeply offends, you have almost certainly done along the way
b) There appears to be a 'loop in time' at the end of this time structure (i.e. NOW), the loop being two to three lifetimes long. It means that those who arrive at the ending and 'do not yet get it', continuing to play out their unbalanced nefarious schemes - they just keep circulating until they arrive at a level of consciousness that allows them to achieve balance and finally move on. So, they are being given every opportunity to repeat the final term before the big exam / graduation.
c) The mind-bender is that this means than many people are here in multiple incarnations, simultaneously-in-time
d) so, before condeming those nasty dark-siders, just be aware it may be you that you are wishing to banish to hell or worse
e) it also appears that there are beings that have been so much in the light over many incarnation that they are required to finish up this time structure by embracing the dark side - so balancing things out, and allowing them to move on. very, very careful as to whom you point the finger at!
f) Yes, there do appear to be some dispensations to allow these journeys to come to an end – but, they require recognition (of what one has done along the way) by each indivual receiving such a dispensation. Finding the balance to do this is not neccessarly easy.

So...the scenario around us is not only ..."We are the ones we have been waiting for"
but I suggest
"We are the ones who are holding us back", and "We are the ones playing out the dark side"

This last point is not, however, an absolute, not every abomination being played out is us – there are also dark influences that really are not supposed to be a part of this scene, and who we shall, soon, need to stand up to and firmly reject (and, perhaps, this takes us back to Nilmaa's rant). But, to get it right, we are going to need all the discernment we can muster.

Well – we all know by now that duality can get pretty crazy!

Don't forget that we are all immortal spirit beings, having a series of incarnational experiences that we chose. Why? Because it is the fastest means of soul growth that exists! Exploring the light AND the dark in a realm of polarisation.

And yes, the original plot has been hi-jacked by the 'even darker' – just to make the play that much more interesting...

"All the World's a Stage and All The People, Merely Players"

That's us too, folks!

Xavier Hermes

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Written by David Wilcock ~ Sunday, 05 December 2010 23:52

In this long-awaited sequel to our series, get the insider details on China's military operations against the NWO. The fight for Disclosure is getting more and more blatant – and we're definitely seeing some powerful events!




If you are still freaking out about the Old World Order and their diabolical plans, try to relax! The evidence is becoming overwhelming that there is an extreme, multi-faceted worldwide effort being made to bring them down. Multiple sources now confirm China has made a bold leap into the fray by using EMP technology – in conjunction with alleged ET allies – to force these power brokers to stand down. And the war is not over yet.

You are about to read all the evidence, link by link, in chronological order. It has taken a great deal of time and energy to put this together and I am sorry for the wait. I have been posting intuitive information online since 1996, including many prophecies – both in 'readings' and in dreams – that have come true.

The insider data and intuitive data isn't provable. Insiders can be right about one thing but wrong about something else. I also would put them – and me – at risk if I were to even hint at who exactly has told me what. That's why I do all the research – and show you tangible proof that what I am hearing is probably true.


My intuitive data has been very, very consistent in telling me the "negative elite" will not succeed. Any apparent victory they may expect to have is not part of the grander script this planet is being led through – by high-level angelic beings, for lack of a better term.

During the last three years I have had at least 200 different dreams all saying the Old World Order will be defeated in a very obvious and dramatic fashion. These dreams continue right up to the present and have not changed – only gotten more intense. I have had many years of experience in how accurate this guidance can be, particularly when you get 'clusters' of data that all point in the same direction. The dreams have always said that Disclosure won't happen until we see a clear and spectacular defeat of the Powers that Were on the world stage first. The two must work in conjunction. This is exactly what's happening right now. Open your eyes and take a look at what you see.


Some reliable insider sources, like TBRNews, were trying to say Wikileaks was all 'controlled opposition' – at least as of November 21st (emphasis added):

Washington, D.C., November 21, 2010: “Although it is not a matter of public knowledge, the facts surrounding the so-called ‘WikiLeaks’ are such that perhaps a little publicity would do no harm. This concept is a government disinformation site, designed to ‘leak’ information to the public that cannot be published in the mainline media. The ‘tens of thousands of vital messages’ dealing with Afghanistan have been tailor-made to give Obama the excuse to exit from Afghanistan. Unfortunately, the Republican gains in the House have made this policy null and void. The new Republicans do not want to stop war, they want even more – and so Obama’s plans to get out have been scrapped.

The earlier WikiLeaks stories were all low-level, not important to U.S. national security and, aside from the Administration, of interest only to inane bloggers and their readers...The CIA loves to use people like Julian the Apostate because if they get caught, Langley always looks the other way and murmurs, ‘Julian who?’


The problem with this argument is that if you start a war, you can end up getting shot. If you start a wildfire, your house could burn down. If this is 'controlled opposition,' then whoever started it has absolutely nothing to lose by potentially disemboweling the entire national security state.

These were the Drudge headlines from Monday, November 29th... and they did not sound good for the Powers that Were. It's a veritable orgy of 'bad news', as far as they are concerned – the "most embarrassing, damaging disclosure in decades":

Wikileaks is the blood in the water that turns ordinary people into hungry sharks when they're already pissed off about the economy. Many disgruntled insiders now have a democratic, unregulated way to create more leaks – or make their own alternative wiki sites if they can't get through to Assange.

If someone at the top did officially sanction Wikileaks, it's the political equivalent – at least for the Powers that Were – of playing a hot-potato game with nuclear fuel rods. The news system isn't even designed to be able to handle this much information at once. It typically grabs two or three stories in politics, entertainment, sports, business, comedy, local, et cetera and that's basically what you get.

The UFO issue has already come up:

New Wikileaks Contain UFO Details

[Assange] said there were some references to extraterrestrial life in yet-to-be-published confidential files obtained from the American government. He did not disclose what information was contained in the diplomatic memos obtained by the whistleblowing website. It also remains unclear when they will be published...

Some websites later speculated that the cables could offer answers to claims from US military pilots that aliens have landed, infiltrated British nuclear missile sites and deactivated the weapons.

If Julian Assange does not have any decent documents on UFOs right now, that could all change in one single hand-off. And even the sophisticated hacker attacks – involving millions of computers – haven't been enough to stop this from going 'viral' online. What self-respecting hackers would actually want to stop Wikileaks? Only the ones on government payrolls.


After I already wrote most of the above, I found the insider source at TBRNews had released an update that blatantly contradicted his initial opinion that Wikileaks was all "controlled opposition" run by the CIA. I've hardly ever seen this insider retract his own word. There must be very compelling reasons for him having done so. Check this out (emphasis added):

Washington, D.C., December 4, 2010: “Initially, I had thought Julian Assange to be a cross between a gadfly and a fraud [DW: A 'gadfly' is a persistently annoying person, like a fly buzzing in your face] – but two weeks ago, a friend, name unknown, sent me eight discs containing much, if not all, of the so-called DoS cables – and much on certain American banks that he is in the process of releasing to the public. Reading this over was a revelation, because it would be an impossibility to fake so much material – and some of the material I have seen elsewhere.

Now, as the full impact of Julian’s work has spread around the world, sheer panic has set in all over Washington and parts of northern Virginia.

I note the captive media is braying for Julian’s arrest or assassination, an indicator of what their bosses really want. Julian is an Aussie – and how Holder could try him for treason sounds like something out of Alice in Wonderland. The real culprits here are the fumbling fools that pack the ranks of both the CIA and the Department of State.

What these releases have done is to expose the arrogant and crude methodology of American diplomacy – and we have not heard the end of this yet. And if the CIA, or other official American agencies, kill Assange, they will be making an instant martyr of him – and the huge body of other documents, obviously copied out and disseminated, will certainly emerge to a much more receptive audience.


I believe this TBRNews insider is right on the money – even more than he realized as of the 4th. Assange has also covered his butt (OK, bad choice of metaphor) by creating a 'deadman switch' to release even more damaging documents.

If anyone messes with him, he's going to flip the switch (emphasis added):

Wikileaks Ready to Release Giant 'Insurance' File if Shut Down

Julian Assange, the WikiLeaks founder, has circulated across the internet an encrypted “poison pill” cache of uncensored documents suspected to include files on BP and Guantanamo Bay.

One of the files identified this weekend by The Sunday Times — called the “insurance” file — has been downloaded from the WikiLeaks website by tens of thousands of supporters, from America to Australia.

Assange warns that any government that tries to curtail his activities risks triggering a new deluge of state and commercial secrets...

The U.S. Department of Defense says it is aware of the WikiLeaks insurance file, but has been unable to establish its contents. It has been available for download since July.

Assange has warned he can divulge the classified documents in the insurance file and similar backups if he is detained or the WikiLeaks website is permanently removed from the internet.

He has suggested the contents are unredacted, posing a possible security risk for coalition partners around the world. Assange warned: “We have over a long period of time distributed encrypted backups of material we have yet to release. All we have to do is release the password to that material, and it is instantly available.”

The “doomsday files” are part of a contingency plan drawn up by Assange and his supporters as they face a legal threat. He is wanted in Sweden over sexual assault allegations, and the US administration is reviewing the possibility of legal action after the release of 250,000 diplomatic cables.

Ben Laurie, a London-based computer security expert who has advised WikiLeaks, said: “Julian’s a smart guy and this is an interesting tactic. He will hope it deters anyone from acting against him.”

Nigel Smart, professor of cryptology at the U.K.'s Bristol University, said even powerful military computers would be unable to crack the encryption. He said: “This isn’t something that can be broken with a modern computer. You need the key to open it.” The file is 1.4 gigabytes in size, which would be big enough for a compressed version of all the files released this year and additional data...

Tens of millions of personal computers were hijacked last week in an act of sabotage that crippled the WikiLeaks website.

WikiLeaks revealed that a “denial of service” attack that temporarily shut down the website used a network of “zombie” computers, which were infiltrated by the hackers. WikiLeaks is now battling for its survival. Amazon, which hosted the website, refused further access to its servers last week. A site that provided WikiLeaks with its domain name,, also cut off its service because it said it was being inundated with sabotage attacks. Some of the contingency plans were revealed when the site re-emerged on Friday with a Swiss address, The new name was provided by the Swiss Pirate party, which champions internet freedom. Assange has also set up contingency servers in Sweden.

This is very, very interesting. Disclosure is happening now.

It hasn't gotten into UFOs just yet, but we're already seeing the signs of what true Disclosure will be like – an explosive burst of new information that the insiders do not want you to know, all coming out at once.


In Part One I discussed "The Event" – the most blatant attempt at Disclosure with 'plausible deniability,' as a seemingly fictional television show, that the world has ever seen. The plot is remarkably similar to a plan for Disclosure I told you about last year, from insider sources. Obviously I do not believe NBC got it from our website. No one can deny that I am on public record – in writing and in audio and video – telling you almost the exact same story as "The Event" in 2009.

The story was that Obama was planning a formal Disclsoure to the public that UFOs exist, and are piloted by remarkably human ETs – who he was going to introduce us to on live television. Furtherore, he was going to say that five groups of human ETs have been working with the US government for the last century, that we need their help now to save the planet, and "please don't shoot them" as they are mortal.


We also found out, after the fact, that five different insider groups worked to stop this announcement before it ever got started – all with the most dire threats. This does not mean the announcement has been canceled – merely postponed. We will probably never know when it is coming until the minute it happens. However, the Wikileaks explosion could force it to the surface faster than many insiders think.

Another window for an Obama-led Disclosure announcement was chosen this year – just a few months back. I didn't hear about it until after it came and went, but was aware of other rumors from Benjamin Fulford that such a plan was very much in the works.

Think about it. In less than one month, it will be less than a year before 2012. If you believe there is any credence to these prophecies whatsoever, then obviously many things will need to happen in the next year. And believe me, that's exactly what they're planning – based on every insider source I'm in contact with. It is also important to remember that the power groups do believe 2012 is significant, and will create that significance whether there is anything 'real' to it or not. This was emphatically described to me by a high-level insider recently.


This insider said there was a "2010 Window," which was for "Full Disclosure with Plausible Deniability," to prepare us for a much bigger "2012 Window" – which would include "Full Disclosure without Plausible Deniability" if it hadn't already happened by then. Obviously Disclosure is going to happen somehow – and soon. It's not a question of if, it's a question of when. These are the Last Days before The Announcement. I would be very surprised if we make it through 2011 without the whole cover-up crumbling apart – in the midst of a spectacular defeat for the power brokers. Yes – many plans have been made and thwarted, but all it takes is one 'winner' in this game and the whole thing breaks open. We will always look back upon this final transitional period in the same way that kids would say "That's so September 10th" after 9/11.


The plot of "The Event" only goes back to the 1940s, and only involves one group of human ETs – maybe two if you count the head Illuminati guy, Dempsey, shape-shifting into a younger version of himself in the mirror at the end of Episode 8. In this show, Obama (as Elias Martinez) wanted to hold a big press conference and announce that human ETs have been here since the 1940s, and introduce us to their female leader. Right before he made the announcement, a hijacked airliner threatened his life – only to be warped through a 'portal' at the last second. The whole Disclosure was thwarted – and the show tracks the story of what happens in the aftermath.


This past Monday night's show, Episode 10, is the last one of this half-season. In it, the Vice President says the following very striking lines, directly to the character representing President Obama: “You think you’re at the top of this game? Truth is you’re just as much a bit player as I am. Vulnerable to any number of people who have the power, the money and the will to take you down.”

This show appears to be genuinely trying to inform the public about what is going on – including the fact that there are highly powerful groups manipulating events behind the scenes for their own benefit. In the very first episode, we find out that the President of the United States was not briefed on what was going on with the ETs being held at Camp Inostranka until it had become a full-blown crisis situation. Otherwise he did not have a "Need to Know."
Highly reliable insiders have told me this show is financed by the Pentagon – by about 60 percent. I do feel those who paid for this show represent one faction within an increasingly 'hot' insider war over Disclosure. We're not talking about some Internet-fueled speculation anymore – we're talking about mainstream corporate media Disclosure, on network television, with 'plausible deniability' by framing it as if it were fiction – when obviously it is much more than that.


As I suggested on the phone with Richard C. Hoagland last night – and he agreed with me – part of the reason why the actors in "The Event" are not told any plot points in advance is because the show itself is being written as they go, dynamically responding to world events as they happen. I saw this last year with 'V' as well, where emerging things like the swine flu vaccine controversy suddenly manifested in the episodes – with very little change. I do not believe in coincidence and in this case there is a very plausible explanation. You have a general outline and structure for the plot, and you also do rewrites on the fly to work in current events – and change your episodes at the last minute.

Richard also pointed out that the executive producer of this major hit TV series has no prior credits whatsoever. It is therefore very likely that he is just a figurehead for others who are writing and producing the show. Episode 10 just featured a missile that went off, severely upsetting the President and his insiders, who watched helplessly as it went up into space – not knowing if it would wipe out the West Coast in a nuclear blast.

This very likely seems to have been a real-time television response to the alleged missile incident off the coast of Los Angeles – which definitely was not a jet contrail.

Fulford is now on record saying three different Asian high-level sources told him the Chinese actually launched this missile – as part of an ongoing show of force demanding the Old World Order folks stand down, just as I was independently told.

One clue that this new plot point was worked in at the last minute was how unfinished the CG animation looked – more like a video game than a finished product for a big-budget hit TV show.

Having worked with our own CG crews, I know that what takes the most time is getting the right procedural textures and lighting effects to get things looking photo-realistic.

Some of the shots – particularly as the missile shed its booster – looked very, very rushed. No one took time to do the proper surfacing or lighting to get photorealism. If you don't surface your CG, the objects usually start out as just being gray in color. The satellite in this effects sequence is predominantly all gray until the end – as if they just didn't have time to do a whole lot more. The particle animations, such as you see in the above frame, also seemed really rushed and did not help it look convincing. Nor did they put anything around the rocket to simulate atmospheric haze or debris. The final shot, as the ET satellite expanded into its full size, looked better – but they do have the budget to have made the whole sequence look much more realistic. It's really a question of the time they had to do it.

The missile launch was on November 9th, and this episode aired 20 days later. With actors, writers and existing sets on hand, they may well have had just enough time to squeak this last-minute rewrite in to the final episode of the season. The 'radial' patterns you see on the top of this satellite are really easy to create in CG – all you have to do is model one fin on the satellite and start cloning it around a central axis.


This satellite became a "cliffhanger" plot point to carry us into the next season. The negative faction of the ETs are now calling out into space – apparently for reinforcements. There was no prior precedent in the show to suggest they were going to use a rocket or a satellite, or that anything like this would happen. In earlier 'writes' it could easily have been something here on the ground that was helping ET phone home. Their goal? They want to terraform the Earth so they can colonize it – and in the process effectively destroy it for everyone else.

Given that China's October Surprise may very well become public knowledge, including their use of a missile, this plot point in 'The Event' could easily be part of the 'spin control' to create a healthy fear around the whole thing. If China is working with their own group of ETs, even the white hats in the Pentagon don't want them to come out as the shining stars of Disclosure. It's a much better idea to cloud the legitimacy of any effort China is making by embedding the 'spin' directly into popular fiction – to help shape and mold what people think about real-world events.


There are other very similar efforts I'm seeing as well – particularly since the China story I started telling you about in October has been leaked in certain online UFO forums. I was utterly shocked at how many specific details were in this online 'leak' – much more than I had been willing to say here. The online 'leaks' were loaded with remarkably specific points I had already heard independently. The similarities caught my attention. Very much. The even bigger surprise, though, was in seeing the things that were different.

In these forum 'leaks', we are told that China's ETs are trying to terraform the Earth so they can colonize it. Conveniently, we are also expected to blame the Chinese and their friends for deliberately creating the BP oil volcano as well – when they had nothing to do with it. 


In the 'spin' version, the BP oil disaster was created to deliberately release a microbe into the Gulf that is intelligent and self-organizing – and will quickly terraform the world, so China's ET allies can comfortably move in. Same spin, different way. While nothing can ever be completely ruled out, I am certain that this is a classic case of disinformation in action.

If China is actually doing a good thing for humanity – or even just protecting their own faction in the global game – and could utterly defeat the Old World Order in the process, the Powers that Were need to flood the online information market with counterfeit 'currency' about China's real intentions. They then force these paranoid, negative interpretations of current events to become part of the public discussion. If I didn't raise them here, others would then think I was doing my own 'cover-up' of China's "real intentions."

New Agers on the same UFO forum then started saying they were having telepathic contact with the group mind of the microbes – and said it was actually a positive thing to help us Ascend. More and more people have an intuitive 'knowing' that this is all working out – so even crafty disinfo programs are not achieving their desired objective. Nonetheless, there is a hard fight going on. When the forum leaks didn't catch on and get traction, the same point was apparently established much more prominently in 'The Event' – complete with the missile launch added in.


I highly, highly doubt the ET allies of the Chinese want to terraform the Earth and take over. The whole concept that this would even be necessary is mythical once you understand that the human form is a Galactic design. The vast majority of habitable worlds have the same atmospheric composition – the same sort of microbes, plants, insects, birds, animals and fish, et cetera. It's a great design and it has gotten us a lot of mileage here in the Milky Way. The high-level 'Management' ETs have set up and maintained a Galaxy-wide stargate network – specifically to encourage peaceful exploration of these mutually compatible worlds, inhabited by human beings.

It is interesting to see two different sources – the UFO forum insiders and "The Event" – both trying to put the same 'spin' on these extremely significant current events, which the mass public may soon know are the handiwork of China. I believe this is all part of a last-minute effort to make people fear China's plan – knowing very well that it could go public soon. Once I explain to you how many different events are all interconnected, you might begin to see what an incredible story this is.


In Part One, I also said China's move could very well have been the result of Divine timing – coming at the last possible minute. The world's economy is under direct attack – and this time the Powers that Were want to destroy everything. Many of my dreams have said things would look really, really dire, as if there was no way out, but then it would resolve right as it seemed we were really done for.

In Part One I 'leaked' some of this new information – namely that the Old World Order feels they have run out of time, and are trying to create a financial disaster that would lead to the deaths of 4.5 billion people. In the next installment, hopefully in a week or so, I will roll out all the provable specifics to track that financial information – as it is also a very complex discussion and would make this part of my article series far too long.

In Part One I also alluded to the fact that China had created an incredibly surprising counter-move to this Old World Order financial attack. I have a strong feeling the Wikileaks material was part of China's plan, with the go-ahead from the Obama administration – but no one anticipated how strong it would really be. Assange's tactic of using the "deadman switch" suggests he's being advised by seasoned intelligence professionals.


As you can now find out from other sources already online, China's big counter-move against the Powers that Were began in October. Packages that had been hand-delivered, by courier, in July were ordered to be opened on October 13th. These packages were given to every head of state of every country in the world. Little did they know they had just received a time bomb – literally. M They were all told if they tried to open them before the 13th, an explosive in the package would completely destroy everything within a six-mile radius.

I assume that if they tried to move them, this would also create the same problem. I can also assume that if they failed to open them within a fairly limited window of time after October 13th, the same disaster would occur. They could have abandoned their official buildings, and maybe some did – but any such actions would arouse great suspicion.

This is why I described China's move as so skillfully and brilliantly crafted, and compared it to Sun Tzu's "The Art of War". They effectively scared the living crap out of leaders all over the world by doing this.


Every head of state, in over 120 countries worldwide, did open their boxes – but many waited until the 14th just to be sure. Inside every box was an identical set of goodies. This "care package" included comprehensive documents outlining how to build free energy technology – as well as many other secrets that should no longer be classified. Working free energy prototypes, with all the plans to reproduce them, were also in the box. One such example is a battery that lets your car run a thousand miles on a gallon of water. The clear message is "Stand down and let us get free energy out to the world. We want Disclosure, we want peace, we want an end to poverty and hunger and we want it now."


Before, during and especially after the time the packages were opened, when the Old World Order did not readily surrender, China engaged in a form of warfare we've never seen before on Earth – at least never on this scale, with this many events in such a short time. China – with a little help from their friends – used EMP technology to disable a wide array of corporate and military assets held by the Old World Order. I was the first person to tell Fulford about this, and he later got independent confirmation from his own insiders that I was right.

The proof is redunantly visible in the news headlines once you know what you're looking for. I'm going to show you all the links to these stories so you can decide for yourself if there was, indeed, a highly bizarre number of 'random accidents' that all happened at the same time. China's message clearly was "You can't stop us. Stand down. Let us do this. Disclosure must be allowed to proceed. Otherwise we can completely shut down everything you've got."


Terrified leaders rushed over to China and literally begged them not to do this – but they did not bend. Everything I just told you appeared in these same online forums I've been mentioning. The only difference in what I heard was the genuine contents of the containers – and what China's actual goal was. I do not think so many specific details would have been given by the alleged insiders in these forums unless the people they work for expect it's all going to go public – perhaps very soon. I was shocked to see so many specifics – but now that it's all out in the open, there's no harm in discussing it anymore.

Imagine what happens when any one of these leaders around the world decides to get the entire treasure trove of China documents into the hands of Julian Assange. As I said, Wikileaks may not be a "random burst of good luck" here – it may all be part of the same, orchestrated plan. You deliver the documents to world leaders, educate them, and also provide a mechanism that allows them to get those documents out into the mainstream – without getting any one leader in trouble for having leaked them.


In the next update, hopefully in about a week, I will go through and carry excerpts and detailed analyses of each of these events. Fulford's disclosures about China being in touch with ETs since the 1940s will also be revealed. So, in the meantime, here's a single, mass list of what our investigation has been able to find so far. I can't guarantee that every single thing on this list was caused by China or her allies, but I got direct insider confirmation on many of them – and the others fit an overall pattern, straining the idea of 'coincidence' way past the breaking point.
The Stuxnet virus, I was told, was designed by ETs and is much more sophisticated than we can do on our own. An article recently emerged that said the same thing. The word STUXNET re-arranges to US NEXT with only one extra T. The events that unfolded proved this 'prophecy' was correct.

9/30: 6 Million Computers and 1000 Enterprises Hit by Virus in China (Opposing Factions – Insider War)
9/30: Start-up of Iran’s Bushehr Nuclear Plant Delayed By Virus
(11/26): Stuxnet Virus Almost Impossibly Sophisticated (Extraterrestrial-Designed)

10/21: Exxon Mobil Oil Refinery Near Chicago Has Equipment Failure
10/22: Oil Refinery in Rodeo, CA Has Equipment Failure
10/22: Brand New UK Nuclear Submarine "HMS Astute" Loses Power, Runs Aground Off Scotland
10/23: 1/9th of US Missile Arsenal Taken Offline for One Hour
10/23: US Lost Command of 1/9th of Nuclear Arsenal – Unprecedented, Enormous Failure
10/28: French Warship to Join US Fleet – Escalating Persian Gulf Tensions
10/31: French Nuclear Aircraft Carrier Breaks Down Enroute to Persian Gulf

11/3: Electrical Fault Causes Largest American Nuclear Power Plant to Shut Down
11/4: Quantas Airlines Grounds All Airbus A380s After Engine Fire Over Indonesia
11/5: Engine Problems Hit Second Quantas Aircraft – This Time a Boeing 747-400
11/7: 911 Emergency System Equipment Failure in Atlanta
11/8: Quantas Uncovers More Engine Problems
11/8: “Complete Coincidence” as Two Different Nuclear Plants Shut Down Within One Hour – New York and Vermont
11/8: Carnival Splendor Cruise Ship's Propulsion and Communication Systems Destroyed, Ship Stranded for Days
11/8: Equipment Failure Causes 15 Time Warner Channels (If Not All of Them) to Freeze for 90 Minutes
11/8: Time Warner Blackout Included NBC’s George W. Bush Interview and “The Event”
11/9: Massive Missile Launch Occurs Off LA Coast, Still Unexplained
11/9/2007: Chinese Sub Appears in US Navy Exercise – Huge Shock and Embarassment (Same Day as 2010 Missile)
11/10: Mystery Contrail May Have Been An Airplane (Not)
11/10: Rocketry Expert Confirms It Was a Solid Propellant Missile
11/10: Weird Line of “Fire” Hangs in NY Skyline
11/15: BP Texas Oil Refinery Fails, Releases Hydrogen Sulfide
11/28: Kansas Oil Refinery Has Equipment Failure, Releases Hydrogen Sulfide and Sulfur Dioxide

12/4: Louisiana Oil Refinery Has Fiery Equipment Failure


You can either wait until next week when I extract all the juicy quotes out of the above links, or start clicking on them for yourself – and you'll definitely see the pattern. The very first thing this allegedly Chinese group seems to have done is strike out against rival Chinese factions – which may well be the ones running the Communist Party. That is apparently why you see a massive viral attack against six million computers and a thousand different corporations in China as the first shot. They've also gone after Iran – so this is not merely a campaign against Western nations. It's a campaign to stabilize the Earth and nullify negative and destructive influences.

There has been very little, if any loss of life caused by these events. They have the technology to kill large numbers of people – obviously – but that's not what we're seeing here. Yes – they did show they could threaten airplanes in flight – but the planes were not actually damaged to the point where the passangers were harmed.

[Unfortunately, by my publicizing this, I am aware that other events may be created that will be blamed on China and will involve fatalities. That is part of why I waited so long – I wanted enough time to pass so you could see the current trend.]

Also, notice how many of the equipment failures are of oil or nuclear power systems. The vast majority of these events have targeted the US, and the people making money from the sale of oil. This is a clear and consistent sign.


Nonetheless, this whole scenario raises a lot of problematic questions.

One major concern – first raised by my mother when I briefed her about this early along – is that this obviously upsets the existing balance of power in the world. If this faction of Chinese does not have the best intentions, how would we be able to stop them?

My dream data consistently has been saying this is a war between rivaling factions. No one is 100-percent 'good' or 100-percent 'evil.' The fight will look very intense, but the 'animals' I saw in one particular dream were going after each other – leaving everyone else alone as they went at it.

I wrote Part Two primarily to set the stage for this discussion so you would understand that there are positive beings, at a very highly evolved level, overseeing and managing what happens on Earth. Should China and her allies get too cocky, or try to abuse what they have been given, this newfound power can very easily and quickly be taken away from them. However, by that point they will probably have so fundamentally altered the balance of power in the world that we can barely even imagine what that post-Disclosure, post-tyrannical civilization will actualy be like.


Another big question is this: If China has ET allies that could have ganged up on the Old World Order and stopped the madness at any time, then what the hell took them so long? The answer is that they could not have done this before. The fact that they were able to do this at all suggests that something monumental and totally shocking has happened: THE RULES have changed. Ultimately, that would not have happened unless the collective will of humanity has shifted towards the positive strongly enough that we are no longer inviting these planetary controllers to continue enslaving us. This 'invitation' involves a form of voting, on a collective level.


Each time we shame someone, manipulate them, control them, hurt them, defeat them, and then try to hide it all behind a cloak of secrecy, we are voting for the 'negative elite' to continue doing this to us on a planetary level. The more we 'vote' to be humble, listen to other people, consider other people's needs as well as our own, be flexible, be open to changing our minds, and treat others with love, compassion and forgiveness, the more the negative elite's grip is loosened. Furthermore, as you see in the Law of One series, we have the added benefit of the "Law of Squares".

Each person consistently 'voting' for the positive will double the number of total 'votes'. It adds up very, very fast. One person counts as one, two counts as two, three counts as four, four counts as eight, five counts as sixteen, six counts as 32, seven counts as 64, et cetera. That means even seven people voting for the positive will have as much 'pull,' in Universal terms, as 64 people voting for the negative. The voting is rigged!

This is due to the fact that the One Infinite Creator itself is ultimately positive, in the sense that the negative has been fully integrated. The Creator has therefore biased Universal Law – THE RULES – to favor the positive, while still preserving free will. The highly-evolved 'Management' ETs – or angelic beings, if you will – are responsible for insuring that the events on our planet are a reflection of how far we have evolved in this progress towards love, acceptance and forgiveness – which is our true Identity. These 'Management' entities function at a much higher and more sophisticated level than ETs in UFOs. They actually represent entire planets of beings like us that have since evolved into a collective consciousness with a single identity.


In Part Two, I explained what THE RULES mean to the insider world. They have to work within these restrictions but do not know where they came from or why they exist. They are seen as unchanging natural laws. I also gave you a comprehensive disclosure regarding the 'Quarantine' – which is one working aspect of THE RULES. The Quarantine is a seemingly-impenetrable shield that keeps ETs out and Earth humans in. There are, of course, many ETs who come and go anyway, but this traffic is much more limited than it would be without the Quarantine. Non-living debris, like meteors and asteroids, can get through. Non-living technology, that could be used to hurt us, would be identified and blocked. The Quarantine is far enough above the Earth's surface, in the Van Allen belts, that it does not disrupt our normal usage of satellites.

My contact Henry Deacon said all the missions that leave Earth orbit have required special technology to open a hole in the Quarantine – and this is why all the lunar astronauts said their missions were followed by UFOs. According to Deacon, those UFOs were our guys, making sure these astronauts would be safe as they crossed through the barrier. The single most important guiding principle is that the ETs have never been allowed to interfere with Earth's history in any substantial way – even when they did come and go through the Quarantine.

Those were THE RULES – and always have been, for at least the last thousand years or more. There is remarkable similarity between what insiders told me and what was written about all this in the Law of One series. Prior to the last thousand years, there are written records of open contact with ETs, as angels, 'Gods' or otherwise, and archeological sites to go along with them. In the Law of One series it is explained that the Quarantine is a managed gateway into the Earth, and if a particular plan to help us is approved, then the visitation will be allowed to occur.


I was told by my best sources that this Quarantine is depicted on military badges as two thin loops around the Earth. When I actually started looking for supportive evidence for this, I was absolutely stunned at how many I found. Up until I wrote last week's article, I'd never bothered to do this research – but it was extremely productive.

I knew, from various sources, that I could find these loops on the Air Force Space Command badge and the Navy Space Command badge, but I felt like a kid in a candy store once I started searching for other examples. I highly recommend you CLICK HERE FOR PART TWO if you haven't already seen this, as I was amazed by what I found. The story got much, much more interesting as I saw so many repetitions of the same themes – the massive delta-shaped interstellar spacecraft insiders have told me about, the Templar symbolism, Global Grid symbolism, depictions of ETs and stargates.


THE RULES is a system of unbreakable 'laws' that are being administered by levels of intelligence the insiders have no access to. (They would gain that access if they bothered to read the Law of One series!) The Quarantine is one key element of THE RULES, but there are other aspects to it as well.

The insiders were led to believe the Old World Order could do whatever they wanted, collapse the world's economy, take over the financial system, set up a global dictatorship, whatever – and no ETs would ever be allowed to do anything to stop them. Those were THE RULES, at least as they understood them. They did and do literally believe the Earth was a vast banquet of souls, ripe for the plucking, simply because they were born here with the rest of us. They were led to believe they had complete free will to do whatever the hell they wanted, with no interference, for millions of years to come. No one would ever come and do anything to stop them. Nothing whatsoever.

China's moves, with the help of their ET allies, have now completely broken THE RULES. Therefore, this suggests that epic shifts have been made to systems that no one ever thought would change, or even could change. It is obvious to me that this was the plan all along – by what I call 'Management' – the ETs who make THE RULES. This also helps to explain the unrelentingly positive nature of my intuitive data – even in the midst of seemingly impossible paradoxes, which create an almost inevitable hopelessness in everyone who is directly exposed to these insider agendas.


I believe China's October Surprise has happened because there is a 'script' where these insiders must be defeated – but in order for them to fulfill their parts, they cannot know the game in advance or they would lose the incentive to play along. I realized that if I didn't comprehensively sketch out what we know from the Law of One series in Part Two, none of this would really make a whole lot of sense – except for long-time readers of this website.

Many people grumbled about the fact that I did a lot of set-up last week without getting to the punch line – but it was very important that I layer in that groundwork first. Otherwise, the fear of the unknown – both economically and in terms of this astonishing military campaign from China – could be intense enough to make some people feel suicidal. I am literally not kidding when I have had many dreams tell me my work has saved many people from suicide – merely by providing hope in a world where so little exists once you are exposed to the 'Truth'.


This article went up about 12:30 AM California time – and Benjamin Fulford had not yet posted his update when I went to sleep. However, when I got up just now I was blown away by what he said. Ben defined who his insider group is in an earlier post:

 the Black Dragon Society. This group is capable of mobilizing the British Empire, the Vatican, many of the oil producing states, at least half of the Pentagon, the Japanese military/police establishment and the over 50 million people studying martial arts worldwide…

Some people have scoffed at this, but there have been many, many times where Ben's sources independently confirm what my own insider sources have told me – before anyone else knows about it.

This week, Ben says his group was contacted by a man they're calling "Mr. X", who claimed to represent the Chinese government. Mr. X gave certain statements and documents showing that he did indeed have very high insider connections. However, Ben also said,

Mr. X was unable to answer any of the questions he was supposed to be able to confirm if he were a genuine representative of who he claimed to represent... He has been asked to arrange a meeting between a representative of the White and Black Dragon societies and Chinese President Hu Jintao. If he can manage this, it will be a good indicator he is a genuine high level Chinese government representative as he claims... Despite the high level introduction, we have reason to suspect Mr. X may have been a representative of a Chinese faction that is working with Satanists – although we hope to be proven wrong.


It seems clear that Mr. X is not who he claims to be, and Ben's people are correct in their suspicions. That's not the part that captured my attention. This, obviously, is what did (emphasis added):

The Chinese official, who we will call Mr. X, made many startling claims, some of which we can disclose but others we have promised to keep secret in order to protect the lives of key individuals.

Mr. X claims China was contacted by Aliens who had sophisticated weapons – and were planning to rule the planet “benevolently” and in harmony with nature, after 70% of the population was killed by impending “natural disasters.”

In the process, seven Japanese Islands and most of China except Inner Mongolia would disappear, he said. The White and Black Dragon representative told Mr. X he was being fooled by Satanist lies and bluffs.

This is exactly what I told you the negative elite have been trying to do – though I do not call them Satanists as this is not technically accurate. They believe what most people think of as God is actually Lucifer, the light-bringer – and do not believe in the Devil or Satan. 


I emphatically do not support Luciferianism. Furthermore, if we inaccurately label and categorize people, this does not help anyone – particularly since everyone in this group was born into it, and would be hunted down and killed if they tried to leave. A variety of your favorite A-list actors are a part of this group. If you want blood, do you feel they should all be killed too? Think about it. There are tremendous signs of a mass exodus away from this group that will happen once they get the chance. As our new allies, these people will be extremely beneficial and influential for humanity's collective future. I will not for one minute encourage genocidal pogroms where we tar everyone with the same brush. However, the mass public probably will not share my sentiment, hence these people are desperately trying to find sanctuary. Fulford has reported extensively on their ongoing effort to find a save haven here on Earth – but no country will accept them.

In the most recent update, Mr. X is saying that some aspect of China may finally be working out an amnesty / protection deal for them. Anyway, certain power brokers, trying to maintain the agenda of the Luciferian group, obviously want to make China's sudden, bold actions... including launching a missile in LA's backyard... appear to be utterly genocidal. If they really did want to kill us all, why wait? Why tease us so much? Let's get on with it! If you want to terraform the world and get rid of 70 percent of the people, and you have all the technology to start killing them now, then why not get down to business?


By seeding this disinformation now in three different key locations, the negative elite are attempting to introduce paralyzing fear and doubt into anyone who reads about it. I am astonished at how close the timing was between when I released this article and when Ben released his – and more importantly the similarity in their content. I would definitely count this as a synchronicity that further validates I was telling you the truth when I said this was a disinformation campaign. I had already strongly rejected the concept that these ETs allied with China are trying to terraform the Earth – and said it was blatant disinformation. Mere hours later, Ben then independently revealed his group was told the same thing about China's ET allies. Ben's group also rejected the whole idea as disinformation.


Here's the post I just wrote to Ben's forum about all of this:

Hey Ben, Forum Members,

I am truly astonished by your latest post. I just put up my long-awaited "master list" of all the equipment failures that can be attributed to China through the use of EMP technology – apparently with the help of their ET allies.

Ben's sources have also told him China is doing this, and claimed it was done to a US aircraft carrier as well – but there is no public record of that. Nonetheless I have 20 different examples – any one of which is big news by itself. To see all this in just over two months' time is quite shocking:

However, the part I really find interesting is that I directly isolated and pinpointed a disinformation campaign to make China's actions appear to be negative. There has been disinfo on a major UFO discussion forum website – unbeknownst to the people receiving it – saying the Chinese created the BP oil spill to release an "intelligent, self-organizing" microbe into the Gulf. The purpose, we are told, was to terraform the Earth into something more habitable for these ETs allied with China.

A very similar 'spin' can be found in the tenth episode of "The Event", which came out 20 days after the missile launch. Ben's sources have said China was behind this launch and they made it obvious – such as by doing it on the three-year anniversary date of when they surprised the US with a nuclear sub. I believe this episode was rewritten at the last minute to 'spin' the China story. There is no absolute proof of this, but the cast admit they are not told anything about the story, or see any future scripts, until right before they shoot. And in this case the CG of the missile seems significantly lower in realism than could have been accomplished if they'd had more time. Anyway, the missile was launched by a negative ET faction who is now saying they want to colonize the Earth and take it over. So this TV show can be used to get people to think this is what China wants to do – as they eventually hear about everything that's going on behind the scenes.

Now we have a THIRD person attempting to pass the same disinformation along. So Ben, I would tell you not to be angry at this guy, as he's just doing his job, but I'd already written and posted my article identifying two other examples of this same disinfo before you posted yours. China is definitely not trying to make the world unlivable. Part of the ridiculousness of this story is the idea that some sort of ET technology is going to make all Asians able to survive through these climate changes but everyone else will die off.

This is how the Old World Order thinks, but not the Chinese. Granted, there is a small clique that has seized power and runs things with oppressive force, but there is a huge gap between an over-protective, hyper-sensitive government and a desire to kill everyone on Earth but your own people. This is a fascinating and encouraging development and it's definitely going into my article as an update.

My interview with Ben will be released shortly – and we may also want to do an update to cover all this new stuff. I also go into the Wikileaks situation and how it may have started as 'controlled opposition' from the insiders themselves, but has already turned into a nightmare for everyone struggling to maintain the old system.

- David

That's it for our update right now – but there may well be other updates in this story, as it is evolving so rapidly!


The Federal Reserve has just experienced another blatantly embarrassing problem that they cannot understand:

The Fed Has a $110 Billion Problem with New Benjamins

A significant production problem with new high-tech $100 bills has caused government printers to shut down production of the new notes and to quarantine more than one billion of the bills in huge vaults in Fort Worth, Texas and Washington, DC, CNBC has learned.

Initially scheduled for release in February of 2011, the new bills were announced with great fanfare by officials at the Treasury Department and the Federal Reserve in April. At the time, officials announced the new bills would incorporate sophisticated high-tech security features, including a 3-D security strip and a color-shifting image of a bell designed to foil counterfeiters. But the production process is so complex, it has instead foiled the government printers tasked with producing billions of the new notes.

An official familiar with the situation told CNBC that 1.1 billion of the new bills have been printed, but they are unusable because of a creasing problem in which paper folds over during production, revealing a blank unlinked portion of the bill face. A second person familiar with the situation said that at the height of the problem, as many as 30 percent of the bills rolling off the printing press included the flaw, leading to the production shut down.

The total face value of the unusable bills, $110 billion, represents more than ten percent of the entire supply of US currency on the planet, which a government source said is $930 billion in banknotes...

Officials don’t know exactly what caused the problem. "There is something drastically wrong here," a person familiar with the situation said. "The frustration level is off the charts." Because officials don’t know how many of the 1.1 billion bills include the flaw, they have to hold them in the massive vaults until they are able to develop a mechanized system that can sort out the usable bills from the defects.

Sorting such a huge quantity of bills by hand, the officials estimate, could take between 20 and 30 years. Using a mechanized system, they think they could sort the massive pile of bills, each of which features the familiar image of Benjamin Franklin on the face, in about one year. The defective bills—which could number into the tens of millions, potentially representing billions of dollars in face value—will have to be shredded. American taxpayers have already spent an enormous amount of money to print the bills...

The problem with the new hundred-dollar bills has remained largely hidden from public view, despite a press release issued by the Federal Reserve on October 1 that announced "a delay in the issue date" of the new bills and cited "a problem with sporadic creasing of the paper."

Realistically, there is no way to know if this is part of China's campaign, but the problem was not announced until October 1st – right at the same time that the Stuxnet virus was reaching critical mass after several months of deployment. The Stuxnet articles I referenced you to had come out within 24 hours of this initial Federal Reserve notification.

This may also be a virus of some kind – particularly since the Stuxnet virus was designed to affect the speed of a rolling part in Iran's reactor just enough to cause problems that were not immediately detectable, if you read the third link I gave you on that topic in the September section of the timeline.

I've heard from insiders that the Stuxnet virus uses exotic 'quantum' technology that allows it to be able to be updated once it's already in play. It sounded a little fishy to me but yet Dr. Robert Mueller did invent a technology that allows for quantum communication with existing computer circuitry – so it may well be possible. This dynamic updating could account for how weird and exotic this virus has been – updating itself to the needs it faces, and realistically doing things no one ever thought it should do. There has been real alarm in the insider community over this virus. I would put this one up as another possible contender for China's October Surprise.


We have recently received an unprecedented number of letters from people acting as if charging for any of our information is a direct personal assault against them – even though this is what keeps the content flowing here on this site. Our moderators only posted the letters that were relatively polite and peaceful. We do very much have our own RULES, Management and Quarantine here. Everyone wants to know more about how to Access Your Higher Self – as our first-ever streaming video conference was called, which is still available for you to watch – but they also felt I owed it to them to give it away.


Unfortunately, our streaming video service blatantly failed to deliver what they promised us. The video is only four frames per second, so all you see of me is a flip-book of still images that do not appear to match the voice. The slides are great but the video is not. It is going to be much more expensive for us to come up with a video-conferencing solution that really works once we have more than a small group of people on board. We're also going to have to pay these much higher fees every month, regardless of whether we do new online events every month or not. This is definitely not a "license to print money" by any means – however, by taking this on, we will be the only ones in the entire UFO field who can actually afford to offer a genuinely good-quality streaming-video conference in real time.

We are now taking a healthy chunk of the gains from this event and re-investing it into a professional version of the same Higher Self presentation – using the same camera crew contracted by History Channel for Ancient Aliens. Everyone who bought the original event, or who buys the playback-only version, will have unlimited access to this new, improved "Professional Version" once it comes out at no extra charge. A marvelous Christmas gift to look forward to! The (very) few critiques we've received about the original will be addressed in the new version as well.

There were unavoidable complications that prevented us from doing the shoot last Wednesday, but we fully expect to do it this coming week and get it post-produced and released by the holidays.


Regarding this concept of expecting other people to share their wealth with you and offering them nothing in return, my Higher Self has had a lot to say about issues just like this in my personal life. I hardly ever engage these sorts of demeaning attacks, but when I see an opportunity to inform and offer perspective, occasionally I will say something – so before we end this article, I want to do just that.


So many people get into this 'fringe' material, like UFOs and metaphysics, by reading paranoid stuff on the Internet first. You start to believe what you are reading – after overcoming initial resistance to obvious facts. You then typically plunge into a desperate vortex of negativity, lack of self-worth and hopelessness. Getting a job – ANY job – now makes you feel you are Selling Out To The Illuminati. Voluntary unemployment and financial desperation becomes Patrotic Resistance to the Bad Guys.

Guess what? That's exactly what they want. If you have no money, you pose no threat. Your whole life is a struggle to survive – and it's actually a lot more work to be unemployed than it is to have a job.


I know. I was there. I learned about all this conspiracy stuff in a remarkable college class I took in 1992, which hid behind the boring-sounding title "Contemporary Social Issues." For me there was no turning back. When I graduated in 1995 I did not want to get a job. At all. I knew who was behind the scenes and what their goals were. I did not want to feed the Beast.

My mother kicked me out of her house that same summer after graduation, and at first I utterly despised her for it. I felt she had become Pure Evil for not letting me live indefinitely with her and have her take care of almost all the bills, except for the 200 dollars a month she was asking me for. Now I understand – and am grateful for her giving me my freedom. I can barely even imagine living with my parents as an adult... because you don't feel like an adult at all. Nonetheless, at the time it was the most powerful journey into fear I had ever experienced in my life.


Sure enough, I did find a way to make it work – a cheap room in a share house, and a job delivering pizzas. I quickly tried to find something better. Jobs wouldn't work out and I'd find myself unemployed, having bills to pay, and needing money. There could be no greater humiliation than to sit there under cold, craven fluorescent lights and again wrestle with the dreaded "Prior Work History" section of a job application. All those painful memories would have to be dredged up. I always seemed to forget the names, addresses and telephone numbers of former "$#!+ jobs," and had to struggle to remember it all again.

At home, I invariably found ways to blow off making any calls until 4:30, knowing everything closes at 5. Then at 5:01, I suddenly felt a million times better until I had to wake up the next day – late – and start all over again. The problem is that this pattern is ruining your life. Things will increasingly crash in on you from all sides – and you will want to blame everyone but yourself for what you are creating. It happened to me too, in the past. Several times.


During one particularly rough period of my life after I had become self-employed, I started reading powerful material that revealed just how abusive life really is for a person born into the Illuminati. I felt like the whole world was falling in on me and I became too depressed to work. Everything I saw, everything I thought, everything I felt seemed to be crawling with darkness. During this time, I had someone reliably sending me 500 bucks a month to keep me on life support – and that situation ended up turning out very badly. The problem with living off of a parent, friend or lover is they can literally force you to do whatever they want. If you don't obey them, you can easily be threatened with homelessness, bankruptcy and starvation.


In the case I am referring to, this friend from another state finally wanted to "call in the favor" he had been building me up to after well over a year's time. This happened while I was staying as a guest at his house, trying to get work done. He told me I could visit him there if I wanted to. Things were going very badly with my girlfriend at the time, so it seemed like a good option.

I was utterly stunned when he sat me down one morning and completely eviscerated me for 20 minutes – with no prior warning. He strung together every single negative thing he had ever observed in me, at relentless speed, with a savagely sarcastic smile on his face the entire time. Up until this moment, he had always been 100-percent loving and supportive – like a truly benevolent father figure. Now he was dumping this load of shame and hate on me that was so complex, so unfair, so one-sided and negative that I knew he would accept nothing less than utter and complete submission to his will. 

Right then I realized why I'd had so many inexplicable visions of him screaming at me in my mind – even though he never raised his voice as he committed the most savage verbal assault I'd ever experienced from anyone in my life. Had I done what he demanded, I would have literally needed to drop everything that mentioned the Law of One material on this website – not to mention all the readings I'd done up until then – and devote my full efforts to promoting Christianity.


I honestly did not see this coming. I was horrified. Humiliated. Financially it traumatized me. At least he let me keep the car he had given me when I immediately packed up my stuff and fled his house after this happened. I ended up going back to work doing readings for others. This occurred within the timeframe of 1998 to 2005, while I did this as a business – but at the time, my own overwhelming emotional and personal issues had made it almost impossible to work.

Getting 'shocked' like this was a good thing, as it broke me out of my narcissistic bubble where I wanted someone else to pay for my stuff so I didn't have to deal with other people and face responsibility. However, when someone uses money to try to mess with your life like this, it's much easier to dump all this shame onto the 'Illuminati', and blame them for your predicament, than to see how you could have chosen freedom instead.

A job is an opportunity to provide a needed service that helps people and makes money at the same time. 'Society' is not evil. You are 'society' too. Everyone needs things to live, and everyone needs to make a living. That's life – not some craven Illuminati plot to enslave you in body, mind and spirit.


In my own journey, 1996 was the year I finally broke through. I got major signals that ETs wanted to contact me in 1995, and even more signals beginning in January 1996. Many dreams suggested I was going to break through – but then month after month went by and nothing happened.

What finally put me over the top was when I decided to take a "$#!+ job", rather than continue to try to bum money off of my parents, grandparents and friends to stay alive. Asking others for money is a very good way to become "damaged goods" and lose all your friends. The very day I pulled into the parking lot to do that job interview, I had a bank of four 8's on my car odometer – down to one tenth of a mile. It was incredible!

Just two days after I "sucked it up" and said yes, I had the epic call with Joe Mason that changed everything I'd ever known, felt and believed in my life. In that call, he gave me all the information I needed to do the Dream Voice practice – which is all featured in one section of Access Your Higher Self – and the very next day I woke up and started getting clear, audible messages. Later, the guidance clearly explained to me that personal responsibility is very, very important. Until I was willing to take care of myself, and not expect others to support me, I would not be allowed to access my Higher Self. It was a lesson that has always stayed with me. Yet, if you're addicted to 'fear porn,' it can be very, very difficult to see the idea of taking a job as a good thing.


I refer to the typical conspiracy media news article as 'fear porn' because it does create a sudden, massive stimulation to the nervous system – and has the same addictive and negative qualities as pornography. The more 'fear porn' people consume, the more they want. Like a sugar high, you crash after every dose – but then the answer is to go look for another dose. Many fear-porn addicts are 'drying out' by coming to this page. They are starting to see that no matter how emphatic and confident these conspiracy writers and personalities may sound, there is another side to the story. A much more positive side.

This is why I am very happy to be a keynote speaker at next February's TruthCon in Atlanta, Georgia.

This event will take place in an incredible 1100-seat venue, and features a Who's Who list of people making waves in Disclosure – Dr. Steven Greer, high-level UFO insider Bob Dean, Eric John Phelps, Stanton Friedman, Michael Tellinger and others. If you think the panel discussions at this event are going to be awesome, think again. They're going to be TOTALLY awesome. And I will be dropping knowledge bombs left and right.

I am delighted that the organizers of this event made me the Friday night keynote speaker and gave me all day Sunday to do my own post-conference event. Dr. Greer is the big headliner on Saturday, and he never ceases to amaze. I know about 15 different insiders. Greer knows nearly 600 – who are ready to come forward and testify before Congress if subpoenaed.

You can attend my Sunday by itself for less money, or pay a package price to see the whole weekend. All these details should be available on their website very soon, so hang in there. Again, thank you for your support. Let's raise a glass and toast to the Disclosure now in progress!


I forgot to mention that I'm also going to have a telephone conference with Project Camelot about Disclosure, featuring Richard C. Hoagland, on Sunday, December 19th. Hoagland is always a fascinating character and I've wished for a long time that you could listen in on one of our conversations where we share information with each other. He has some fascinating perspectives on "The Event" and is in touch with other insiders who I don't get to speak with personally. Things are really heating up around this issue and we're saving the best of our discussions for the live chat!

Bill and Kerry will both be on the line and I expect it will be a provocative discussion! We're scheduling three hours but it may go on even longer than that! You can be part of the action for significantly less than the video conference cost, at 35 dollars for the live event. I believe we're going to offer a post-conference stream for 25 as well. You can find out more information at the Project Camelot website soon, though it's not up there just yet.

I also am doing a free radio show on Myth or Logic Radio this Wednesday with Tom Murasso. Part of why I continue to work with him is he is a great host – understanding the value of letting the guest speak, coming up with thoughtful questions and feedback when appropriate, and energetically holding space for the words to come through. You can listen in for the live show or access the free MP3 archive after it's over. The time will be this Wednesday at 2PM Eastern, 11AM Pacific:

Check it out – and let us know what you think!

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Posted By: RumorMail, Date: Thursday, 2-Dec-2010 16:49:36 ~


The United States exists in two forms:

1. The original United States that was in operation until 1860; a collection of sovereign Republics in the union. Under the original Constitution the States controlled the Federal Government; the Federal Government did not control the States and had very little authority.

2. The original United States has been usurped by a separate and different UNITED STATES formed in 1871, which only controls the District of Columbia and it’s territories, and which is actually a corporation (the UNITED STATES CORPORATION) that acts as our current government. The United States Corporation operates under Corporate/Commercial/Public Law rather than Common/Private Law.

The original Constitution was never removed; it has simply been dormant since 1871. It is still intact to this day. This fact was made clear by Supreme Court Justice Marshall Harlan (Downes v. Bidwell, 182, U.S. 244 1901) by giving the following dissenting opinion: “Two national governments exist; one to be maintained under the Constitution, with all its restrictions; the other to be maintained by Congress outside and Independently of that Instrument.”

The Restore America Plan reclaimed the De Jure institutions of government of the 50 State Republics in order to restore Common Law that represents the voice of the people and ends Corporate Law that ignores the voice of the people while operating under Maritime/Admiralty/International Law. This occurred when warrants were delivered to all 50 Governors on March 30, 2010.

The rewritten Constitution of the UNITED STATES CORPORATION bypasses the original Constitution for the United States of America, which explains why our Congressmen and Senators don’t abide by it, and the President can write Executive Orders to do whatever he/she wants. They are following corporate laws that completely strip sovereigns of their God given unalienable rights. Corporate/Commercial/Public Law is not sovereign (private), as it is an agreement between two or more parties under contract. Common Law (which sovereigns operate under) is not Commercial Law; it is personal and private.

To understand this document, you need to understand some basic terms. Visit for complete understanding. The basic terms are:

De Jure – Existing by right or according to law; original, lawful. Common Law operates under De Jure terms.

De Facto - In practice but not necessarily ordained by law; in fact, in reality. Corporate Law operates under De Facto terms.

Sovereign – A real person. Sovereigns can own property while Citizens/Subjects cannot. According to the original Constitution, all government comes from the Sovereign Individual. Without the Sovereign Individual, there is no government.

U.S. Citizen/Subject – A corporate fictitious entity that merely represents the real person. It acts as a “strawman.” [To call oneself a “sovereign citizen” or “sovereign subject” is an oxymoron, since “sovereign” and “citizen/subject” are mutually exclusive of each other.] When asked if you are a “U.S. Citizen” on corporate legal documents, if you check “yes,” you agree to the terms of Corporate Law and unknowingly relinquish your sovereign status and transfer all of your rights to the UNITED STATES CORPORATION since you are now under contract.

Corporation – A non-human, fictitious entity. Corporate fictitious entities are denoted in all caps. This includes the names of Citizens/Subjects. Your fictitious “strawman” entity is addressed in all caps, i.e. JOHN SMITH, rather than John Smith.

Common Law – God’s law. Common Law and the system of De Jure Juries apply to sovereigns in disputes. In Common Law, contracts must be entered into knowingly, voluntarily, and intentionally.

Admiralty/Maritime Law/International Law – The King’s law. Deals with criminal acts that only apply to international contracts. Under this law, the people are no longer sovereign. The Uniform Commercial Code (UCC) that the United States practices is based on Admiralty Law. Under the UCC, contracts do not have to be entered into knowingly. Simple agreements can be binding, and as long as you exercise the benefits of that "agreement," you must meet the obligations associated with those benefits. If you accept the benefit offered by the government, then you MUST follow, to the letter,

each and every statute involved with that benefit. That “benefit” is the Federal Reserve Notes (U.S. dollars). By paying for things with U.S. dollars you are unknowingly giving up all of your Constitutional rights and are legally obligated to follow all of the UCC statues. But you were NEVER told this.

Lawful – A term used in Common Law.

Legal – A term used in the UCC which applies to Corporate Law.


(note by Panama Legal: These are the basic premises adhered to by the people in the movement and the people in the Sovereign movement. The Government is a Corporation actually functioning as the Federal Government. Thus it does not have to follow the constitution. Also it does not matter if Obama is not a natural born citizen since it is a corporation he is the head of. The corporation gets the permission of the people to reign over them by deceit. This is done by wording in the Birth Certificates, Social Security Cards, driving Licenses, IRS forms, Marriage Licenses and other documents. They always refer to the “person” in all capital letters. This means the name represents a corporate entity. This is how the corporation courts get jurisdiction over you. Their courts do not fly the “reaL” American flag. They use the military or admiralty flag. For a discourse on this try this website:

What the theory is goes like this. When you enter a US Courtroom there is a military or admiralty flag flying. The US Military does not have the protection of the constitution, neither does this apply to admiralty laws with ships at sea. When you enter a court room and cross through that little wooden gate they have and go to the area where the plaintiff (prosecutor) and defendant sit along with judge, court reporter, you are entering a “ship” or a foreign country as evidenced by the admiralty or military flag flying thus the constitution has no applicability and you are under equity law not common law. The flaw with their scheme is that there is no full disclosure to the people about any of this. This is brief over simplified synopsis of the scam run by the federal corporation. End of our comment.)

In 1788 (January 1), The United States was officially bankrupt.

In 1790 (August 4), Article One of the U.S. Statutes at Large, pages 138-178, abolished the States of the Republic and created Federal Districts. In the same year, the former States of the Republic reorganized as Corporations and their legislatures wrote new State Constitutions, absent defined boundaries, which they presented to the people of each state for a vote...the new State Constitutions fraudulently made the people “Citizens” of the new Corporate States. A Citizen is also defined as a “corporate fiction."

In 1845, Congress passed legislation that would ultimately allow Common Law to be usurped by Admiralty Law. explains this change. The yellow fringe placed at the bottom of court flags shows this is still true. Before 1845, Americans were considered sovereign individuals who governed themselves under Common Law.

In 1860 – Congress was adjourned Sine Die – Lincoln could not legally reconvene Congress.

In 1861, President Lincoln declared a National Emergency and Martial Law, which gave the President unprecedented powers and removed it from the other branches. This has NEVER been reversed.

In 1863, the Lieber Code was established taking away your property and your rights.

From 1864-1867, Several Reconstruction Acts were passed forcing the states to ratify the 14th Amendment, which made everyone slaves.

In 1865, the capital was moved to Washington, D.C., a separate country – not a part of the United States of America.

In 1871, The United States became a Corporation with a new constitution and a new corporate government, and the original constitutional government was vacated to become dormant, but it was never terminated. The new constitution had to be ratified by the people according to the original constitution, but it never was. The whole process occurred behind closed doors. The people are the source of financing for this new government.

In 1917, the Trading with the Enemy Act (TWEA) was passed. “This act was implemented to deal with the countries we were at war with during World War I. It gave the President and the Alien Property Custodian the right to seize the assets of the people included in this act and if they wanted to do business in this country they could apply for a license to do so. By 1921, the Federal Reserve Bank (the trustee for the Alien Property Custodian) held over $700,000,000 in trust.” Understand that this trust was based on our assets, not theirs.

In 1933, 48 Stat 1, of the TWEA was amended to include the United States Person because they wanted to take our gold away. Executive Order 6102 was created to make it illegal for a U.S. Citizen to own gold. In order for the Government to take our gold away and violate our Constitutional rights, we were reclassified as ENEMY COMBATANTS.”

In 1933, there was a second United States bankruptcy. In the first bankruptcy the United States collateralized all public lands. In the 1933 bankruptcy, the U.S. government collateralized the private lands of the people (a lien) – they borrowed money against our private lands. They were then mortgaged. That is why we pay property taxes.

From a speech in Congress in The Bankruptcy of the United States Congressional Record, March 17, 1993, Vol. 33, page H-1303, Speaker Representative James Trafficant Jr. (Ohio) addressing the House states:

“...It is an established fact that the United States Federal Government has been dissolved by the Emergency Banking Act, March 9, 1933, 48 Stat. 1, Public Law 89-719; declared by President Roosevelt, being bankrupt and insolvent. H.J.R. 192, 73rd Congress m session June 5, 1933 - Joint Resolution To Suspend The Gold Standard and Abrogate The Gold Clause dissolved the Sovereign Authority of the United States and the official capacities of all United States Governmental Offices, Officers, and Departments and is further evidence that the United States Federal Government exists today in name only.

The receivers of the United States Bankruptcy are the International Bankers, via the United Nations, the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund. All United States Offices, Officials, and Departments are now operating within a de facto status in name only under Emergency War Powers. With the Constitutional Republican form of Government now dissolved, the receivers of the Bankruptcy have adopted a new form of government for the United States. This new form of government is known as a Democracy, being an established Socialist/Communist order under a new governor for America. This act was instituted and established by transferring and/or placing the Office of the Secretary of Treasury to that of the Governor of the International Monetary Fund. Public Law 94-564, page 8, Section H.R. 13955 reads in part: “The U.S. Secretary of Treasury receives no compensation for representing the United States...

Prior to 1913, most Americans owned clear, allodial title to property, free and clear of any liens of mortgages until the Federal Reserve Act (1913) “Hypothecated” all property within the Federal United States to the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve, in which the Trustees (stockholders) held legal title. The U.S. Citizen (tenant, franchisee) was registered as a “beneficiary” of the trust via his/her birth certificate. In 1933, the Federal United States hypothecated all of the present and future properties, assets, and labor of their “subjects,” the 14th Amendment U.S. Citizen to the Federal Reserve System. In return, the Federal Reserve System agreed to extend the federal United States Corporation all of the credit “money substitute” it needed.

Like any debtor, the Federal United States government had to assign collateral and security to their creditors as a condition of the loan. Since the Federal United States didn’t have any assets, they assigned the private property of their “economic slaves,” the U.S. Citizens, as collateral against the federal debt. They also pledged the unincorporated federal territories, national parks, forests, birth certificates, and nonprofit organizations as collateral against the federal debt. All has already been transferred as payment to the international bankers.

Unwittingly, America has returned to its pre-American Revolution feudal roots whereby all land is held by a sovereign and the common people had no rights to hold allodial title to property. Once again, We the People are the tenants and sharecroppers renting our own property from a Sovereign in the guise of the Federal Reserve Bank. We the People have exchanged one master for another.”

In 1944, Washington D.C. was deeded to the International Monetary Fund (IMF) by the Breton Woods Agreement. The IMF is made up of wealthy people that own most of the banking industries of the world. It is an organized group of bankers that have taken control of most governments of the world so the bankers run the world. Congress, the IRS, and the President work for the IMF. The IRS is not a U.S. government agency. It is an agency of the IMF. (Diversified Metal Products v. IRS et al. CV-93-405E-EJE U.S.D.C.D.I., Public Law 94-564, Senate Report 94-1148 pg. 5967, Reorganization Plan No. 26, Public Law 102-391.)


“The Supreme Court has said the De Jure Government offices still exist but the people have failed to occupy them.

Remember Downs v. Bidwell and the dissenting opinion of Justice Marshall Harlan? He said that two national governments exist; one to be maintained under the Constitution, with all its restrictions. This is one that We the people need to force our elected public officials to occupy – De Jure rule.

We need to change that by organizing Grand Juries and putting our officials back under De jure rule and out of the Corporate (or Military) Rule that they are currently operating under.

Our elected officials will then have to operate under the limits of their Oath of office to uphold the U.S. and State Constitutions, circa 1860. When they violate the Oath it’s a capital crime.

The reason we go back to 1860 is because that is the last time we had lawful laws in this country.

Where do the people get their power to convene a Grand Jury? The Magna Carta, 1215.

Our Founding Fathers looked back to history for precedent when they decided they wanted to change their government. What they found was the Magna Carta Liberatum, the Great Charter of Freedoms. It set a precedent that changed the face of England forever, by establishing that the King was not above the law.

King John of England signed the Magna Carta after immense pressure from the Church and his barons (the people). The King often lived above the law, violating both Feudal and Common Law, and was heavily criticized for his foreign policy and actions in England. The Barons, with the support of the Church, pressured King John to spell out a list of their rights and guarantee that those rights would be enforced. The Barons provided a draft, and after some negotiation, King John put his seal to the Magna Carta in Runnymede, in June of 1215.

Section 61 set rules for establishing the Grand Jury. It states: Since we have granted all these things for God, for the better ordering of our kingdom, and to allay the discord that has arisen between us and our barons (people), and since we desire that they shall be enjoyed in their entirety, with lasting strength, forever, we give and grant to the barons the following security: The barons shall elect twenty-five of their number to keep, and cause to be observed with all their might, the peace and liberties granted and confirmed to them by this charter. If we, our chief justice, our officials, or any of our servants offend in any respect against any man, or transgress any of the articles of the peace or of this security, and the offense is made known to four of the said twenty-five barons, they shall come to us.”


By Xavier Hermes, Sunday, 28-Nov-2010

The changes to the Earth-reality are moving even more rapidly than might have been anticipated, due primarily to the rapid elevation of human frequencies. This has lead to an awakening on a scale not experienced elsewhere, as humanity begins to see the truth of the false reality around it. The False Reality is being unpacked, layer by layer, as ever more nefarious activities of the old powers are being exposed, like peeling an onion. No doubt accompanied by many of their tears!

It is significant that these old powers are, themselves, contributing to this awakening in no small way. The level of arrogance that they have exhibited has lost all pretence of cover-up, blatant acts of manipulation being ever more obvious to increasingly large sections of the populace. The surge of outrage that follows personal realisation of ‘what’s going on’ in our highly controlled world quickly engages friends and family, thus causing more questions, so the awakening of further individuals is part of a natural networking, and is assured.

With this in mind, certain off-world supporters have acted to wrong-foot the old controlling cabal as often, and as publicly, as possible, while staying within the terms of their non-interference agreements. And even this non-interference can no longer be relied upon by the old powers. It appears that certain long-established protocols that prevented outside assistance have now been rescinded in favour of supporting the light by a far wider range of means, in these final days of duality. This has been done to give the very best chance for humanity to move out of the by now very damaged and dysfunctional old reality, to the new one based on quite different principles.

And so, the awakening continues. As it does so the assumption of power by the old guard is being challenged, their boundaries being steadily and firmly pushed back. The manipulation of people who are asleep, and the accompanying techniques being used, simply do not work with those who are awakening - and this fundamental truth is being learned the hard way!

Their arrogance will also continue to wrong-foot the old controllers. In essence, they are working to a program, and that program does not admit to either subtlety or flexibility. Yes, they have a great capacity for deviousness, but this is not the same thing. Consider the Biblical saying ‘and the meek shall inherit the Earth’ – for this is indeed happening. All too often ‘meek’ is interpreted as ‘weak’, but this is not so, It refers to those who routinely adopt a quiet demeanour enabling them to listen and observe the changing world around them, constantly adjusting their position as things evolve so rapidly. Contrast this with those who expect to force the planet and its people back onto their desired path at all costs, and despite massive and escalating change constantly undermining their ability to do this.

Only the truly arrogant would continue without adjusting to the changing conditions. And by their failure to adapt, these truly arrogant are becoming ever more exposed to the public gaze, and their accompanying (and fast rising) discernment.

But to go back to that rising frequency: ‘the norm’ for many, many generations has been that the average frequency advance in each life has been minimal – two or three percent at best. Yet rising frequency has always been at the heart of all self-improvement endeavours (though mostly not recognised as such). Now, all frequency movement has radically changed, and the changes are being calibrating are truly spectacular! Over the last two years, the average frequency, taken across all of humanity, calibrates as having gone up by an almost unbelievable 450%!

Yes, cheer by all means, for this is amazingly good news, and, I think, now completely unstoppable as the frequency change is also accelerating daily.

Just a word of caution - for the journey is not over yet. On Dr David Hawkins’ relative scale of consciousness, our frequency started out, our ‘launch point’ if you will, at 200. We now calibrate around 910. However, the fifth dimension appears to commence at 4300 and exists across a frequency band that goes up to the low 30,000’s. And the central frequency of the New Reality we are headed for calibrates around 24,000. Take this, then, to be our eventual frequency destination. We are thus around one twenty sixth of the way

A little way to go yet, then, for most of us: but the path is not linear. With a smartly accelerating upward trend, this journey should be completed for many by…well, how about the end of 2012?

So, keep pushing back the psychopathic elite, keep objecting to their games, keep supporting the petitions, keep exposing the old guard’s falsities and manipulations - and, wherevr possible, hold their feet to the fire. Stride by stride we are getting there folks! The news is good, the evidence is beginning to be there, the timescale is diminishing, and our frequencies are progressively going out of reach of the elite control system.

Keep up the pressures, and enrole as many others in the work as you can. There IS a positive ending in sight as long as we all keep moving forward and negating the old duality, and its high-powered, arrogantly stupid minions.

Go well!

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


NOTE: See Video of another interview with Julian Assange at TED Conferences at the bottom of this article.

Nov. 29 2010 - 5:04 pm | 31,582 views | 4 recommendations | 0 comments

In a rare interview, Assange tells Forbes that the release of Pentagon and State Department documents are just the beginning. His next target: big business.

Early next year, Julian Assange says, a major American bank will suddenly find itself turned inside out. Tens of thousands of its internal documents will be exposed on with no polite requests for executives’ response or other forewarnings. The data dump will lay bare the finance firm’s secrets on the Web for every customer, every competitor, every regulator to examine and pass judgment on.

(For the full transcript of Forbes’ interview with Assange click here.)

When? Which bank? What documents? Cagey as always, Assange won’t say, so his claim is impossible to verify. But he has always followed through on his threats. Sitting for a rare interview in a London garden flat on a rainy November day, he compares what he is ready to unleash to the damning e-mails that poured out of the Enron trial: a comprehensive vivisection of corporate bad behavior. “You could call it the ecosystem of corruption,” he says, refusing to characterize the coming release in more detail. “But it’s also all the regular decision making that turns a blind eye to and supports unethical practices: the oversight that’s not done, the priorities of executives, how they think they’re fulfilling their own self-interest.”

This is Assange: a moral ideologue, a champion of openness, a control freak. He pauses to think—a process that occasionally puts our conversation on hold for awkwardly long interludes. The slim 39-year-old Wiki­Leaks founder wears a navy suit over his 6-foot-2 frame, and his once shaggy white hair, recently dyed brown, has been cropped to a sandy patchwork of blonde and tan. He says he colors it when he’s “being tracked.”

“These big-package releases. There should be a cute name for them,” he says, then pauses again.

“Megaleaks?” I suggest, trying to move things along.

“Yes, that’s good—megaleaks.” His voice is a hoarse, Aussie-tinged baritone. As a teenage hacker in Melbourne its pitch helped him impersonate IT staff to trick companies’ employees into revealing their passwords over the phone, and today it’s deeper still after a recent bout of flu. “These megaleaks . . . they’re an important phenomenon. And they’re only going to increase.”

He’ll see to that. By the time you’re reading this another giant dump of classified U.S. documents may well be public. Assange refused to discuss the leak at the time FORBES went to press, but he claims it is part of a series that will have the greatest impact of any WikiLeaks release yet. Assange calls the shots: choosing the media outlets that splash his exposés, holding them to a strict embargo, running the leaks simultaneously on his site. Past megaleaks from his information insurgency over the last year have included 76,000 secret Afghan war documents and another trove of 392,000 files from the Iraq war. Those data explosions, the largest classified military security breaches in history, have roused antiwar activists and enraged the Pentagon.

Admire Assange or revile him, he is the prophet of a coming age of involuntary transparency. Having exposed military misconduct on a grand scale, he is now gunning for corporate America. Does Assange have unpublished, damaging documents on pharmaceutical companies? Yes, he says. Finance? Yes, many more than the single bank scandal we’ve been discussing. Energy? Plenty, on everything from BP to an Albanian oil firm that he says attempted to sabotage its competitors’ wells. Like informational IEDs, these damaging revelations can be detonated at will.

Long gone are the days when Daniel Ellsberg had to photocopy thousands of Vietnam War documents to leak the Pentagon Papers. Modern whistleblowers, or employees with a grudge, can zip up their troves of incriminating documents on a laptop, USB stick or portable hard drive, spirit them out through personal e-mail accounts or online drop sites—or simply submit them directly to WikiLeaks.

What do large companies think of the threat? If they’re terrified, they’re not saying. None would talk to us. Nor would the U.S. Chamber of Commerce. WikiLeaks “is high profile, legally ­insulated and transnational,” says former Commerce Department official James Lewis, who follows cybersecurity for the Center for Strategic & International Studies. “That adds up to a reputational risk that companies didn’t have to think about a year ago.”

Already U.S. laws wrapped into financial reform this year expand whistleblower incentives to offer six- and seven-digit rewards to staffers in any industry who report malfeasance. Wiki­Leaks adds another, new form of corporate data breach: It offers the conscience-stricken and vindictive alike a chance to publish documents largely unfiltered, without censors or personal repercussions, thanks to privacy and encryption technologies that make anonymity easier than ever before. Wiki­Leaks’ technical and ideological example has inspired copycats from Africa to China and rallied transparency advocates to push for a new, legal promised land in the unlikely haven of Iceland. It’s also fueling a race in the cyber­security industry and in Washington to find technology that can plug information leaks once for all.

Today Assange looks tired, his eyes narrowed and the skin beneath them puffy, as if he’s unused to even England’s gloomy daylight. He has no permanent home. “We’re like a traveling production company; everyone moves somewhere, and we put on a production,” he sighs. “We haven’t had any rest since April.” In Sweden, where many of the group’s servers are based, a warrant has now been issued for his arrest on rape charges. He’s denied the accusations, arguing they amount to smear tactics. He’s also afraid to set foot in several other countries, including the U.S., fearing that officials will find reasons to detain him. No question that Wiki­Leaks would be in trouble if he were jailed: A spokeswoman says it has a “contingency plan,” but without Assange there is no public face. Meanwhile, his resources have been drained by defections from his organization; some old friends and associates have taken issue with his autocratic style.

None of which has stopped him from picking new fights. The promised release of bank documents would be the largest assault by WikiLeaks on the corporate sector, and Assange says the business community should expect plenty of sequels. In early October the site shut down its document-submission system; Assange says it was receiving more information than it could find resources to publish, thousands of additions a day at some points. The total is more gigabytes of data than he can count. “Our pipeline of leaks has been increasing exponentially as our profile rises,” he says, drawing a curve upward in the air with one hand.

If even a fraction of his claims are borne out, he’s already sitting on a crypt of data any three-letter spy agency would kill for. The world’s most vocal transparency advocate is now one of the world’s biggest keepers of secrets. And about half of those revelations, says Assange, relate to the private sector.

Over the last four years he has been so busy embarrassing various governments, from Washington to the corrupt Kenyan regime of Daniel arap Moi, that many forget the corporate scandals already on WikiLeaks’ trophy wall. In January 2008 the site posted documents alleging that the Swiss bank Julius Baer hid clients’ profits from even the Swiss government, concealing them in what seemed to be shell companies in the Cayman Islands. The bank filed a lawsuit against WikiLeaks for publishing data stolen from its clients. Baer later dropped the suit—but managed to stir up embarrassing publicity for itself. The next year WikiLeaks published documents from a pharma trade group implying that its lobbyists were receiving confidential documents from and exerting influence over a World Health Organization project to fund drug research in the developing world. The resulting attention helped crater the WHO project.

In September 2009 commodities giant Trafigura filed an injunction that prevented British media from mentioning a damaging internal report. The memo showed the company had dumped tons of toxic waste in the Ivory Coast, chemicals that allegedly sickened 100,000 locals. But it couldn’t stop WikiLeaks from publishing the information. Trafigura eventually paid more than $200 million in settlements.

How can an American corporation respond to a Wiki attack? Lawsuits won’t work: WikiLeaks is legally shielded in the U.S. by its role as a mere conduit for documents. Even if a company somehow won a judgment against WikiLeaks, that wouldn’t shut it down. Assange spreads the site’s assets over many countries. “There’s no single target to drop a bomb on,” says Eric Goldman, a law professor at Santa Clara University.

The best protection? With a dash of irony Icelandic Wiki­Leaks staffer Kristinn Hrafnsson suggests that companies change their ways to avoid targeting. “They should resist the temptation to enter into corruption,” he says. Don Tapscott, coauthor of The Naked Corporation (Free Press, 2003), agrees. His simplistic conclusion: “Open your own kimono. You’re going to be naked. So you have to dig deep, look at your whole operation, make sure that integrity is part of your bones.”

Most corporations, instead, are turning to cybersecurity to shield their private parts. Despite dozens of calls to companies in tech, energy and finance, none wanted to talk about antileaking strategies. But a Forrester Research study found that about a quarter of companies in the U.S., the U.K., France, Germany and Canada were implementing leak-­focused security software in 2010, and another third are considering that option. A study last year by the Ponemon Institute, a privacy-research consultancy in Traverse City, Mich., found that 60% of employees admit to taking sensitive data before they leave a company.


SOME OF THE MORE INTRIGUING ANTILEAK work is being done by Uncle Sam. In an unmarked government building on the edge of a residential Arlington, Va. neighborhood, a cybersecurity researcher named Peiter Zatko shows just how easily leaks can occur. He lays out a blow-by-blow history of one insider data theft: The suspect searched broadly over the network to find anything related to critical infrastructure, then returned to manually probe a few interesting files. “Then he walked away with enough information to shut down big chunks of the telephone systems in the United States,” Zatko says matter-of-factly.

Who was that shadowy data smuggler? “That was me,” says the 39-year-old researcher, giggling bashfully.

Credit: Stephen Voss For Forbes

Darpa’s Peiter Zatko, a.k.a. “Mudge,” thinks software can stop leaks for good. Photo: Stephen Voss For Forbes.

Zatko is not your typical Department of Defense employee. Even in his new Beltway digs, he prefers to be called “Mudge,” the hacker handle he used during decades of exploring the dark corners of the Internet. Frank Heidt, a former security staffer at MCI and several military contractors, says that when he first read Zatko’s exploit research in mid-1990s hacker zines, he thought that Mudge must be the pseudonym of a group. “He was so prolific that I thought he couldn’t be one person,” Heidt says. In 1998, as part of the L0pht hacker think tank, Zatko testified in a congressional hearing that he and his friends could shut down the Internet in 30 minutes.

Since March Zatko has also been a lead cybersecurity researcher at the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency, the mad-scientist wing of the Pentagon devoted to projects that occasionally result in breakthroughs like the Internet and GPS. Zatko’s new pet project may be equally ambitious: He aims to rid the world of digital leaks.

The telephone system theft case that Zatko dissected in a Darpa conference room was a test, demonstrating that anyone with access to a network could steal data without detection, despite the system’s expensive security software. Now his challenge is to fix the problem. Since August he has led a project known as the Cyber Insider Threat, or Cinder. Like most Darpa initiatives it’s an X-Prize-style open invitation for ideas; recipients typically get tens of millions of dollars in government funding. Thirty-five entrants, mostly tiny companies, have already publicly signed up, many more in secret. “We’re looking to everyone from academia to startups to large government contractors,” says Zatko. “We’re not looking for evolutionary improvement. We want to pull the rug out from the problem altogether.”

It’s a well-worn carpet. Since late 2007 every major security software vendor, from McAfee to Symantec to Trend Micro, has spent hundreds of millions of dollars to acquire companies in the so-called Data-Leak Prevention (DLP) industry—software designed to locate and tag sensitive information, and then guard against its escape at the edges of a firm’s network.

The problem: DLP doesn’t work. Data is simply created too quickly, and moved around too often, for a mere filter to catch it, says Richard Stiennon, an analyst for security consultancy IT-Harvest, in Birmingham, Mich. “For DLP to function, all the stars have to align,” he says. “This is a huge problem that can’t be stopped with a single layer of infrastructure.”

More fashionable now is network forensics: the process of constantly collecting every fingerprint on a company’s servers to trace an intruder or leaker after the fact—and, perhaps, deter the next one. That’s a bit like fighting the next war according to the last one. Still, revenue at NetWitness, a prominent Herndon, Va. startup in that budding field, has leaped from $250,000 to $40 million since 2006. While the software generally gathers data and makes it easily available to queries, it doesn’t pinpoint culprits. “There’s nothing in current technology that can do this in an automated fashion,” says Shawn Carpenter, principal forensics analyst at Net­Witness. “You need a Columbo.”

Or, better yet, a robo-Columbo. Darpa’s Zatko has been working on a system of automatically identifying what he calls “malicious missions”: insider activity aimed at stealing data from inside a company’s firewall, whether it’s a Dell PC remotely hijacked by a Chinese cyberspy or Bradley Mannings, the U.S. soldier accused of leaking classified documents about combat in Afghanistan to WikiLeaks. Zatko’s system would monitor networks in real-time for just the sort of data-stealing behavior he would perform himself: steps like scouring large areas of the network for a certain file, dumping piles of data to external storage hardware or sending encrypted files out over the Internet. No single episode would signal a leak; instead, the software would link acts in a probabilistic chain, triggering an alert only if a string of events points to purposeful data theft.

Some of that leaky behavior isn’t what a casual observer might expect. Consider the cyber footprints left by Robert Hanssen, a former FBI agent serving a life sentence in a Colorado supermax prison for selling intelligence to the Soviets over two decades. Every few days Hanssen would stop his normal activities and make a single query to a server across the network, a pattern he repeated for years. That server, Zatko says, held the counterintelligence database. Hanssen was searching for himself, a routine check to see if he’d finally been found out.

“You put all these things together into the different components of the mission,” says Zatko. “I’m looking for these new rhythms, new tells, new interrelations and requirements.”

Cinder wasn’t created to combat WikiLeaks—in fact, it predates WikiLeaks’ biggest military scandals. But Zatko has nonetheless found himself squarely in opposition to Assange’s mission—a strange face-off, given that the two men once traveled in the same hacker circles, during the years when Assange went by the hacker handle Mendax (a Latin reference to the “splendidly deceptive” in the poet Horace’s Odes) and reveled in accessing corporate and government systems without authorization. Neither will reveal much about their past encounters, but Assange says that they “were in the same milieu.” Asked about Assange, Zatko says only, “I have very pleasant memories of those old days.”

WikiLeaks’ founder, in fact, seems to have trouble accepting that Mudge is working for the other side. “He’s a clever guy, and he’s also highly ethical,” says Assange. “I suspect he would have concerns about creating a system to conceal genuine abuses.” He dismisses Cinder as just another system of digital censorship. And those systems, he says, will always fail, just as China’s Great Firewall can’t stop well-informed and determined dissident Internet users. “Censorship might work for the average person but not for highly motivated people,” Assange says. “And our people are highly motivated.”


SHUTTING DOWN WIKILEAKS WOULDN’T STOP the growing movement of transparency agitators. They now have a nation-size ally: Iceland. Since WikiLeaks scored a major scoop unearthing the corrupt loans that helped destroy that country’s largest bank, the volcanic island is fast on its way to becoming the conduit for a global flood of leaks.

It began when Kaupthing Bank collapsed in October 2008—a calamitous chain reaction that has strapped Iceland with $128 billion in debts, around $400,000 per capita. Ten months later Bogi Agustsson, a Walter Cronkite-ish anchor for Icelandic national broadcaster RUV, appeared on the evening news and explained that a legal injunction had prevented the station from airing a prepared exposé on Kaupthing. Viewers who wanted to see the material, he suggested, should visit a site called

Those who took Agustsson’s advice found a summary of Kaupthing’s loan book posted on the site, detailing more than $6 billion funneled from Kaupthing’s coffers to its own proprietors and companies they owned, often with little or no collateral; $900 million went to Olafur Olafsson, a major investor in Kaupthing who, on his birthday, flew in Elton John from England, along with a grand piano, for a one-hour concert. “The banks had been eaten from the inside out,” says Kristinn Hrafnsson, a former investigative reporter in Reykjavik who now works with WikiLeaks.

A government investigation is still going on; no criminal charges have been filed. But WikiLeaks became a household name in Iceland. In December 2009 Assange and Daniel Domscheit-Berg, a German who then worked with Wiki­Leaks, were invited to keynote a free-speech conference in Reykjavik. Their talk echoed an idea from American cyber­libertarian John Perry Barlow, calling for a “Switzerland of bits.” Iceland, with its independent spirit and recent taste of explosive whistle-blowing, they suggested, could become the digital doppelgänger of a tax haven: a safe harbor for transparency, where it’s open season on government and business secrets—and leakers are protected by law.

Birgitta Jonsdottir dreams of making Iceland the free-speech capital of the world. Photo: Bragi Þór Jósefsson For Forbes.

The idea might have gone nowhere if not for Birgitta Jonsdottir. Assange’s message captivated the 43-year-old poet and self-styled “realist-anarchist.” She wasn’t just another idealistic protester with a goth wardrobe and hipster haircut. In the chaotic political environment that followed the national financial crisis, Jonsdottir had been elected to Iceland’s parliament, the Althingi, in April 2009.

Working with the country’s transparency activists, she pulled together the Icelandic Modern Media Initiative, or Immi. The initiative would bring to Iceland all the source-protection, freedom of information and transparency laws from around the world and even set up a Nobel-style international award for work in the field of free expression. Jonsdottir pushed through a unanimous resolution to create a series of bills to implement Immi. They would also make Iceland the most friendly legal base for whistleblowers on Earth.

Velkomin, as Icelanders would say, to Leakistan.

“The more that companies resist, the more information will get out about them,” says Jonsdottir when we meet in Reykjavik’s Hressingarskalinn café, around the corner from the parliament building. “They can’t hide anymore. The war is over. They lost.” In Jonsdottir’s vision Iceland will attract both mainstream media and Wiki­Leaks-like organizations to move their data to Iceland, enjoying legal protection, just as another firm might incorporate in a tax-sheltering island in the Caribbean.

She may be getting a bit ahead of herself. Immi has yet to become law, though it has backing from powerful figures, including both Iceland’s minister of justice and the head of its progressive party. Even if it does, Immi likely wouldn’t offer much legal protection to organizations whose assets and staff aren’t physically in the country; they could still be sued anywhere else in the world, given that their digital and print publications could appear globally. Immi could also face resistance from the U.S. and the EU—particularly when it comes to military matters. As Marc Thiessen, a conservative pundit, wrote on the blog of the American Enterprise Institute in August, “Immi calls into question Iceland’s seriousness as a NATO ally, and Iceland needs to realize there will be consequences for its actions.” There could be a backlash for exposing corporate secrets, too. Alastair Mullis, a professor of law at East Anglia University in Britain, says, “It’s possible that Iceland will become the defamation capital of the world.”

Jonsdottir and fellow Immi creator Smari McCarthy are pushing ahead anyway. Immi, they say, doesn’t fashion new laws; it cherry-picks existing statutes from around the world (source shields from Sweden, libel protection from New York State, protected communications with journalists from Belgium, among them). “We’re basing our legislation on laws that have already withstood attacks,” says Jonsdottir. Defamation and other concerns like child pornography and copyright violations, she argues, would still be illegal in Iceland and wouldn’t be sheltered.

Nor is the idea to protect WikiLeaks itself, Jonsdottir points out. The site doesn’t need help: Its data and submissions process are carefully encrypted, and its infrastructure is spread over enough countries—including some servers in a bombproof, underground bunker in Sweden—that taking it offline is already nearly impossible.
Instead Immi would foster a new wave of media organizations and whistleblower outlets that don’t rely on Wiki­Leaks’ technical savvy or resources. Already a handful of smaller, leak-focused conduits—regional sites like Africa-focused SaharaReporters or—have published damning data. Immi’s McCarthy says he’s been approached by media organizations from Rwanda to Chechnya. German WikiLeaks staffer Daniel Domscheit-Berg, disgruntled with Assange’s laser focus on infrequent megaleaks, has left the organization along with several others to create his own spinoff. “In the end there must be a thousand WikiLeaks,” he told Der Spiegel in September.

Iceland certainly has the infrastructure for a lot of informational mischief. Half an hour outside Reykjavik, on a landscape that resembles Mars covered in snow, the Thor Data Center is preparing for an influx of bytes. By 2011 it hopes to have thousands of servers in its aluminum-plant-turned-server-farm, powered by ultracheap geothermal energy and cooled by free arctic air. Iceland’s biggest Web host, ironically named 1984 Web Hosting, is excited about the boost Immi could give its business. “I created this company to prevent thought control,” says Mordur Ingolfsson, its chief executive. “In my humble opinion, Immi is the most important thing to happen to this godforsaken island since the Sagas were written.” (That’s 600-plus years.)

Jonsdottir agrees: “WikiLeaks was an important icebreaker. It was the tip. Immi is the rest of the wedge, and it will open up everything.” (She is less thrilled to learn that Assange speaks of Immi as his personal creation.)I ask Assange how he expects companies to cope with a world where hundreds of WikiLeak-alikes may soon exist. His three-part prescription is earnest—if a bit patronizing: “Do things to encourage leaks from dishonest competitors. Be as open and honest as possible. Treat your employees well.”
He also wants to clear up a misunderstanding. Despite his revolutionary reputation, he’s not antibusiness. He bristles at the media’s focus on his teenage years as a computer hacker who broke into dozens of systems, from the Department of Defense to Nortel, and was eventually convicted on 25 charges of computer fraud and fined thousands of dollars.

Instead, he prefers to think of himself as an entrepreneur. He tells the story of a free-speech-focused Internet service provider he cofounded in 1993, known as Suburbia. It was, to hear him tell it, the blueprint for WikiLeaks—in one instance, when the Church of Scientology demanded to know who had posted antichurch information on one site, he refused to help. (“He has titanium balls,” says David Gerard, that site’s creator.) “I saw it early on, without realizing it: potentiating people to reveal their information, creating a conduit,” Assange says. “Without having any other robust publisher in the market, people came to us.”

Leaks merely lubricate the free market, he says, settling into the couch and clearly enjoying giving me a lecture on economics. (Later, as a 45-minute interview pushes into two hours, he ignores his handler, who keeps urging him to leave for his next appointment.) He cites the example of the Chinese Sanlu Group, whose milk powder contained toxic melamine in 2008. While poisoning its customers, Sanlu also gained an advantage over competitors and might have forced more of them to taint their products, too, or go bankrupt—if Sanlu hadn’t been exposed in the Chinese press. “In the struggle between open and honest companies and dishonest and closed companies, we’re creating a tremendous reputational tax on the unethical companies,” he says.

Of course, Assange’s tax isn’t as equitable as it sounds. He alone decides where to apply the penalty, choosing the targets and when to expose them with a touch of theatrical grandstanding—and with zero accountability. For better—and worse—WikiLeaks has become the Julian Assange Show. As a photographer begins shooting, Assange wonders aloud if the coat he’s wearing might have been produced by a labor-exploiting company. A few minutes later he jokes about his “messiah complex.”

Like any true believer, Assange sees his work in simple terms. Markets, he reminds me, can’t exist without information. Business will come to appreciate what he offers. And if that requires a few painful scandals in the process?

Assange doesn’t miss a beat. “Pain for the guilty.”

Julian Assange: Why the world needs WikiLeaks | Video on

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


LINK: China's October Surprise II: Earth's "Quarantine" Has Lifted
Written by David Wilcock, Friday, 26 November 2010 19:59

China appears to be responsible for a huge series of equipment malfunctions over the last three months, forcing the NWO to stand down. This is rapidly becoming the most incredible story in Disclosure history!



China and its allies – including Russia, Brazil and India – may well have just saved the world from the greatest crisis and loss of life in modern history – if not in all recorded history.

The scope of the disaster that was planned, and the potential loss of life, would have made any dictators' accomplishments – Pol Pot, Stalin, Hitler, et cetera – seem to pale by comparison.

As bizarre as this must sound to most people, this massive counter-insurgency against the New World Order apparently wouldn't have been possible without direct collaboration and assistance from extraterrestrial humans... who look and sound just like us.


Furthermore, these extraterrestrial humans wouldn't have been allowed  to intervene until very recently. The fact that they have been allowed to intervene at all  is a seismic shift... sending incredible shock-waves through the insider world as we speak. This analogy may seem laughable, but based on what has just happened, it is literally as if Universal Law was fundamentally altered. It's almost as if the sky just ripped open – and angels have now appeared floating in mid-air. Whether these angels are benevolent beings or literal manifestations of Kali the Destroyer depends on which side of the fence you're on in the planetary game. 


As you may already know, I have been fortunate enough to interact with multiple witnesses who have worked in various levels of the UFO cover-up – some at levels significantly above the need-to-know basis of the President of the United States.

When you speak with the top-level insiders in the black-ops community, you often hear them mention THE RULES. These projects are so compartmentalized that only the high-level people are even aware that THE RULES exist – or of how far-reaching they are. It has taken me years of interviews to explore and unravel this strange subject – particularly because of the potential for confusion.

Sometimes, when insiders talk about THE RULES, they are talking about guidelines their own group insists they follow – such as secrets they must keep, disinformation they are expected to pass along, who gets to know how much, what mistakes are bad enough to get you killed, et cetera.

However, over the course of many conversations, I increasingly realized there was another level of THE RULES – a level they have absolutely no control over. 


In this greater cosmic sense, THE RULES are a set of principles that the insider black-ops community has felt, for at least the past century, were as fixed and unchangeable as the Universe itself. They also believed THE RULES would continue, unaltered, for millions of years. Apparently they have time-viewing technology that led them to believe this was the case.

The idea that this was a manipulated timeline, and not necessarily the real future, was far too mind-blowing for them to ever consider – particularly since you have people living within these timelines, and you can go and visit them and live there yourself. Nonetheless, all ETs visiting the Earth must operate within THE RULES. It is impossible for them not to.


One day, only a few weeks ago, I finally got smart enough to bluntly ask one of my main contacts, "Who makes THE RULES?"

The reply was: "Who makes gravity? Who makes the sun rise and set? Who makes the Galaxy spin? We don't know who makes THE RULES, David, but we have no choice but to follow them. There is no workaround. There is no other way. That's why they're THE RULES."

This is a strange subject, and will undoubtedly lead to some folks laughing and thinking I'm crazy... but this is what you hear about when you talk to these insiders yourself. At the highest levels of the UFO cover-up, it is well-understood that events on Earth, and indeed throughout the inhabited galaxy, are being managed and controlled – by unseen forces. Some things are allowed to happen... and others are not.


As one key example of THE RULES, our Earth is under a 'Quarantine' that prevents most ETs from being able to enter our airspace in a way that would be visible to the naked eye – except in rare, unpredictable and brief bursts of time. This is the main reason why we don't see more visible UFOs – particularly in the case of negatively-oriented ETs. In fact, without this Quarantine, negative ETs would have invaded and taken over this planet eons ago. This Quarantine also appears to allow those planetary controllers here on Earth to do whatever they want. Or so they thought.

The Quarantine is maintained by a vast network of super-advanced, indestructible satellites surrounding the Earth – built by very high-level ETs. These satellites keep humanity locked in – and everyone else locked out. The insiders do not know who built these satellites, nor precisely why they are there. It's simply another part of THE RULES.

When you view the patches of US Space Command or Navy Space Command, they picture the Earth surrounded by two circles, similar to the typical depiction of electron orbitals around an atom. This symbolizes the Quarantine – which protects us from the bad guys.


On this official military website, you can find a patch commemorating the 25th anniversary of Air Force Space Command – from 1982 to 2007. You can see the two rings around the Earth clearly depicted, as well as a stylized image of a back-engineered ET spacecraft in flight:

From what I've heard, these triangular craft are enormous in size – taking quite some time to walk from one end to the other – and are already in operation throughout the galaxy. The shape you see in these emblems is almost exactly what they look like.

There is an official website you can visit for the Naval Space Command and the US Space Command. There is also a Wikipedia page for the US Space Command, linked from an even more detailed Unified Combatant Command page.


If you read this US Space Command page, you will find very specific information about who was in charge, when they were in charge, and what they allegedly were up to... and it includes the following emblem, featuring the rings I'm talking about:

Notice the crosses on each of the rings. We'll get back to that in a minute.

You can also read about US Space Command in this article on – in an interview with Gene McCall, chief scientist for the Air Force Space Command. Naturally, the article attempts to put a mundane spin on the story and does not include any real 'juice' of Disclosure.


You again see the rings around the Earth in the Air Force Space Command patch. This was originally featured on the official Air Force Space Command website, which has since been taken down.

However, at this website, there is a comprehensive series of mirrored links to what was originally on these official websites – along with the now-defunct links. I suggest saving your own copy in case it gets taken down.

When you go to this mirror site and sort through the images and text, this triangular metallic flying machine image appears over and over again on various badges and emblems – along with the two "quarantine rings":

Also, again notice the two crosses on either side of the delta-shaped spacecraft – crosses that directly contact the rings. These, I believe, are meant to be Knights Templar crosses.


In a Project Camelot interview, Gordon Novel revealed that these insiders like to refer to themselves as the Knights Temporal:

K: When you say “we,” who’s we?

The Knights Temporal

G: Well, I have a group of folks that I call the Knights Temporal.

The most prominent aerospace engineers and physicists in the world today are all part of a team we call the RAM group. We call ourselves the Knights Temporal.

We took a page out of the idea of the Templars, who basically blackmailed the Pope to give them the fiefdoms over Europe. They created the banking orders we have today.

Since we believe the technology is rooted in time, we call ourselves the Knights Temporal. The alien technology, the UFO, is basically a flying time machine. That’s what we believe, and it’s all we know about it.

What Novel does not say here is that these international bankers did not merely "take a page out of the idea of the Templars." These groups are the direct descendants of the Knight Templars – and have still kept all their secrets.


The same two "quarantine rings" appear in the emblem for the Naval Space Command, also mirrored at the above site:


This next patch can be found on the official Vandenburg Air Force Base website on Strategic Air Again we see a cross on one of the Earth's protective rings. The sword, as we shall see, appears to be a Knight Templar blade. With the line "Strengthen the Shield," there is a clear implication here that the two rings around the Earth could be some sort of 'shield' that we want to make sure stays strong. Further, there is the suggestion that this shield may be at least partially enforced by that same weird delta-shaped craft:


Also check out this "AFSST 76th Space Ops" patch from the same site – the official Vandenburg Air Force Base website on Strategic Air Again we see one of the "quarantine rings" as well as the same flying metallic triangle – this time with wings around it just in case you didn't get the point that it flies. Two smaller delta-shaped craft also flank the AFSST acronym at the bottom:

Here's a shot of the original Strategic Air Command page in case it disappears. Notice the Knight Templar glove holding lightning bolts in the insignia at the top left:


The "quarantine rings" and flying metallic triangles show up again in the emblem for the Joint Functional Component Command for Space, which has its own official Wikipedia page here:

As it says on the Wikipedia page, according to Lieutenant General William L. Shelton, "Our prime mission directive in JFCC SPACE is to ensure our freedom of action in space, while preventing adversary use of space against us."


These badges from Schriever Air Force Base follow the same theme – quarantine rings and peculiar aircraft operating far outside the Earth's atmosphere – including an orange object that could be a comet, but could also be a saucer-shaped craft. Notice the difference in size between the small black delta-shaped craft and the larger metallic delta-shaped craft in the first badge below. That size difference may not be an indication that one is closer than the other – it may acutally be a direct indication of how huge the larger craft is in comparison to the black one:

This next badge is particularly interesting because of the emblem that appears at the bottom:

I have been told this Pegasus "Master of Space" logo is worn by staff who have direct, high-level involvement with extraterrestrial human civilizations – typically those working for Space Command. The Pegasus legend of the 'winged horse', used by the Gods to travel in Greek mythology, may well indicate some sort of extraterrestrial craft. 

This follows the same chain of reasoning presented in Episode Two of this season's Ancient Aliens on History Channel, which I am a repeat participant in. I am also drawn to the words "History" and "Heritage" in light of what we know about the "MASTER OF SPACE" logo. This may suggest their direct knowledge that human history and heritage is far older than the Earth.


There are so many goodies on the third page of badges from the Schriever AFB site – delta craft, Templar swords, Templar gloves, quarantine rings, et cetera – that I had to just post the whole thing:

There are many, many indications of the Knight Templars here – and indeed, many insiders have said the Air Force is much more involved in the UFO cover-up than other organizations.

You probably caught the Masonic compass in the image on the bottom right. There is a Templar glove below it holding a sword of fire. I was particularly fascinated by the Templar Knight gloves that had a mysterious energetic force coming off of them on the 310th Communications Flight badge – suggesting the mastery of hidden Universal powers:


The fourth page of badges from the Schriever AFB contains additional enigmas – including a straight-ahead Templar skull and crossbones symbol:

The 50th Contracting Squadron badge at the top left may be a nod to the fact that human beings appear all over the galaxy – hence we see the image of a human body away from the Earth, and the Pegasus logo alongside it.

The 50th Space Communications Squadron badge at the top right has the Templar glove, again with the suggestion of a "Thunderbolt" coming out of it.

According to the second episode of this season's Ancient Aliens, which I did plenty of research for but didn't get in fast enough to make the cut, the many ancient 'Thunderbolt' legends appear to refer back to a working ET weapon that was used in historic times. Such a weapon then later became mythologized in such stories as Zeus' Thunderbolt, Thor's Hammer, Odin's Spear, Poseidon's Trident, Vajra's Spear, et cetera.


The nasty-looking hooded being on the 23D Space Operations HQ badge, second over from the bottom left, clearly seems to represent the "Thoughtform Entities" I have been told these guardians of Earth are actively defending us against.

Notice the being has at least two faces – one made by the two winglike eyes in the middle, and another in profile view on the left-hand side, where a pointy nose, brow and chin are all clearly visible. The rear of the head, in profile view, suggests pointy ears. I have indeed heard from an insider, recently, that at least one ET group does in fact have pointy ears – and looks very similar to certain 'gargoyle' faces we see on many Templar-designed buildings.

Whether you agree with what they're doing or not, the people I speak to are absolutely convinced that the Earth would be much worse off if they were not doing their jobs. This desire to protect humanity from outside negative forces is a strong rationale for why they continue to stay involved in these jobs, even though there are many questionable ethics involved. It is certainly interesting to see a hooded being looming over the Earth on a badge dedicated to "space operations."


The fifth and final page of badges from Schriever AFB has even more goodies. First, here's the full view:

Notice the two stylized birds flanking the star on the bottom-center image. They most definitely appear to be depictions of the Phoenix. What better symbol to choose if you're describing a journey through a stargate – where you appear to 'die' and dematerialize on one end, only to be 'reborn' from the other? As you'll see in a minute, this was the original Air Force logo!

Now let's explore some more of these images in detail.


First of all, as we see below in its larger form, we have a badge that may very well be showing us a pentagonal Stargate vortex emerging from the Northwest United States:

More than one insider has told me that the 'ancient' stargates look like tunnels lined with individual points of light, in a clear geometric relationship to each other, and which spiral in on themselves as you look more deeply into the wormhole.

The points of light may very well be in a pentagonal relationship to each other along the circumference of the circle, though no one has told me this. I also never thought to ask until now – but it may very well be.

A slight hint of this stargate pattern appears in the movie Minority Report, when you look off to the right in this particular shot:

Getting back to this 21st Space Operations badge, it even features the words 'gate' and 'star' right in the description – Gateway to the Stars.


The five-pointed star with a circle inside of it is a common feature of the basic Air Force badge, which went through two different stages of development. This is apparently another homage to the stargates or 'portals' being used at the insider levels.

I already pointed out the original Air Force logo, where the pentagon is flanked with stylized Phoenix birds on either side. This logo then went through an evolution into its current form, as these images depict:


Check this one out from the Air Force Communicators and Air Traffic Controllers Association. In the center you have the pentagonal Air Force / stargate logo – flanked with the Phoenix birds of fire. Then you've got a jet on the right and "something else" on the left – our delta-shaped craft once again – protecting a triangular-shaped Earth in the same 'quarantine loops' I've been showing you:

The triangle shape appears to indicate the tetrahedral energy signatures that run through the Earth and other planets, as Richard C. Hoagland has been asserting since at least 1993. The tetrahedral energy appears at the 19.5-degree latitude, north or south, on any given planet. On solid planets it emerges as volcanoes, such as Hawaii on Earth and the enormous Olympus Mons on Mars. On gas planets we have the Great Red Spot of Jupiter, the Great Dark Spot of Neptune, cloud bands on Saturn, et cetera – all at the magic 19.5-degree latitude.


One of the most compelling pieces from Schriever AFB is this next badge below. Here, we see a simplified but undeniable diagram of the Global Grid I have written about for so many years. The real Grid is not made of a square pattern like this, but is otherwise extremely similar – including the spherical 'nodes' where the lines cross. We also see a Knight Templar in full royal regalia:

Even the clovers carved into the knight's mask are obvious, stylized versions of the Templar cross:


The official NORAD logo (NORth American Aerospace Defense command) also contains the 'quarantine loops' around the Earth. This time the loops appear stylized as wings – and we also see the Templar sword with stylized 'thunderbolts' coming off of it:


More goodies can be found on the official page for the 310th Space Wing:

This next badge from the above website caught my eye in particular. It is a seemingly earlier version of the same 310th Communications Flight badge I showed you before. Again we see the delta-shaped craft and the Earth with quarantine rings in the middle. We also prominently see the knights' gloves with thunderbolts coming off of the fingers. Again, this badge suggests the Templar Knights may have possessed mystical capabilities to manipulate energy – either by thought alone, or with some form of 'thunderbolt' technology, as we see in many ancient myths:


Of course, none of this is absolutely conclusive proof that there is any off-planet work going on within Space Command, nor that they have access to stargate 'portal' technology or interstellar delta-shaped craft. However, I have spoken to several different insiders who have given me various pieces of this puzzle – and they all fit together very well. When independent witnesses keep telling you the same things, you start paying attention.

It is highly, highly interesting that we see so much redundancy in the symbolism of these various military badges – over and over again. I've only given you a brief sample of what you can uncover with your own research.


Everyone 'in the know' is well aware of THE RULES, and the Quarantine that exists around the Earth. Apparently you can't just fly a ship out of Earth's atmosphere without opening a hole in the Quarantine first. This had to be done for all the Apollo missions, I am told, as otherwise they would have never made it out of here alive.

The ETs that have been working with the US and other governments for the past century apparently possess technology that allows for short-term openings to be made in the Quarantine. Space Command is very glad we have the Quarantine, as it protects us from outside invading forces. When random holes occur, Space Command uses their own ships to further defend the Earth – as their badges indicate.

Another very interesting point I've been told is that Space Command and its affiliates have reason to believe the Quarantine will drop some time after 2012. This is a significant part of the transformation we are now going through. At this point, the Earth will enter into open contact with its ET neighbors. There is also the implication or suggestion that the dropping of this Quarantine will also enhance the mystical and psychic abilities of the average person as well.


The 'Quarantine' is one of a variety of very specific data points that were revealed in the Law of One series, most of which came through in 1981 to Don Elkins, Carla Rueckert and Jim McCarty of L/L Research. The best way to introduce yourself to this staggeringly complex body of information – all of which is now free to read online – is to consult the Study Guide I have posted at this site. I highly recommend you explore this research, and feel it is one of the best possible uses of your time.

I have pointed out to several insiders now that everything they're telling me – all the most significant data points – can be found in this one series from 1981. I consistently urge that they read it, as they would be shocked to discover how well the material lines up with what they already know. However, everyone is 'too busy' – and the big discovery still remains waiting in the wings.


If you feel you have the time, here's a full list of all the places where the 'quarantine' is discussed in the Law of One series – and it is a fascinating read:

These two sets of quotes from Sessions Six and Twelve really stand out for me:

6.25 Questioner: Do any of the [positive Confederation ETs] come here at this time in spacecraft? In the past, say, thirty years?

Ra: I am Ra. We must state that this information is unimportant. If you will understand this, we feel that the information may be acceptably offered. The Law of One is what we are here to express. However, we will speak upon this subject.

Each planetary entity which wishes to appear within your third-dimensional space/time distortion requests permission to break quarantine, as you may call it, and appear to your peoples.

The reason and purpose for this appearance is understood, and either accepted or rejected. There have been as many as fifteen of the Confederation entities in your skies at any one time; the others available to you through thought.

At present [1981] there are seven which are operating with craft in your density.

Their purposes are very simple: to allow those entities of your planet to become aware of infinity, which is often best expressed to the uninformed as the mysterious or unknown.

12.3 Questioner: Is there any effort on the part of the Confederation to stop the Orion chariots [piloted by negative, "service to self" ETs] from arriving here?

Ra: I am Ra. Every effort is made to quarantine this planet.

However, the network of guardians, much like any other pattern of patrols on whatever level, does not hinder each and every entity from penetrating quarantine – for if a request is made in light/love, the Law of One will be met with acquiescence.

If the request is not made, due to the slipping through the net, then there is penetration of this net.

12.5 Questioner: I don’t understand how the Confederation stops the Orion chariots from coming through the quarantine?

Ra: I am Ra. There is contact at the level of light-form or lightbody-being, depending upon the vibratory level of the guardian.

These guardians sweep reaches of your Earth’s energy fields to be aware of any entities approaching. [DW: The satellites I have heard about from the insiders appear to be the automated detection system that alerts these 'Guardians'.]

An entity which is approaching is hailed in the name of the One Creator.

Any entity thus hailed is bathed in love/light, and will of free will obey the quarantine due to the power of the Law of One.

12.6 Questioner: What would happen to the entity if he did not obey the quarantine after being hailed?

Ra: I am Ra. To not obey quarantine after being hailed on the level of which we speak would be equivalent to your not stopping upon walking into a solid brick wall.

12.7 Questioner: What would happen to the entity if he did this? What would happen to his chariot?

Ra: I am Ra. The Creator is one being. The vibratory level of those able to breach the quarantine boundaries is such that upon seeing the love/light net it is impossible to break this Law.

Therefore, nothing happens. No attempt is made. There is no confrontation.

The only beings who are able to penetrate the quarantine are those who discover windows or distortions in the space/time continua surrounding your planet’s energy fields.

Through these windows they come. These windows are rare and unpredictable.

This is only one of many hundreds of examples where I have found a perfect correspondence between what the top-level insiders tell me and what we find written in the Law of One series.


I have worked for years to flesh out the Law of One's cosmology into a scientific thesis – with stunning results, as you can find in my videos, conferences, radio shows, articles and books.

A window of 2011 to 2013 was given in the Law of One series as a time where a 'quantum leap' would occur in Earth's history, propelling us into an amazingly beautiful new Golden Age.

Once this shift fully takes place – which may involve 100 to 700 years for the full transition to complete – the average human being will have all the abilities attributed to Jesus and other 'Ascended Masters' – and more.

Even though it may take some time for this transformation to occur, there is no question that the initial 'quantum leap' in 2011-2013 is something absolutely remarkable, breathtaking and unprecedented in Earth's history.


This 'quantum leap' is the result of our Solar System traversing into a more highly-charged region of the galaxy – wherein the actual physics of matter, energy and consciousness irreversibly shift. This galactic transformation propels the Earth into an energetic state called 'Fourth Density' – as opposed to our current 'third.'

These same energy states appear in the human body as the seven chakras. They also constitute what most people mistakenly call "dimensional levels", which apparently exist as planes of existence throughout the entire Universe. The shift into fourth-density is essentially a graduation from the yellow, self-oriented center to the green, heart-oriented perspective.

No mention of the Mayan Calendar ever occurred in The Law of One, as Dr. Don Elkins knew nothing about it – nor the importance of the 2012 date in many ancient prophecies. It is highly ironic that the most accurate and comprehensive body of 2012 prophecy information makes no mention of the Mayan Calendar whatsoever... nor any of the other common talking points related to 2012.


Obviously, until this shift actually happens, we cannot be certain of what will occur – nor of exactly how it will occur. Nonetheless, there are hundreds of specific, highly technical scientific data points in the Law of One series that have since been proven correct.  This makes it highly unlikely that the whole model will fall apart when it comes to the Fourth-Density Shift.

I have yet to find a single contradiction or error in the Law of One cosmology. In fact, the more I follow up on the leads we were given, the more advanced and beautifully perfect the model becomes.

I struggled for many years with the frequently-mentioned concept of a parallel universe where time is three-dimensional – but finally this year I solved this greatest of all mysteries, and truly understood how and why it was the key to everything.

My upcoming book The Source Field Investigations – due for release next May – is significantly more evolved than any other presentation I've given on this subject.

The CONVERGENCE film script has now been brought fully up to date with these latest breakthroughs as well, and we hope to have a finished draft ready to show directors, actors and investors by early January.


The insiders I have spoken to do not realize the Law of One series was written by the group that directly enforces THE RULES. The authors of the Law of One claim to be at the "Sixth Density" level. After this point, there is only one final stage remaining before you fully reunite with the One Infinite Creator. Those at the Seventh Density level usually only work as teachers and mentors for the sixth density folks – and otherwise do not get involved in most cases.

Therefore, what the insiders call THE RULES is not some impartial, detached universal law. It is a carefully orchestrated and maintained series of principles – designed to steer human spiritual evolution, and enforced by groups such as the authors of the Law of One.

As you saw in the above quotes, these groups are called the 'Guardians,' and can exist at different levels. As we read in Session 12.5, "There is contact at the level of light-form or lightbody-being, depending upon the vibratory level of the guardian." Most likely, the 'light-form' refers to a piloted craft, whereas the "lightbody-being" is a higher-level entity that does not need such equipment to travel.


Another key 'surprise' the insiders should consider, within THE RULES, is how such a comprehensive disclosure as the Law of One would ever have been allowed to occur in the first place.

The insiders still believe many of the things they know and deal with every day are secret – but that hasn't been true since 1981. I found the Law of One series in 1996 and am still learning new things from it all the time. No other source I've ever found is this much of a "gift that keeps on giving."

Should the insiders bother to consider how the Law of One was ever permitted to occur in the first place, they may realize that they have been greatly mistaken about many things – and that all of this is by design.


Let's get back to the worldview held by the insiders, at the greatest levels of world secrecy, for a minute.

Within their own understanding of THE RULES, our ET visitors – the vast majority of whom are known to be benevolent – would never be allowed to directly intervene in Earth's history – in any way. Thus, if the New World Order / Illuminati groups wanted to destroy the planet, these ETs would simply have to stand by and watch – shedding tears in disbelief and horror as it happened. Yes, they keep all the bad guys out, thanks to the Quarantine – but what occurs under that roof is Earth humanity's own business.


Multiple sources have confirmed their belief that this non-intervention policy was an absolute Universal constant – never to be changed. These power groups could basically do whatever they want on Earth, with no restrictions whatsoever. We now know this was merely what they were expected to believe. The truth is far more shocking.

Unbeknownst to them, these great manipulators have been kept on a very tight leash this whole time. It clearly states in the Law of One series that they are only able to do what they are allowed to do. However, the level of sophistication with which they have been "kept in line" is so high that they themselves never even realized it was happening.

Until now.


My position on these matters has always remained consistent – and it's straight out of the Law of One series. Events that happen on Earth are not random – we are living in a highly structured illusion, designed to promote our spiritual evolution. The main purpose of The Illusion is to insure that you always have equal opportunity to seek the positive or the negative in any situation.

Third-density is called "The Choice" because this Illusion is highly manicured and orchestrated – so you have fair and equal opportunity to seek either path, and find the apparent truth in whatever you choose to believe.


In order for The Illusion to work properly, there have to be highly negative power groups who firmly believe they will be able to succeed in their nefarious plans. However, this is only allowed to occur for a finite time – and ultimately the Law of Karma is very much a part of THE RULES as well. No souls are exempt from this process. The Illusion is being carefully and rigorously maintained by beings much more evolved than extraterrestrials who travel in UFOs.

These beings would be called Seraphim and/or Cherubim in the Bible – the highest-level beings in the Old and New Testament – and, as we are discovering with so many other ancient legends, this too is not a myth nor a superstition. I prefer to use a more neutral term and refer to these "sixth-density" groups as Management.

The Law of One was written by a sixth-density Management group. In this series, they chose to use the same name they gave themselves when they contacted the Egyptians. At that time, they were known as Ra – in honor of the Sun, which is an intelligent super-being within the Law of One cosmology.


I have been fortunate enough to make direct contact with Management over the years, through dreams and direct verbal messages I bring in with as little distortion as possible. I have to be in an exceptionally pure state of consciousness to do this technique properly. I am now ready to teach you this technique directly – and the first online seminar I will offer is this Saturday – tomorrow! – at 5PM Eastern time. You can also catch one of our all-weekend Convergence conferences for an even more comprehensive presentation – and we now have a variety of tour dates listed on this site. 

Due to all the stresses and pressures I've taken on as a public figure, I only have brought through a few messages a year in this format – particularly since 2001. However, I was very active between 1996 and 2000, when things were much simpler in my life.

Now that I have had a massive breakthrough in my personal life, leading to much more privacy, freedom and flexibility, I hopefully will be able to bring in direct messages from Management a lot more often.

The results of this contact have already generated an enormous body of free information I have published on this website since 1999 – with a vast amount of scientific research to back up my assertions.


Most of the readings I published in 1999 – averaging at least once or twice a month – now appear to be much more relevant to our current environment than they were at the time. Many, many prophecies I was given by Management have come true.

I have boldly told you not to worry about things that were causing paralyzing fear of imminent doom throughout the Internet – such as the swine-flu vaccine, the BP oil spill, imminent martial law, FEMA camps, total economic collapse, et cetera. You are certainly free to choose fear if you want to. That's all part of The Illusion. Nontheless, if you bother to seek the positive, you will be amply and comprehensively rewarded for your efforts.

I am only interested in telling you the truth. Not lies. I cannot support a perspective of fear and doom, as it is simply not factual.


Management's primary responsibility is to steer the evolution of a 'planetary population' such as we have on Earth. When a given planet reaches the end of a 'Cycle', as we now have, Management's main responsibility is to never let the planet tip too far into chaos.

Now that the New World Order is desperately struggling to make its endgame maneuvers, and literally kill billions of people by destroying the ability to produce and distribute food, the level of intervention that Management is allowing to happen has dramatically increased.

Once you put the pieces together, this may well be the most fascinating and important story in human history – and it's happening right now, in real time. I can't prove that all these ET intrigues I've told you about are true – but there are many other data points that are quite shocking, and all play their parts in revealing the Big Picture. Once you see how all the dots connect, many seemingly mysterious things that have recently happened on Earth suddenly make a lot more sense.

In order to make the case, we have to deal in far more mundane topics than what I've been discussing thus far – but these are the specifics through which this great global game is being played. Since these specifics affect everyone's lives on Earth, they are worthy of a detailed examination. That will happen in the next section of this piece. I hope to have it posted next weekend – along with the audio of my interview with Benjamin Fulford, which is highly relevant.

Right for now, I have to prepare for tomorrow's big event – and you do not want to miss this!

Sorry if you're just now finding out about tomorrow's online event – but there is still time to sign up! I sincerely thank all of you who have already joined our team. Your support has provided us with critical funding at the time we need it most, and I feel deeply blessed.


Millions of people are discovering that they have a Higher Self – an omniscient source of intelligence guiding their lives with meticulous care and wisdom, navigating the right people and situations into view for the highest and best learning potential, and perpetually trying to communicate directly through synchronicities, visions and dreams.

Those who make an accurate, stable connection with their Higher Self truly awaken the genius within – tapping into a limitless reservoir of creativity, intelligence and flawless guidance available to each and every person.

Many artists, poets, musicians and inventors get their best work spontaneously, in sudden bursts of inspiration that arise mysteriously – often in the middle of the night. Yet, few are able to reliably access this ability – it comes and goes, seemingly without warning.

As we move into increasingly challenging times here on Earth, it has never been more essential that we form a direct, stable and accurate connection with our Higher Self.

David Wilcock has used his dreams as a daily source of guidance for 18 years, and has 14 years of experience bringing in verbal and visionary messages from his Higher Self, with stunning results – including hundreds of incredibly accurate future prophecies.

Although the basic tools can be found in the Law of One series and in certain written works on this website, David has only ever taught this process to small, select groups – in the Sunday workshops within his all-weekend CONVERGENCE conferences.

Available for purchase on this website only, you will enjoy three hours with David Wilcock, on Saturday November 27th, 2010, from 5 to 8 PM EST. We picked this time to be the most accessible to the various time zones.

It begins at 8AM in many Australian cities and 10PM London time, giving the greatest number of people the chance to tune in live without sacrificing much sleep, if any.

This is not a telephone call, but a live video conference! You will see David speak on your computer, watch him cut over to a variety of useful Power Point slides, and offer your questions and feedback in a live chat room David will monitor the entire time.

David will teach you each level of this increasingly fascinating process:

  • Understanding the hidden messages of disagreements, accidents and disasters;
  • Identifying and decoding the meaning of synchronicity;
  • Programming and ‘encoding’ synchronicity to become a daily tool;
  • Proper use of divination tools, such as cards, to gain stunningly accurate insights;
  • Dietary guidelines that optimize your body’s ability to bring in information;
  • Critical philosophical teachings that increase your connection to the Higher Self;
  • Deciphering the language of the Higher Self – symbolism and metaphor;
  • Remote viewing protocols to bypass the conscious mind and access information;
  • The most effective exercise, breathing and meditation techniques;
  • Increasing your recall and documentation of dreams each morning;
  • Cracking the code of dreams through multiple, live examples from the audience;
  • Capturing and recording visions and verbal messages from your Higher Self;
  • Developing and using your own psychic talents to help others;
  • Bypassing ego ‘contamination’ when accessing information for yourself;
  • Inducing lucid dreams and OBEs – and maintaining them once you get one;
  • Mindfulness – creating “personality transparency” with your Higher Self.

Your purchase price also grants you unlimited access to the video recording of the event, which will be posted in a secure location on this website after the live event is finished. You can review it, take notes and capture everything that was said!

This online conference begins at 5PM Eastern Standard time (that's 4PM Central, 3PM Mountain, and 2PM Pacific Standard Time).

Start time is 10PM UTC. If you would like to figure out what the start time is for you in your country and your time zone, please visit: and enter the date and time as November 27th, 2010 - 22/10PM UTC/GMT.

Please note that a high-speed Internet connection, such as DSL, satellite, cable, FiOS or 3G, is required along with an up-to-date modern browser (such as Firefox, Safari, Chrome, or Internet Explorer 8), along with the latest version of Flash, in order to see the video presentation.

(We're sorry, but Internet Explorer versions less than 8 are NOT supported). For more information, click here.

If you are unsure of how fast your internet speed is, you can check it for free here. You will need at least 1.2Mbs download speed to see and hear David's presentation.

The price for this 3 hour online workshop is only 77 US dollars – making it significantly less expensive than attending a live event, which often includes travel and lodging expenses.

Purchased tickets are non-refundable due to the lower price; however, they may be transferred to another individual if enough time is given to change the entrance information before the start time of the workshop.

The price for this event is $77

Click here to participate in this Online Convergence!


Several people wrote in and asked whether I would discuss China's moves and how it relates to everything I've just said here. The answer is "Yes, of course!" This is all a prelude to that story, so you won't be tempted to indulge in fear once I get into the specifics.

Between September 30th and November 15th, there have been an astonishing number of blatant equipment failures directly attributed to the intervention of China, according to my insiders. This intervention is being kept very secret – only the truly top-tier guys are being told about it, and everyone else is being blatantly disinformed, which is not unusual. I've heard from both camps.

This massive new campaign involves the help of ET allies who contacted the Chinese in the 1940s after being very poorly treated by the US, according to Benjamin Fulford. We do not know if these are the Roswell people but that is one possibility. 

[Incidentally, someone at my conference thought this was a bad thing, that Roswell was a crash involving "Grays." That's not true. The literature says the Roswell beings were more like the size of six-year-old children with slightly larger heads and eyes, and no hair, but not Grays.]

Ben doesn't like talking about ETs – at all – but I did get him to cover this subject to some degree in our interview.

The next section of the article will extensively prove how the New World Order is trying to destroy the world's economy right now, and show systematic evidence of how China and her allies are fighting back. No ET intervention could have ever happened before due to the quarantine and THE RULES – so this is a spectacular game-changer. That's why, as I said, it's as if Universal Law itself suddenly altered. I am very much feeling the consciousness shifts within my own life – and initial reports are telling me other people are having spontaneous breakthroughs where things are getting a lot better for them as well.

As Hoagland might say, "It's the Physics!"


The dreams I've been having are continuing to give the same message. Even though the Old World Order is literally going all out to destroy the economy and cripple the planet, they will not succeed.

Even some insiders who seem closer to agreeing with their agenda, in terms of their alignment, have admitted to me that this is a panic move, they're trying to do it too soon, and as a result it is much more likely to fail – but they literally have no choice. However, we can well expect that in the first few months of next year, possibly even sooner, it could get every bit as scary as the BP oil spill was.

That's why I'm putting so much time into doing this now. This may well be the last "big push" we have to go through in the delivery room. I do not think we should jump to condemn the Air Force. Too many people have a black-and-white approach to everything in this field. How are people supposed to change, and step up to truly protect this planet from enemies foreign AND domestic, if they all get tarred with the same brush?


Again – part of my role is to show you exactly what's going on now, so you'll understand these events once everyone else is talking about them and they have become completely convinced that the doom and gloomers must be right.

The 'fear porn' propaganda you're going to see around these imminent events is going to be much worse than the actual events themselves. It's all about the fear of what hasn't happened yet – not what's actually going on in the Now.

My dreams have showed me it's going to be intense, but once again we will miraculously skate through it. I had very similar dreams before and during the BP oil spill while everyone was convinced it was Armageddon.

The missile launch off the coast of Los Angeles was, I am told, a very large and powerful device. I was not permitted to be told the full story, but by inference I had the very strong sense that the missile was unsuccessfully targeting the ships using the EMP technology to disable NWO assets.

The amount of information I have to synthesize to tell this story properly is very complex. I also am working on mission-critical book rewrites, and have to fly out this week for a major new TV shoot with a different network... so I appreciate your patience!


Since many of you asked, my conference with William Henry went exceptionally well. On the first night, I enumerated every example of what China has been doing, with slides, and the audience was absolutely stunned.

William went significantly deep into the Seraphim legends, with lots of historic illustrations – and made a very compelling case that these people travel directly through Stargates to arrive here. Even the Christian Seraphim are often called 'serpent beings' and William said this could be a primitive interpretation of seeing the luminous Stargate behind these people when they first materialize.

William also associated the legend of the Seraphim having 'six wings' with the double-tetrahedron or 'merkaba' shape that he feels surrounds them when they materialize. The geometry does have six points and looks like a 3D Star of David. It was quite fascinating!

Our data synthesized to suggest that as we awaken to our full abilities, we will ultimately have the power to create and travel through stargates on our own – without even needing any technology to do it. This is the main thing the planetary controllers are so afraid of – but they can't stop it from happening. 

Some people are coming to every weekend and they consistently tell me how amazed they are – I give a different talk every time, with a different sequence of data and always some new information. They invariably are uplifted and inspired, and can't wait for the next one!

I've already reserved the same hotel for next year – on 11/11/11, which conveniently is a Friday! There are lots of other events you can attend in the meantime – check our site for details!


Other than some technical glitches, our conference went extremely well – and everyone was very satisfied with what they got. I do feel this is the best presentation on accessing your higher self that I've ever given, quite honestly.

I ran significantly 'overtime' compared to the promised amount, so it actually turned out to be an even better deal, hour for hour – but I did not want to end it until I knew I had covered all the bases.

Some people have asked if they could still access the conference, and the answer is yes.

Due to the value of this information, and how well the conference came across despite a few minor hiccups, we have decided to indefinitely extend its availability to you – as a playback-only event – for the same price. 

You will have permanent, unlimited access to this video on our server – so you can keep coming back and working each of the steps I give you. This really is the ultimate summary of information I have to offer on how to make Contact... and I'm thrilled with all the positive feedback you've given us!

Anyone can do it if they put the effort in... and this conference will give you all the practical tools you need to get there.

Next weekend I will tell you exactly what China has been doing and where this all appears to be going, so please be patient. It is a stunning, incredible story and I do not want to rush this because once it's out there, it's done. It has to be perfect the first time.

Another important note here is I am not saying the Quarantine has completely vanished. What I am saying is that THE RULES have changed – and ETs are now being allowed to directly intervene in human affairs. This, by design, involves a lessening of the Quarantine – but not a complete breakdown of it by any means.

Thank you for your support... there is much more to come!

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Thursday, November 18, 10:09am ET

We all know the mortgage securitization process is complicated.

But just how complicated? The chart below from Zero Hedge shows the convoluted journey a mortgage takes as it morphs into a security.

Dan Edstrom, of DTC Systems, who performs securitization audits, spent a year putting together a diagram that traces the path of his own house's mortgage. "Just When You Thought You Knew Something About Mortgage Securitizations," says Zero Hedge, you are presented with this almost hilariously complicated chart.

The controversy over allegedly shoddy paperwork has raised doubts about the legitimacy of foreclosures nationwide (a crisis illustrated here and here), eliciting lawsuits from homeowners and investors alike.

The Congressional Oversight Panel, a bailout watchdog, released a statement Tuesday that says the scandal over alleged "robo-signers," foreclosure processors who approve documents without reading them, "may have concealed much deeper problems" in the mortgage industry, HuffPost's Shahien Nasiripour reports. (See the most shocking robo-signer statements.)

Regulators will have their hands full.

Have a look at the complicated chart from Edstrom:

(See a larger version of the chart here.)

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Monday, 08 November 2010

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


WAKE UP EVERYBODY, lyrics By Teddy Pendergrass, performance by Johnny Legend

Bonus video

Wake up everybody no more sleepin in bed
No more backward thinkin time for thinkin ahead
The world has changed so very much from what it used to be so
There is so much hatred war an' poverty

Wake up all the teachers time to teach a new way
Maybe then they'll listen to whatcha have to say
Cause they're the ones who's coming up and the world is in their hands
when you teach the children teach em the very best you can.

The world won't get no better if we just let it be
The world won't get no better we gotta change it yeah, just you and me.

Wake up all the doctors make the ol' people well
They're the ones who suffer an' who catch all the hell
But they don't have so very long before the Judgement Day
So won'tcha make them happy before they pass away.

Wake up all the builders time to build a new land
I know we can do it if we all lend a hand
The only thing we have to do is put it in our mind
Surely things will work out they do it every time.

The world won't get no better if we just let it be
The world won't get no better we gotta change it yeah, just you and me.

Sunday, November 14, 2010

Greetings and Salutations;

They say the meaning of a death, resides with the living. Quite a while ago I entitled a news letter, the spilt of the worlds. That reality is coming clearer each and everyday. I've tried to use descriptive language like, 'zeus and co', or 'the folks who speak between the rows in a vineyard, and 'the parents' to help you understand, what's going on here. Well, 'mom and dad' have entered the fray of this nastiness between the children. They sent their boys into this world to start putting order into this mess. There's a lot of lips poked out right now, people getting a good caning and sent to their room, broke, for thinking of no one but themselves....forgetting how it was they got into position and started running things, in the first place.

The time is here to start speaking truth. People Can handle it if you give them a moment to digest it. 'The truth will set you free but, first it may piss you off', says the bumper sticker. Everybody on the planet will have to deal with challenges, even if they are 'only' psychological. I only wish, the powers out here would have been forthright with the public, instead of hiding things amongst themselves, hoping beyond hope, their day of reckoning would never come. As sure as, spring follows winter, the cycles always complete themselves. The whole planet and the people on it are completing a cycle, and nothing will be the same afterwards. We will be breathing a higher oxygen level and the water will be cleaned, as all these projects engage to make this planet paradise again. R&D is not necessary, it's already, ready to engage. The stuff has been sitting on shelves for years, waiting to be used.

Your enemies have been vanquished, the old system is only issuing death rattles. Many of you have been so conditioned to fear and the same old same old continuing, it will take a little bit to get used to real freedom. Your only sacrifice will be in being rid of the need to have some one create rules for you. The only law is, 'do unto others as you have them do to you', if you don't like you, ya gotta problems. What, somebody treated you with respect and dignity and you got a problem with that? Yea, it will take a moment to get used to. They know the populace has been abused psychologically and all of that is being addressed. There will be no 'mad max world'. The enforcement for that actually engaged in 1987 and that's the reason there have been no nuclear wars, and won't be. It makes for good news print but the truth is, the bad guys don't have power they like to project to everybody. They have been reduced to acting like the mad chimp in the zoo, raising a lot of racket, throwing crap everywhere but, the poor fella is still in his cage! There's a 300 mile limit around this planet so, it will be a moment before any missions to the moon or to mars, for that matter.

Tons of paperwork has been done, then folks started getting phone calls, even as they were bitchin' about it never gonna happen. People have dates to be at certain locations and they know the common people have to get those little notices first. Protocol rules, the regular people first. We kick this changeover in gear. They have asked me to tell you all, pay off your mortgages, credit cards, make yourself debt free. You gotta problem with that? Well, that's your first instructions with using your money. Your fines and penalty money will be in frns and using them will heat the old system up, giving a perfect excuse to start the announcements and tell of other 'deaths' that have taken place over the months. At the 'right' moment, your funds in the bank will automatically be changed to precious metal backing. This is global, something tells me the g20 thing was a show for the populace to walk them into this change. This jump in the frequencies of this planet...which is rattling people's teeth now. In the middle of this, you'll discover why the currency issues, aren't. In one fell swoop they have depowered the cfr, made it so the imf doesn't destroy countries anymore, and broke the power matrix of the bilderburgs.

Who am I? Look above and listen to that song, that's who I am and what I've been grinding away at all these years. I'm really no one in particular, just some one who woke up years ago saw where things were headed and the need to address the situation. You never know who's watching you and making notations about your management of interesting situations. That's how I ended up writing these little ditties since 99, 'hold the torch up until we get it done', I was told...and walk 'this' way.

I know I have some folks to catch up with and I will but I swear the hour glass has but a few grains of sand left in it. That will put me under a nd very quickly and I will become mute...ahh you won't need me anyhow. Now give yourself a pat on the back for making it thru to the end and for entertainment purposes, watch how many people are walking around with a big O in the middle of their faces. There's some politicians with that look right now...'but I thought...' Well sir, that's what you get for thinking! You can study long but study wrong. I'm right here, until I'm not and I am wasting no time real work begins now.

Love and Kisses;

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


By Xavier Hermes,, Sunday, 14-Nov-2010 16:47:24

Bravo Clif High for sticking to your guns!

The thing about the so-called ‘tipping point’ is that it does not generate instant drama. It follows the rule of 'energetic change first, followed by manifesting change into the physical'. What has just happened is that a state (energetic) which has been endemic across human affairs for generations has now been overtaken by another. The long extant state is that of control (a huge collection of memes and negative vibes) through fear and the tensions associated with it. This has been overtaken by ‘freedom vibes’ and the accompanying mental state of ‘breaking out from control’ showing up as one of release.

Of course, there are other aspects to the tipping point, but this is primary amongst them, a ‘driving energetic’ if you will.

The Illuminasti have been trying to hold back the human resistance to fear, the freedom gene, through whatever desperate fear generators they could activate. We can only really be controlled when we are in fear. One by one these fear-actions have lost their potency, and so, progressively, the cause of the old controllers has been lost, with no possibility of recovery. As the illuminasti have been increasingly exposed, especially by the web, they have moved in the mind of the populace from having an almost god-like status (and the control that went with it) to being seen for the greedy and dysfunctional sociopaths that they are. It is not, as they say, a pretty sight. The changing perspective is no longer something that people will continue to buy into – and nor have they.

Humanity at large has at last begun to realise that their emperors have no clothes. And can you imagine just how fast such news travels?

There was a written prediction from some 80 years back that the illuminasti (though they were not then known by name) would 'hold a sword of damoclese' over America, but finally demise through their own arrogance. That final stage is where we are – right now.

The fact that the bully-boys theft-based system of money, foreign exchange, traded instruments and derivatives, inflation and other forms of taxation is imploding only serves to exacerbate their situation. Then , there are many, many, MANY around the planet who have been paid handsomely to be loyal. Sorry guys - no more money... So, the ‘loyalty-for-hire’ brigade are now mostly gone, and with them a whole layer of illuminasti ‘middle management’, the people who kept things happening on the ground.

As the collapse accelerates, there are many who have been kept in place by sheer intimidation, people who now feel a breath of freedom – and act accordingly. Expect to see growing legions of whistleblowers, competing to bring their stories to public attention. Expect the scope of these stories to go way beyond what even the most ardent of conspiracy theorists ever dreamed.

Perhaps most importantly, at the very top of the illuminasti (at least, in incarnated form) many of the older generations may stick with their hard line illuminist thinking – but this is not true of the younger generations. For quite some time, many of them have simply not bought in to the illuminasti story, and instead have been disaffected by systems designed to demean and control them - some even seeking ways to start the healing process to balance out all the negativity that has for so long been generated.

We said there is little drama – at least, not on day one. But you will not have long to wait. As the illuminasti structures enter their final break-up, the evidence will be there, writ large. In the theatre of the world stage, the tragedy will be reversed, much comedy will ensue as come-uppances overwhelm the players, and justice will finally out.

You have a ringside seat. So enjoy!

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


We looked at the Tea Party when it first got started and it looked interesting. Then we dropped it like a hot stone and have not given it a shred of attention since. Why?

As one of the founders of the movement explains, the whole thing has become total BS.


By Allan Stevo, November 2, 2010,

I don’t trust the Tea Party. I’m distrustful of new movements and remember how for eight years of Bush II, people who once had smaller government views suddenly abandoned those views in blind devotion of the president. I realize that it’s easy to believe in freedom for just a few years. My distrust is aided by the fact that the idea of freedom is a momentarily politically expedient idea to some.

Today it is a political expedient for some Republicans – a temporary means to an end. The banner of “freedom” is currently serving as a vague, and therefore effective, uniting statement among the opposition now that there is a Democratic president in power. One day when there is again a Republican president, it is likely that freedom, liberty, or some rhetoric having to do with the Constitution will be the vague political expedient used to unite those that oppose that president.

Each time a new president is elected, the opposition freedom movement crumbles as the party votaries step in line. The hangers-on often follow the power. To some, any president is distasteful. For those who desire to be around power, however, a powerful president from his or her own party is less distasteful than a powerful president from the other party. After eight or more years away from the teat of power, some will take any opportunity to make their way back into the presence of the most powerful people in the world.

The exodus away from ideals and towards power that follows an election is repeated almost cyclically. Having a memory is my main “impediment.” It’s the main reason that I’m not able to think highly of the Tea Party movement. I recognize a man must not be judged based on his words, but instead on his actions. Therefore, I see recent Johnny-come-latelies to “freedom” as untested. If the Tea Party movement lasts a few election cycles, I’ll start to take an interest in them.

Until then, I’m going to simply enjoy watching the political mayhem that takes place in the upcoming months. In a stable society the drama of political shifts can be amusing to watch. That the two parties believe in virtually the same ideas does not detract from the entertainment, because the media doesn’t seem willing to admit that, nor do some Americans, which will make for good manufactured drama. I’m not saying that it’s my job to test anyone and offer a stamp of approval, but it’s good for everyone involved to recognize that freedom is commonly a temporary alluring idea that is often forced to take the backseat to pursuits of power, or influence, or even just a feeling of being in the “in crowd.”

No matter how we try to avoid being pulled into a desire to be on the winning team, it’s sometimes hard to recognize changes in ourselves. I watched a good friend turn into a Bush II devotee a few years back, and who has amazingly lost all recollection of the rage he had for the former president. He was in the Army (on reserve) and angry that a moron had started a war and that that moron regularly used loose political language to talk about that war. The man was a Protestant pastor, proficient in Arabic and well-studied in Islam. He privately preached the idiocy of Bush to me for nine months. Six years later, we got together again and he told me “George Bush is the best thing since sliced bread.” Neither he nor his wife could remember any other opinion ever having come from his mouth. This story is not unique.

I’ve also watched beloved peace activists turn into Obama devotees, forgetting that they once despised anyone who would not preach and act in the most peaceful of ways. I remember specifically the weekend when Obama’s pro-war policy became news. For most of 2008, it only took about 3 clicks and 5 minutes of reading on Obama’s campaign website to see that he had officially zero interest in pulling troops out of the Middle East. They were there to stay. Maybe not 140,000 troops in Iraq for all time, but he’d keep them somewhere in the Middle East. Of course, he had many, many supporters who did not actually know what his stated policies were, nor even what his Senate voting record was like. Some of his supporters were proud peaceniks. Then, over a weekend in the fall of 2008, McCain was, as usual, saying that we must stay the course in Iraq and Obama started saying that the U.S. must stay the course in Afghanistan. His peacenik supporters had loved the man, not the policies, but they never realized that. Once the weekend was over they continued to love the man, not the policies. They were no longer peaceniks.

Sometimes we take ourselves too seriously, which is not that great of a thing when we also tend to be very forgetful of our past beliefs and behaviors. That aspect of human behavior leads me to not take the Tea Party too seriously.

Scott Rasmussen – listening to the heart of the movement?

Regardless of the name put on the movement, whether it be Tea Party, or the Pink British Scones, the principles at the heart of the movement are meaningful to me. In the Wall Street Journal earlier this year, pollster Scott Rasmussen claimed to be able to use three questions to identify a person as a member of the “political class” as opposed to a member of the “mainstream public.” Those who identify with the government on two or more of the following questions are defined by Rasmussen as a member of the political class.

1. Whose judgment do you trust more: that of the American people or American political leaders?
2. Has the federal government become its own special interest group?
3. Do government and big business often work together in ways that hurt consumers?

These questions show a clear bias. Rasmussen claims that it is a bias that is growing in the U.S. “The major division in this country,” says Rasmussen “is no longer between parties but between political elites and the people.”

Rasmussen claims that less than 10% of Americans are part of the political class. About the Tea Party, Rasmussen commented. “Americans don’t want to be governed from the left or the right. They want, like the Founding Fathers, to largely govern themselves with Washington in a supporting – but not dominant – role. The Tea Party movement is today’s updated expression of that sentiment.”

“The political class overwhelmingly supported the bailouts of the financial and auto industries, the health-care bill, and the Justice Department’s decision to sue Arizona over its new immigration law. Those in the mainstream public just as intensely opposed those moves,” stated Rasmussen.

You know the political elites that Rasmussen is talking about. You recognize them. You know how they react to the newest government solutions for improving our lives. They are the type of people who like to wear shackles binding their wrists because it makes them feel secure.

“Elites” is a word that makes people unhappy at present. That’s an area of contempt that I’d like to spend a few minutes looking at.

Some Elites Should Be Loved and Admired

“Who are the elites and why are they so bad?” is a question that occurs to me when I hear raging tirades against these elites. As far as I can tell, the elites are those who believe that people should be controlled and not left to their own decisions. This puts them in a dastardly category of “those deserving of raging tirades.”

Believers in democracy think that the majority should be allowed to abuse minorities in society. They belong in that category. So do proponents of socialism, communism, fascism, Nazism, who believe that the state is justified in interfering in the lives of others. They all belong in the same boat because they don’t acknowledge the full spectrum of rights that free individuals have.

Whether or not there are people spouting off raging tirades against you, it’s good to be elite. Not the kind of elite that Rasmussen talks about, however. Being elite shows that you have talent. Some people try to surround themselves exclusively with the elites of their respective fields. Being elite shows you’ve done something right and know how to repeat it. By being among elites, and learning from their successes and failures, maybe you too can one day be considered elite.

Michael Jordan was a great basketball player. He’ll be remembered for a long time. John Paxson, Jordan’s Chicago Bulls teammate, won’t be remembered by anyone in 40 years when my generation dies off. Jordan is the elite. We want to be elite. We want our children to be elite. Because we hope the best for our friends, we even want the people around us to be more elite. We want this according to Webster’s definition of the word – “The choice part or segment; esp: a socially superior group.”

In anything that we do, if we had a choice between effortlessly being elite or effortlessly being mediocre – most of us would choose to be effortlessly elite. It’s not only good to be elite, it’s great to be elite, and it’s desired to be elite.

The type of elite that Rasmussen speaks of is one who uses his superior social status to attempt to control others. Rasmussen’s elites are not the Michael Jordans of the world who are trying to win games and sell you shoes. These are people like Mark Kirk, Michael Jordan’s Lake Forest, Illinois congressman who wants to force you to carry chipped ID cards, wants to force you to fund lots of foreign escapades, wants to force you to obediently goose step in whichever direction the state points.

Michael Jordan is one kind of elite – the overly-hyped American success story of a person who achieves a long sought after goal through hard work and determination despite years of failure. Through much sweat elites like MJ built themselves each a pair of wings. These are the flying elites who want nothing but a chance to be left alone and succeed. Watch them and be inspired.

Mark Kirk is a different kind of elite. He’s the kind who has also likely experienced years of failure, but his successes rely on successfully forcing you to follow his will. This is not the great American success. This is the classic slithering elite. Watch your ankles for them; watch your legs when you walk through tall grass. Only by crawling up your leg against your will will they be able to get themselves out of the mud. Keeping the slithering elites at bay and making room for the winged elites to succeed is the role of government.

When government is used to help the slithering elites attack the winged elites, the law is perverted as the French parliamentarian Frederic Bastiat wrote in the early 1800’s.

A gray area between the two

Surely, there is a gray area between the two definitions. Who can, with certainty, say where influence ends and control begins? Where does force begin? Some might use the convenient artificial distinction that where your choice ends and begins is where the line is to be drawn. I agree with that definition for simplicity sake. However, I recognize a few of the shortcomings that it brings.

So much energy is invested into studying the mind and the ways to manipulate it. In a world where the power of suggestion is widely understood and utilized to almost uncontrollably bombard each person with hundreds of messages a day, it is hard to always know what it is that you really want and when it’s an invasive voice seemingly in your head, but actually from outside, whispering to you “drink up, you’re thirsty and need a Coke.”

Drawing a clear line is hard to do, but is also unnecessary when attempting to distinguish a slithering elite (Mark Kirk) from a winged elite (Michael Jordan). It is especially clear when one of them is a congressman. One wants to be left alone in order to succeed. Sometimes he wants to convince you through sales campaigns. The other, with the force of government, wants to force you to bend to his will.

The slithering elite that Rasmussen seeks to identify is understandably a topic that draws rage. It’s unfortunate that we use such an admirable word – “elite” – to describe both Michael Jordan and Mark Kirk. The winged elite are not the problem when the slithering elite get out of hand. As Rasmussen points out – Democrat and Republican have ceased to be meaningful distinctions. Both groups are filled with the slithering elite. (Rasmussen’s “political class” and “mainstream public” seem to be good monikers for the division that many have intuitively noticed.)

Will those who seek to control us be shown the door?

Some will say that the Tea Party’s success can measured on Election Day, which means the key question is – Will those who seek to control us be shown the door on Election Day?

And my answer to that key question is – No, I doubt it. It’s more likely that they will continue to control us just like some of the communist parties of central and eastern Europe controlled their societies for five decades last century – with their single digit percentage party membership. But Rasmussen’s data gives me a good feeling by informing me that more people are getting keen to the idea that DC is not run in our interest.

For right now, I simply see the Tea Party as a safety valve in our system. People use the Tea Party as a way to let off steam. If it lasts through a few bi-partisan movements (BM) of power, then I’ll start taking this whole talk of freedom that comes from them a bit more seriously. Until then, it’s free entertainment.

Allan Stevo [send him mail] is a writer from Chicago who just pledged $100 to see the Keynesian Krugman and Austrian Murphy debate. For the rest of the month of November, every dollar spent at will be pledged through "the point" to the New York City Food Bank. Click here to learn more.

Copyright © 2010 by Permission to reprint in whole or in part is gladly granted, provided full credit is given.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


NOTE from Ron: In 2008, after working my tail off for Ron Paul and voting for Cynthia McKinney (because my first two choices, Paul and Kucinich, were not on the ballot), I became totally disillusioned. She received 0 [zero] votes in my district and area, even though I know several people who voted for her. Also, to vote I need to sign that I am a citizen of the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, which is a foreign CORPORATION. I worked very hard to liberate myself from that fraudulent system; and there is simply no way I want to give my consent to be governed by criminals that have prostituted themsleves in defiance of the Constitution the swore to uphold and defend. This will be the first time I will have failed to vote in a major election since I turned 21.

By Joel S. Hirschhorn / October 20, 2010

For many years Americans have justified voting for candidates they were not especially thrilled with by convincing themselves that the lesser evil deserved to win office. The fraction of people totally committed to one of the two major parties is small. Most Americans see themselves as independents, liberals, conservatives, progressives or libertarians, but not as loyal Democrats or Republicans. Most Americans are fed up with both major parties, not just incumbents.

But this year’s mid-term elections will once again result in only Democratic or Republican candidates winning. Other than staying home and not voting, nearly all voters will employ the lesser-evil justification. Just one problem: That lesser-evil strategy has resulted in the dismal state of the nation that angers most Americans.

The only logical conclusion is that lesser-evil voting perpetuates all the cancerous evil plaguing the political system. This should not surprise anyone. Regardless of party affiliation, major party candidates convincingly lie to voters and the tons of money poured into politics create a mass propaganda machine from both parties that deceives voters.

Lesser-evil voting sometimes works in favor of Democrats and sometimes favors Republicans. Negative advertising creates fear of some candidates and media pundits and celebrities use their considerable power to give voters reasons to vote for or against candidates. The thirst for true reforms of government persists, as evidenced by the Tea Party movement and even the election of President Obama. It is the force that moves the pendulum from one party to the other.

When will Americans wake up and realize that lesser evil still means evil? Least bad still means bad. Least corrupt still means corrupt. Least dishonest still means dishonest. Least stupid still means stupid.

But many people despairingly see no other option if they want to fulfill their civic responsibility and participate in elections. That is because the two major parties have given Americans no real options. They like the lesser-evil system that sustains the two-party plutocracy. Only voters in Nevada can choose the “none of the above” option. The rest of us can stay home or vote for third party candidates that stand no real chance of winning. What to do?

Stop deluding yourself that any Democrat or Republican in Congress or the White House will actually do absolutely everything, even if it means not winning reelection, to reform the corrupt, dysfunctional, wasteful government system being controlled by wealthy people and corporate interests, and devastating ordinary Americans.

Your lesser-evil vote perpetuates evil. Do you want to live with that?

Accept the ugly reality that voting within the electoral system is no longer capable of reforming and fixing our government. Is that it? Is there nothing else to do in our constitutional republic? Actually, there is something else. The Founders put an alternative path to reform in the Constitution. In their wisdom they foresaw the possibility that the electoral system might fail we the people. Very few Americans know about this option in Article V, which itself speaks volumes about the decay of our educational and political systems. State convention delegates could propose reform constitutional amendments that would never be proposed by Congress, and they would still have to be ratified by three-quarters of the states.

Instead of feeling frustrated with lesser-evil voting take the time to learn about the Article V convention option and why Congress has refused to honor the hundreds of state applications for one. Friends of the Article V Convention, a national nonpartisan group, makes those applications available on its website, something that Congress never did, as well as many other resources.

Political powers on the left and right have worked hard to prevent the Article V convention option from ever being used. That should tell you that what they fear we the people need now more than ever before. The main thing to fear is the status quo political system that your lesser-evil votes sustain. Only vote for someone who you deeply believe without reservations is the absolute best person to have in office. That may mean not voting for every office on the ballot.

Joel S. Hirschhorn has a new book, Delusional Democracy: Fixing the Republic Without Overthrowing the Government, which supports constitutional conventions and other peaceful ways to restore American democracy. Read other articles by Joel, or visit Joel's website:

This article was posted on Wednesday, October 20, 2010 at 7:00am and is filed under Democrats, Elections, Legal/Constitutional, Right Wing Jerks.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


By Greg Hunter’s ... ... 27 October 2010

When I was an investigative reporter at the networks, the first question we would ask when trying to decide if we wanted to do a story was: How many? How many people have been hurt by a defective product? How many defective products of a certain kind were in use? How many dollars will it take to fix the problem? In the case of the recent mortgage crisis – “Foreclosuregate,” the question of how many has been answered.It has been widely reported that there are a little more than 60 million home mortgages in the Mortgage Electronic Registry System (MERS). If every one of the 60 million mortgages are worth $100,000, that would mean a total of at least $6 trillion in home mortgages that are electronically filed. In MERS, there is no physical written record of a “Promissory Note.” In almost all states, you need that original “Note” to prove ownership of a home. That means in almost every single state, the banks cannot legally foreclose on your home without this document. Some say the loan documents were lost on purpose because the bankers did not want their massive fraud to see the light of day. Whether or not the “Notes” were lost on purpose or accident, the fact is the original “Notes” are nowhere to be found. That is what the “Robo Signing” part of the story is all about. It has been widely reported that “foreclosure mills” were creating massive amounts of counterfeit Promissory Notes so banks could legally foreclose on homeowners.

In the post I did earlier this week called “The Perfect No-Prosecution Crime,” I laid out several layers of fraud and white collar crime of mortgage and foreclosure fraud. The lack of the Promissory Note is the biggest of all the problems in this chain of chicanery. Here’s why. A Promissory Note is a financial instrument. It is in the same family as a Federal Reserve Note. For example, if you copied a $100 bill and then tried to spend that copy in a store, because you lost the original, is it still money?–Of course not. You need the original financial instrument (in this case, $100 Federal Reserve Note) to make a legal transaction in a store. The same is true for a Promissory Note. You need the original Promissory Note to legally complete a foreclosure. A counterfeit, or copy, of a Promissory Note is not a financial instrument, just like a counterfeit or copy of a $100 bill is not a financial instrument!

Can you see how big this problem really is for the banks? This is $6 trillion in real estate that fat cat bankers cannot legally prove they own. Likewise, that means trillions of mortgage-backed securities HAVE NO BACKING. I think this is the biggest financial fraud in history. This was not an accident made by someone pressing the wrong button or a few documents that weren’t handled properly, but fraud on a massive scale that took years and tens of thousands of people to pull off. Ironically, this is all playing out against a backdrop of outrageous Wall Street pay. This year the big banks are going to pay a record $144 billion! (Click here for more on that story.)

One of my regular readers thinks Congress can simply pass a law and make all the crimes retroactively legal. To that I said, “So Congress is going to change hundreds of years of real estate document law in each and every state? Along with IRS tax laws broken, trust laws broken, security laws broken and on top of that, make crimes retroactively not crimes anymore? That’s a lot even for Congress. I think the path of least resistance is more likely printing money to paper over the problem. . . . I hope you are wrong on Congress because if they do change all of these laws to comfort the criminal banksters, we might as well change the name of the country to the United States of Crime.”

Two very big things are going to happen because of this enormous financial fraud. The banks are, once again, going to play the “Financial Armageddon” card and scream for a bailout to save the world. You see, owners of all those mortgage-backed (or un-backed) securities will force the big banks to buy them all back. The big banks do not have that much money and, thus, many experts are predicting another monster bank bailout is on the way. How is that going to be paid for?—with money printed out of thin air, that’s how.

The second big thing, the banks are going to have to get tens of millions of homeowners to sign new “Promissory Notes.” Then, and only then, will the banks have the legal right to foreclose and mortgage backed securities will actually be backed. One of my favorite writers, Jim Willie of the Hat trick Letter, predicts underwater homeowners will be demanding something in return for this bailout. Willie wrote, “The total $1 trillion bank aid package would cause a firestorm. A key provision to win over public support will be promises by the big banks to finally give home loan balance reductions, what the people demand. That will enable the American public to agree to the package, except one year later they will be shown more revolving doors and dead end corridors.” (Click here for the entire Jim Willie article.)

This $6 trillion problem may or may not sink the banks, but the next bank bailout will surely submerge the dollar. That will trigger very big inflation. Keep in mind, this is not an event, this is a process that will take a long time to work through.

Related Posts:

* Could Foreclosure Fraud Cause Another Banking Meltdown?
* The Perfect No-Prosecution Crime
* Who Really Owns Your Home?
* Fear, Desperation and Doom Describe the Housing Market
* Did Congress try to Legalize Foreclosure Fraud?

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


By Terry Frieden, CNN Justice Department Producer

Washington (CNN) - Federal law enforcement officials said Tuesday the probe of potential fraud by financial firms in the foreclosure crisis includes an investigation into possible criminal violations of federal laws.

Two sources familiar with the federal Financial Fraud Enforcement Task Force indicated the multi-agency effort by investigators in the Justice, Treasury and Housing departments would determine whether prosecutors would ultimately pursue criminal or civil penalties - or both.

The task force has scheduled a meeting for Wednesday at the Department of Housing and Urban Development. Upon conclusion, a briefing is likely at the White House, officials said.

"The administration's Federal Housing Administration and Financial Fraud Enforcement Task Force have undertaken their own regulatory and enforcement investigation into the foreclosure process," White House Press Secretary Robert Gibbs confirmed Tuesday. "We remain committed to holding accountable any bank that has violated the law," he said.

Growing concern over flawed paperwork by banks and other lenders in foreclosure proceedings has prompted growing anger and confusion in the housing market. Some banks temporarily froze foreclosures, but are now indicating plans to resume seizing homes after reviewing new paperwork.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Chicago sheriff says no to enforcing foreclosures

CHICAGO | Tue Oct 19, 2010 2:37pm EDT

CHICAGO Oct 19 (Reuters) - Two of the largest U.S. mortgage servicers have said will resume home foreclosures, but a big-city sheriff has news for them: he won't enforce their foreclosure evictions.

The sheriff for Cook County, Illinois, which includes the city of Chicago, said on Tuesday he will not enforce foreclosure evictions for Bank of America Corp (BAC.N), JPMorgan Chase and Co. (JPM.N) and GMAC Mortgage/Ally Financial until they prove those foreclosures were handled "properly and legally."

Bank of America, the largest U.S. mortgage servicer, and GMAC, on Monday both announced rollbacks from their foreclosure moratoriums.

The announcement by Cook County Sheriff Thomas Dart comes after weeks of damaging accusations of shoddy paperwork that may caused some people to be illegally evicted from their homes.

"I can't possibly be expected to evict people from their homes when the banks themselves can't say for sure everything was done properly," Dart said in the statement.

"I need some kind of assurance that we aren't evicting families based on fraudulent behavior by the banks. Until that happens, I can't in good conscience keep carrying out evictions involving these banks," he added.

Bank of America, GMAC and JPMorgan Chase along with their subsidiaries, make up around a third of the roughly 3,700 eviction orders filed at the Cook County sheriff's office, the statement said.

The foreclosure controversy, which has drawn public outrage and sparked government probes, has threatened bank earnings and the health of the fragile housing market.

Two years ago Dart refused to carry out foreclosure evictions in cases where renters apparently had not been informed that they were about to be evicted from buildings in which their landlords had fallen into foreclosure.

Some 20 Cook County sheriff's deputies execute around 14,000 foreclosure and rental eviction notices every year. (Reporting by Nick Carey, editing by Leslie Adler)

Copyright 2010 Reuters.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Magna Carta, 1297 AD, is widely viewed as one of the most important legal documents in the history of democracy. On display in the West Rotunda Gallery at the National Archives. Presented courtesy of David M. Rubenstein.

Here is a law which is above the King and which even he must not break. This reaffirmation of a supreme law and its expression in a general charter is the great work of Magna Carta; and this alone justifies the respect in which men have held it.

King John of England agreed, in 1215, to the demands of his barons and authorized that handwritten copies of Magna Carta be prepared on parchment, affixed with his seal, and publicly read throughout the realm. Thus he bound not only himself but his "heirs, for ever" to grant "to all freemen of our kingdom" the rights and liberties the great charter described. With Magna Carta, King John placed himself and England's future sovereigns and magistrates within the rule of law.

When Englishmen left their homeland to establish colonies in the New World, they brought with them charters guaranteeing that they and their heirs would "have and enjoy all liberties and immunities of free and natural subjects." Scant generations later, when these American colonists raised arms against their mother country, they were fighting not for new freedoms but to preserve liberties that dated to the 13th century.

When representatives of the young republic of the United States gathered to draft a constitution, they turned to the legal system they knew and admired – English common law as evolved from Magna Carta. The conceptual debt to the great charter is particularly obvious: the American Constitution is "the Supreme Law of the Land," just as the rights granted by Magna Carta were not to be arbitrarily canceled by subsequent English laws.

This heritage is most clearly apparent in our Bill of Rights. The fifth amendment guarantees...

No person deprived of life, liberty, or property, without due process of law.

Written 575 years earlier, Magna Carta declares...

No freeman shall be taken, imprisoned,...or in any other way destroyed...except by the lawful judgment of his peers, or by the law of the land. To no one will we sell, to none will we deny or delay, right or justice.

In 1957 the American Bar Association acknowledged the debt American law and constitutionalism had to Magna Carta and English common law by erecting a monument at Runnymede. Yet, as close as Magna Carta and American concepts of liberty are, they remain distinct. Magna Carta is a charter of ancient liberties guaranteed by a king to his subjects; the Constitution of the United States is the establishment of a government by and for "We the People."

NOTE from Ron: Why am I posting this? Because our government, as it exists, is in violation of human rights. It is an outlaw government. The legal word for that is "de facto" government. It has no legitimacy. Now, are you a freeman? If you do not know, then you are not free at all. You are not even under the law of the land. You have relinquished your rights and given power of attorney over your affairs to the de facto government, which operates under another law: the law of the sea, or commercial law. They system is set up to usurp the natural, common and constitutional law, the law of the land, in order to deprive people of their unalienable rights by keeping us ignorant of the facts. What are we going to do about this? I will teach if there are enough people to listen; and I am legally and lawfully a freeman who has re-established my rights under admiralty/commercial law.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


by Ellen Brown, October 15th, 2010,

Looming losses from the mortgage scandal dubbed “foreclosuregate” may qualify as the sort of systemic risk that, under the new financial reform bill, warrants the breakup of the too-big-to-fail banks. The Kanjorski amendment allows federal regulators to pre-emptively break up large financial institutions that—for any reason—pose a threat to U.S. financial or economic stability.

Although downplayed by most media accounts and popular financial analysts, crippling bank losses from foreclosure flaws appear to be imminent and unavoidable. The defects prompting the “RoboSigning Scandal” are not mere technicalities but are inherent to the securitization process. They cannot be cured. This deep-seated fraud is already explicitly outlined in publicly available lawsuits.

There is, however, no need to panic, no need for TARP II, and no need for legislation to further conceal the fraud and push the inevitable failure of the too-big-to-fail banks into the future.

Federal regulators now have the tools to take control and set things right. The Wall Street giants escaped the Volcker Rule, which would have limited their size, and the Brown-Kaufman amendment, which would have broken up the largest six banks outright; but the financial reform bill has us covered. The Kanjorski amendment—which slipped past lobbyists largely unnoticed—allows federal regulators to preemptively break up large financial institutions that pose a threat to U.S. financial or economic stability.

Rep. Grayson’s Call for a Moratorium

The new Financial Stability Oversight Council (FSOC) probably didn’t expect to have its authority called on quite so soon, but Rep. Alan Grayson (D-FL) has just put the amendment to the test. On October 7, in a letter addressed to Timothy Geithner, Shiela Bair, Ben Bernanke, Mary Schapiro, John Walsh (Acting Comptroller of the Currency), Gary Gensler, Ed DeMarco, and Debbie Matz (National Credit Union Administration), he asked for an emergency task force on foreclosure fraud. He said:

The liability here for the major banks is potentially enormous, and can lead to a systemic risk. Fortunately, the Dodd-Frank financial reform legislation includes a resolution process for these banks. More importantly, these foreclosures are devastating neighborhoods, families, and cities all over the country. Each foreclosure costs tens of thousands of dollars to a municipality, lowers property values, and makes bank failures more likely.

Grayson sought a foreclosure moratorium on all mortgages originated and securitized between 2005-2008, until such time as the FSOC task force was able to understand and mitigate the systemic risk posed by the foreclosure fraud crisis. But on Sunday, White House adviser David Axelrod downplayed the need for a national foreclosure moratorium, saying the Administration was pressing lenders to accelerate their reviews of foreclosures to determine which ones have flawed documentation. “Our hope is this moves rapidly and that this gets unwound very, very quickly,” he said.

According to Brian Moynihan, chief executive of Bank of America, “The amount of work required is a matter of a few weeks. A few weeks we'll be through the process of double checking the pieces of paper we need to double check."

“Absurd,” say critics such as Max Gardner III of Shelby, North Carolina. Gardner is considered one of the country’s top consumer bankruptcy attorneys. "This is not an oops. This is not a technical problem. This is not even sloppiness," he says. The problem is endemic, and its effects will be felt for years.

Rep. Grayson makes similar allegations. He writes:

The banks didn’t keep good records, and there is good reason to believe in many if not virtually all cases during this period, failed to transfer the notes, which is the borrower IOUs in accordance with the requirements of their own pooling and servicing agreements. As a result, the notes may be put out of eligibility for the trust under New York law, which governs these securitizations. Potential cures for the note may, according to certain legal experts, be contrary to IRS rules governing REMICs. As a result, loan servicers and trusts simply lack standing to foreclose. The remedy has been foreclosure fraud, including the widespread fabrication of documents.

There are now trillions of dollars of securitizations of these loans in the hands of investors. The trusts holding these loans are in a legal gray area, as the mortgage titles were never officially transferred to the trusts. The result of this is foreclosure fraud on a massive scale, including foreclosures on people without mortgages or who are on time with their payments. [Emphasis added.]

Why Wasn’t It Done Right in the First Place?

That raises the question, why were the notes not assigned? Grayson says the banks were not interested in repayment; they were just churning loans as fast as they could in order to generate fees. Financial blogger Karl Denninger says, “I believe a big part of why it was not done is that if it had been done the original paperwork would have been available to the trustee and ultimately the MBS owners, who would have immediately discovered that the representations and warranties as to the quality of the conveyed paper were being wantonly violated.” He says, “You can’t audit what you don’t have.”

Both are probably right, yet these explanations seem insufficient. If it were just a matter of negligence or covering up dubious collateral, surely some of the assignments by some of the banks would have been done properly. Why would they all be defective?

The reason the mortgage notes were never assigned may be that there was no party legally capable of accepting the assignments. Securitization was originally set up as a tax dodge; and to qualify for the tax exemption, the conduits between the original lender and the investors could own nothing. The conduits are “special purpose vehicles” set up by the banks, a form of Mortgage Backed Security called REMICs (Real Estate Mortgage Investment Conduits). They hold commercial and residential mortgages in trust for the investors. They don’t own them; they are just trustees.

The problem was nailed in a class action lawsuit recently filed in Kentucky, titled Foster v. MERS, GMAC, et al. (USDC, Western District of Kentucky). The suit claims that MERS and the banks violated the Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act, a law originally passed to pursue organized crime. Bloomberg quotes Heather Boone McKeever, a Lexington, Ky.-based lawyer for the homeowners, who said in a phone interview, “RICO comes in because the fraud didn’t just happen piecemeal. This is organized crime by people in suits, but it is still organized crime. They created a very thorough plan.”

The complaint alleges:

53. The “Trusts” coming to Court are actually Mortgage Backed Securities (“MBS”). The Servicers, like GMAC, are merely administrative entities which collect the mortgage payments and escrow funds. The MBS have signed themselves up under oath with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC,”) and the Internal Revenue Service (“IRS,”) as mortgage asset “pass through” entities wherein they can never own the mortgage loan assets in the MBS. This allows them to qualify as a Real Estate Mortgage Investment Conduit (“REMIC”) rather than an ordinary Real Estate Investment Trust (“REIT”). As long as the MBS is a qualified REMIC, no income tax will be charged to the MBS. For purposes of this action, “Trust” and MBS are interchangeable. . . .

56. REMICS were newly invented in 1987 as a tax avoidance measure by Investment Banks. To file as a REMIC, and in order to avoid one hundred percent (100%) taxation by the IRS and the Kentucky Revenue Cabinet, an MBS REMIC could not engage in any prohibited action. The “Trustee” can not own the assets of the REMIC. A REMIC Trustee could never claim it owned a mortgage loan. Hence, it can never be the owner of a mortgage loan.

57. Additionally, and important to the issues presented with this particular action, is the fact that in order to keep its tax status and to fund the “Trust” and legally collect money from investors, who bought into the REMIC, the “Trustee” or the more properly named, Custodian of the REMIC, had to have possession of ALL the original blue ink Promissory Notes and original allonges and assignments of the Notes, showing a complete paper chain of title.

58. Most importantly for this action, the “Trustee”/Custodian MUST have the mortgages recorded in the investors name as the beneficiaries of a MBS in the year the MBS “closed.” [Emphasis added.]

Only the beneficiaries—the investors who advanced the funds—can claim ownership. And the mortgages had to have been recorded in the name of the beneficiaries the year the MBS closed. The problem is, who ARE the beneficiaries who advanced the funds? In the securitization market, they come and go. Properties get sold and resold daily. They can be sliced up and sold to multiple investors at the same time. Which investors could be said to have put up the money for a particular home that goes into foreclosure? MBS are divided into “tranches” according to level of risk, typically from AAA to BBB. The BBB investors take the first losses, on up to the AAAs. But when the REMIC is set up, no one knows which homes will default first. The losses are taken collectively by the pool as they hit; the BBBs simply don’t get paid. But the “pool” is the trust; and to qualify as a REMIC trust, it can own nothing.

The lenders were trying to have it both ways; and to conceal what was going on, they dropped an electronic curtain over their sleight of hand, called Mortgage Electronic Registration Systems or “MERS.” MERS is simply an electronic data base. On its website and in assorted court pleadings, it too declares that it owns nothing. It was set up that way so that it would be “bankruptcy-remote,” something required by the credit rating agencies in order to turn the mortgages passing through it into highly rated securities that could be sold to investors. According to the MERS website, it was also set up that way to save on recording fees, which means dodging state statutes requiring a fee to be paid to establish a formal record each time title changes hands.

The arrangement satisfied the ratings agencies, but it has not satisfied the courts. Real estate law dating back hundreds of years requires that to foreclose on real property, the foreclosing party must produce signed documentation establishing a chain of title to the property; and that has not been done. Increasingly, judges are holding that if MERS owns nothing, it cannot foreclose, and it cannot convey title by assignment so that the trustee for the investors can foreclose. MERS breaks the chain of title so that no one has standing to foreclose.

Sixty-two million mortgages are now held in the name of MERS, a ploy that the banks have realized won’t work; so Plan B has been to try to fabricate documents to cure the defect. Enter the RoboSigners, a small group of people signing thousands of documents a month, admittedly without knowing what was in them. Interestingly, it wasn’t just one bank engaging in this pattern of coverup and fraud but many banks, suggesting the sort of “organized crime” that would qualify under the RICO statute.

However, that ploy won’t work either, because it’s too late to assign properties to trusts that have already been set up without violating the tax code for REMICs, and the trusts themselves aren’t allowed to own anything under the tax code. If the trusts violate the tax laws, the banks setting them up will owe millions of dollars in back taxes. Whether the banks are out the real estate or the taxes, they could well be looking at insolvency, posing the sort of serious systemic risk that would bring them under the purview of the new Financial Stability Oversight Council.

No need for disaster

As comedian Jon Stewart said in an insightful segment called “Foreclosure Crisis” on October 7, "We're back to square one." While we’re working it all out, an extended foreclosure moratorium probably is in the works. But this needn’t be the economic disaster that some are predicting – not if the FSOC is allowed to do its job. We’ve been here before, and not just in 2008.

In 1934, Congress enacted the Frazier–Lemke Farm Bankruptcy Act to enable the nation’s debt-ridden farmers to scale down their mortgages. The act delayed foreclosure of a bankrupt farmer's property for five years, during which time the farmer made rental payments. The farmer could then buy back the property at its currently appraised value over six years at 1 percent interest, or remain in possession as a paying tenant. Interestingly, according to Marian McKenna in Franklin Roosevelt and the Great Constitutional War (2002), “The federal government was empowered to buy up farm mortgages and issue non-interest-bearing treasury notes in exchange.” Non-interest-bearing treasury notes are what President Lincoln issued during the Civil War, when they were called “Greenbacks.”

The 1934 Act was subsequently challenged by secured creditors as violating the Fifth Amendment’s due process guarantee of just compensation, a fundamental right of mortgage holders. (Note that this would probably not be a valid challenge today, since there don’t seem to be legitimate mortgage holders in these securitization cases. There are just investors with unsecured claims for relief in equity for money damages.) The Supreme Court voided the 1934 Act, and Congress responded with the "Farm Mortgage Moratorium Act" in 1935. The terms were modified, limiting the moratorium to a three-year period, and the revision gave secured creditors the opportunity to force a public sale, with the proviso that the farmer could redeem the property by paying the sale amount. The act was renewed four times until 1949, when it expired. During the 15 years the act was in place, farm prices stabilized and the economy took off, retooling it for its role as a global industrial power during the remainder of the century.

We’ve come full circle again. We didn’t get it right in 2008, but with the newly empowered Financial Stability Oversight Council, we already have the ready-made vehicle to avoid another taxpayer bailout, and to put too-big-to-fail behind us as well.

Ellen Brown wrote this article for YES! Magazine, a national, nonprofit media organization that fuses powerful ideas with practical actions. Ellen is an attorney and the author of eleven books, including Web of Debt: The Shocking Truth About Our Money System and How We Can Break Free. Her websites are,, and

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


© 1997 by Hank Nottingham, who spent a career in the U.S. Air Force as a fighter pilot and engineer. He has been in metaphysics for over 30 years, both Eastern and Western, and has been in athletics all his life.

A metaphysical approach is one that uses the subjective side primarily and the objective side secondarily (more sparingly). It utilizes the instinctive and intuitive more often than the intellect. Under a three-mind concept (if such actually exists) it would employ the subconscious, as opposed to the conscious; and hopefully, tap into the superconscious as well. One might say that the conscious is the director – the guidance system – and the subconscious is the doer - the propulsion system. Additionally, it is generally simple and direct as opposed to complex and oblique.

What is it that produces a superior performance - sometimes a super one – like Bob Beamon (‘68 Olympics) jumping 29 feet in the Long Jump – bettering the world record by almost two feet – when he had barely jumped 27 feet before? Something happened! What was it, and is it repeatable consciously?

One of my earliest experiences with this phenomenon was when I was a sophomore in high school. I was running a practice 220-yard-dash with older teammates. If I could have beaten them at all, it would have been by three or four yards. Yet, something happened to me early in the race. I started to fly! I must have won by 30 or 40 yards. No exaggeration! The couch exclaimed, “What happened to you?”

I could only reply, “I don’t know.”

I’ve spent the next 40 years trying to figure it out. While I haven’t yet completely cracked the code, here are some of the things I’ve learned along the way that help me to perform better than I would otherwiseand occasionally catch a piece of The Force (as in Star Wars).

In Sports, it was called being in the zone or peak performance. When it occurs, the performance is superior, often almost effortless, and the feeling is awesome. Over the years, I have studied and experimented with many things. Presented here are what has been the most productive to better performance (as recorded objectively by watch or tape).

Every action that we perform, not just sports, consists of three phases: Goal, Action, and Result. (I call this the GAR sequence.) The GOAL is singular – to win the race or to not lose the race. (Some people are motivated better or more from the negative than from the positive.) The RESULTS are not always dual - success or failure - and therefore, are always uncertain to a greater or lesser degree. The ACTION is the doing part whereby the goal is transformed into the result. It is the action that produces the result, and there should be a natural, continuous flow from the goal, through the action, to the result. Therefore, we should focus on the action (the goal-action phase) and not the result, per se – which is exactly what most of us do not do very well. We give excessive attention to results which, paradoxically, produces decreased results. The more we focus on the results, the worse the results generally will be. This is the basis of the Yogic Principle of Non-Attachment. Without attachment to the fruits of your actions, you are left wholly and freely able to perform the action itself.

Utilizing Fear

Fear plays a big part in any endeavor where there is an objective result desired. We all know what it is; but what really causes it? Fear arises primarily from misfocusing on the results; and, as the results are always uncertain, the uncertainty spawns fear. The secondary cause of fear is connecting your success to your self-image. Thus, if you fail, your self-esteem is lowered. This generalized source of fear is quite common, almost universal; and, when added to the specific form of fear (misfocusing), usually manifests in a lessened performance. Also, tying self-esteem to your results is a major causative factor in misfocusing itself.

Fear, however, can be beneficial if properly understood and correctly utilized. If you can’t clear it (and strong fear generally can’t be cleared even with the knowledge of its cause) then use it to your advantage. Fear is a force – like an afterburner on a jet fighter. Use it to boost your physical power. Fear will help you to run faster and fight harder, etc., if you focus and direct it into the action. Then it becomes a booster instead of a brake.

Conventionally, relaxation and breathing (etc.) are generally recommended to clear fear with varying degrees of unscuccess since this is a symptomatic approach and does not deal with the primary cause, which is misfocusing. If refocusing into the action doesn’t clear fear, then using it is a much better approach, especially in sports where there is often little time available to do much clearing anyway. Also, approaching the endeavor as a challenge to see how well you can do, rather than a contest to be won or lost, reduces the performance anxiety.

Concerning relaxation: there is an optimum amount of tension that is needed for peak performance, and all this relaxation stuff generally does more harm than good – sprinters running with their hands completely open, for example. Feeling fear (nervousness, tension, etc.) and doing it anyway is a much better approach. Just be natural and don’t worry about all the artificial stuff(do’s and don’ts).

Another Look at Faith

Much is said metaphysically about faith (I.e., being positive); but this, too, is often misunderstood and also overrated. Faith, real faith – the faith that moves mountains is the faith that makes the attempt (performs the action). This is the faith that says, “I think I can,” and then goes out and tries it. Faith (being positive) about the results is mostly false faith because the results are always uncertain (though possibilities vary); and all this pseudo-positive stuff about being successful, etc., is actually mostly counter productive. Conversely, you don’t have to believe it – just don’t doubt it; because doubt destroys the dream by preventing the attempt.

Focusing is very important, but also often misunderstood. Real focus is concentrating on what you are doing exclusive of all other thought. It is a one-pointedness, fixed or flowing (as the case may be) on the goal-action phase. It is not some false, artificial lock on of the mind in some matter. Watch how the predator hunts – total attention. Instinctive, intuitive. Just focus naturally and disregard all the how to stuff.

It is not just no thought about the results or details that produces the best performance - it is probably NO thought period! (When in the zone, there is probably no thought at all.) If you are thinking about it, you are probably wrong. When you do get it (get in the zone), you can’t think about it; and when you think about it, you can’t do it. Thus, you can never really figure it out, consciously or analytically. However, just because you can’t define it (intellectually) does not mean you can’t do it (instinctively or intuitively).

When zoning, there is probably a merging that takes place - where the action and the actor become one. This is the Zen principle of Oneness where the archer becomes one with the target. This merging has to occur naturally and can never be adequately achieved artificially.

The ACTION is best performed in a natural, unconscious manner leaving all the details, physical and psychical, to the Subconscious (Master) Mind. Even the simplest activities, like walking, are really quite complex and are best left to your own internal supercomputer. The conscious, intellectual approach that most people use is incapable of getting the best or the maximum out of you. Artificial action usually produces inferior results – however intriguing it may be to the conscious mind, and however much mass consciousness proclaims it. At best, understand the principles and concepts involved and leave the details to the unconscious. Just be natural! Do it naturally and don’t concern yourself with all the garbage. I have verified this many times over with myself and others I have assisted.

The best way to improve (train) is at the maximum, directly doing the activity itself. To run faster, practice running faster at the distance you are running. Push your limits to exceed your limits (a personal record system). You will fail a lot; but you will also succeed more than with exoteric, conventional methods. All my primary training is done at the maximum, directly doing the activity involved. This ensures the maximum amount of improvement possible.

A metaphysical approach also worked exceptionally well in the toughest competition of all – combat – where there are no second places or second chances. One wins and the other dies. In my combat flying in Vietnam (dive bombing and dog fighting), I used a subjective approach (Subconscious Mind Principle) that made me better than with conventional methods; and, more importantly, better than my peers – friend and foe. In dive-bombing, this allowed me to be twice as effective. I hit the target two-thirds of the time, while the average pilot was successful only one third of the time. A 67% success rate may not seem much to the uninformed, but it is extremely good when you are manually dive bombing from one mile high at near the speed of sound with the enemy shooting at you. In ACT (dog fighting), after developing the metaphysical approach, no one was able to defeat me in training or battle.

One further point – knowing and doing are two different things. You can’t do unless you know; but even when you know, you can’t always do. For example, I could tell you everything you needed to know about flying a supersonic fighter plane, but you obviously wouldn’t be able to do it. Similarly, knowing how to zone and zoning are not automatically synonymous.

The metaphysical approach summarized by doing it naturally and unconsciously, both physically and psychically, with no thought about the results or details … focusing on the goal-action phase – may, just possibly, get you into The Zone to have a super performance. However, it will get the best out of you; and that, spiritually speaking, is the ultimate success.

NOTE: As noted above, Hank is a former pilot in the US Air Force who now lives in Satellite Beach, Florida. This article was originally published in my magazine, PARADOX. There are also two other articles by Hank in the online version of PARADOX: YE ARE GOD & CONSCIOUS CREATION: THE ESSENCE.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE

STAY PUT: PRODUCE THE NOTE - posted October 11, 2010

From Ron and the Weekend Events page for October 8-10...Though I did not see it myself, it was said that The New York Times put this on the front page last week. It's something I've been trying to make people aware of for a good while. From a Brasscheck TV subscriber, which posted the video: "A huge percentage of US mortgages written during the Bush [and Clinton] era were fraudulent, in violation of lending laws and/or so carelessly handled the banks can't find the paperwork. If you or someone you know is facing foreclosure on a Bush [or Clinton] era mortgage and they want to keep their home, find someone who specializes in auditing real estate loans and if you find malfeasance (or gross incompetence), get a lawyer and stay put. The banks were in such a rush to get free money they didn't think it was necessary to follow the law. Let them pay the consequences."

While the CNN video advocates getting a lawyer, please know that most lawyers are a part of the system that is fraudulent, although it is changing. Those who are willing to do their homework can stand up to the fraud by themselves. Follow your guidance and do what is best for you. Just know that virtually the entire monetary system and all that it controls (pretty much everything) are unlawful under common law, which is the law of the land. We have been operating under admiralty law, which is the law of the sea, or commerce. Oh how I wish people would start listening and wake up. So-called authorities are nothing of the sort. They derive their power from we the people who have acquiesced in taking personal responsibility for our own lives.

MORE FROM BRASSCHECK... [They atrribute the fraud to Bush, however, it goes back further than that, at least to my view.]

Wall Street and its co-conspirators on Main Street had a great plan.

Step 1: Ram predatory loans down the market with fraud and deceptive marketing.

Step 2: Some of the loans will blow up, but in the aggregate it will all work out and besides, the loans will be bundled and sold off to investors (spreading the toxic waste), so who cares?

Great plan, but it had a few problems.

Problem #1: It destroyed the world financial system (minor detail)

Problem #2 (And he's where it get VERY interesting...) For a loan to be valid, the lender needs to be able to produce the paperwork.

Guess what?

In their mad greed to screw the American people and line their own pockets, Wall Street forgot that little detail.

Many of these loans and been sliced and diced and sold and re-sold so many times that not only is the paperwork not easy to lay hands on, in some cases, it's not clear who actually owns the loan.

Here's where property law comes in.

If the bank can't produce the documents and the real owner of the loan can't be identified, the contract is null and void.

You've got to hand it to Congresswoman Marcy Kaptur (and Ohio which produces a lot of great Congresspeople.)

By telling a bank to "produce the note," a homeowner can delay foreclosure by forcing the lender to prove the suing institution is actually the same which owns the debt.

Now, the banks own sloth and disorganization (and inherent dishonesty) can be used against it.

Final word: The media (and Wall Street and its criminal partners in Congress and the former Bush White House) love to call these loans sup-prime.

Here's the old fashioned word: predatory.

Many of the loans that were made in the past five years that have created so many problems would have been illegal until Bush & Co not only gutted lending laws, but also literally sued states to stop them from enforcing their own lending laws.

Former governor Elliott Spitzer was the ring leader of the state movement to enforce local lending laws...and you saw what happened to him.

He's no saint (and truth be told, he's kind of a jerk) but if every politician who went to hookers was busted, Washington and all the state capitals would be ghost towns.

Here's another one on the same subject...
Fraud Factories: Rep Alan Grayson Explains the Foreclosure Fraud Crisis

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


NOTE FROM RON: Please read my commentary on this article: TIME TO SPEAK OUT: HOW I SEE IT. Besides what I say in that piece, know that there are obvious prejudices in Marrs' article that I do not share. Those that know me know that I am much more broad-minded than he is; still, what he shares is amazing insight.

Email exchange...Posted Friday, October 8, 2010

Texe, thank you for responding.

It's no cop-out at all! Even if MOST international bankers are Jewish; not all or even most Jews are international bankers, or their puppets. Most Jews are just like you and me, wanting to be left alone to live life in peace. I separated what is being done by a very small, select group from a wider cultural and religious group. There's a lot more grace and wisdom in that, don't you think?

Also, there is a major difference between Jew and Zionist. The latter, as I see it, is a purely political movement made up of extremists, including many Christians, who want to create war for everyone because in their consciousness, life is a perpetual battle between good and evil..with the evil ones always being those who disagree with whatever "MY" viewpoint is. It is ego dominated and insane.

I am anti-bigotry! For example, just because many black men may deal in illegal drugs does not mean that black men are all criminals. Most are not. I trust you can see the distinction I am making; yet, to me, even extremists still stuck in scapegoating with broad brushstrokes have the right to free expression. And I have the right to disagree, and to do my best to bring balance and seek peace to the best of my ability.

And though I disagree with you, I still see you as my brother; which is also how I see the international bankers, regardless of their religion or cultural heritage.

May the light of Christ shine in and from your heart,

On 10/8/2010 11:37 AM, Texe Marrs wrote:

Dear Roy:

Isn't it a cop-out to claim that the "international bankers" are the bad guys? That is like saying that "a guy" is in prison for serial murders but never citing his name. Who are the "international bankers?" Who owns Goldman Sachs, JP Morgan Chase, etc.? What is Ben Bernanke, Tim Geithner, Henry Paulson, Dick Fuld, Bernie Madoff, and all the other swindlers? Are they Southern Baptists, Chinese....?
Who funded Obama's meteoric rise? Was it the Scots or the Canadians? Are you that ignorant? I think you are very bright—but the scriptures talk about those who feared the Jews. In America so many are afraid of being called Anti-Semite. Are you? Isn't it time that an intelligent man like you got the backbone to take a stand?
I can just see the headline of December 8, 1941: "Pearl Harbor was attacked by naval forces from an undisclosed nation yesterday."
Your Friend
----- Original Message – – -
Sent: Wednesday, October 06, 2010 8:10 AM
Subject: My commentary on your article

The following commentary on your article was posted on my website, as was yours. I changed your title because I did not want the word "Jew" to be there. Thank you for providing the inspiration for me to respond with love and grace. Blessings, my brother.

By Texe Marrs, October 2, 2010 | Author of Hinterland Voice ~

Obama Tells Jews, “No More!”

Barack Obama was from the start a creation and puppet of the Jews. Now, he is making war against his creators. He’s had enough and isn’t going to take it any longer. Sparks are flying in our nation’s capital. The Jews are angry and they intend to smash this runaway President and his “smart-aleck” black wife, Michelle. The gloves are off and they’re plotting some very, very sinister “payback.”

The Battle Lines Are Drawn

Already, the battle lines are drawn. It started with Obama telling Israel’s Benjamin Netanyahu that the Israelis must play fair with the oppressed Palestinians and come to peace terms in the Middle East. Obama next instructed General Petraeus to wrap things up in Afghanistan, that he, the President, intended to keep his campaign promise to the American people to be out of Afghanistan by the end of 2011.

The Jews were furious. They want blood, war and territory, not peace. My sources tell me that Jew Rahm Emanuel, White House Chief of Staff, accompanied by Obama’s 2008 campaign chief and now top political advisor David Axelrod, stormed into the Oval Office. Rahm screamed and Axelrod threatened, but Obama held his ground and came back with a shocking proposal: “Rahm, David, I thank you for your past support; now it’s time for us to go our separate ways. I’ll give you til November 1st to pack your bags!”

Taking on the Chicago “Dons”

The two one-time puppet handlers were flabbergasted. The next day, Obama got calls from Chicago’s top Jewish “Dons”—the billionaires who had raised him up from obscurity and made Barack a star. The Crowns, Pritzkeny, Mikvahs, Solows began to put the screws on Obama. It didn’t work!

Then, the President directed Jew Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner to warn the Red Chinese communists that America would no longer permit the Jews and China to deconstruct the U.S.A. and build China into the New World Order Colossus.

“Tell the Chinese to quit playing with their currency, the Yuan, to let it float upward in accordance with the market,” the President instructed Geithner. “Stop their manipulation, too, of gold and oil markets.” Geithner nearly fell off his chair. He stammered and went out the door a mental wreck. Barack Obama, taking up for the American workers and economy, defying the Jew masters who were behind Beijing’s artificial economic success. This was unbelievable.

Just Saying No to Homosexual Perverts and Illegal Aliens

Obama fired his White House budget director, the Jew Peter Orszag. He phoned Nancy Pelosi and Harry Reid and told them he wasn’t going to support the “Dream Act” legislation, the Jews’ plan to give amnesty to millions of illegal aliens.

He next appointed a new Commandant for the Marine Corps, a General who opposed the homosexual agenda and is against ending the military’s “Don’t Ask, Don’t Tell” policy of Bush and Clinton.

Then Obama did another bold thing: He ordered his Attorney-General, Eric Holder, the sole black in the Administration with any real authority, to go to the federal appeals court and try to void a lower court’s nullification of the “Don’t Ask, Don’t Tell” policy. Obama is now making war on the satanic Jews who are the movers and shakers behind the perverted homosexual freaks! What a turnabout.

Keeping Campaign Promises—Tax Breaks for Middle Class

And there’s more. His Jewish handlers had instructed Obama to throw out his campaign promise to give the middle class tax breaks. “Do not extend Bush’s tax breaks for the middle class,” they had commanded.

In defiance, in mid-September Obama fired Larry Summers, his Jewish Chairman of the White House’s Council of Economic Advisors and replaced him with Austan Goolsbee, Obama then announced he would move to extend the Bush tax cuts for the middle class. The Jewish elite are furious.

Taking on the Jewish-Owned Healthcare Insurers

Another Jewish plan was to have “ObamaCare” passed and then, once the government, under the new law, required all employers and workers to have healthcare insurance, the healthcare insurance corporations—whose stock is owned by wealthy Jewish investors—would jack the price of insurance up to astronomical levels. Indeed, the companies did exactly that. Even before the law goes into effect in 2011, prices for healthcare insurance went up a staggering 27% nationwide—in just three months. The Jews were gleeful and deliriously happy, counting their profits.

But—watch out! Obama got his black Secretary of Health and Human Services to write a letter to all the insurance companies threatening them with White House action (IRS audits, Justice Department investigation?) if they so arrogantly continued to shaft American workers by unjustifiably raising prices.

Reportedly, Obama intends to go after Big Pharma, too. He, Attorney-General Holder, and Obama’s FDA are already telling the pharmaceutical giants that their price increases for prescription drugs are outrageous and won’t be tolerated. The corporations are also being warned to stop peddling defective drugs that are killing people.

The Jews, once again, went nuts and Obama’s phone was almost melted with blistering threats from his former “friends.”

The Jews Retaliate

In retaliation, the Jewish media, previously admirers and supporters of everything Obama did—turned sour. The “Messiah” image for Obama in just the last two months has gone out the window.

The Jew-owned newspaper The Washington Post, the same yellow rag that had been used to upend Richard Nixon’s presidency, employed their same journalist Bob Woodward, of Watergate and “Deep Throat” fame, now an associate editor, to write a new book entitled Obama’s Wars, blasting Obama’s White House leadership as inept and fumbling.

In response, Obama, to stay ahead in the PR battle, is coming out with his own book in a few months, a book that will have a favorable picture of Barack, Michelle, and the kids on the front cover.

Meanwhile, Bill O’Reilly, of the Zionist-owned Fox News TV channel, has just released his smear book, Pinheads and Patriots, with a picture of Obama on the cover as a “pinhead.”

So, liberal Democrats, neocon Republicans, and the media, urged on by their Jewish bosses, are all on the attack. The Jews didn’t bargain for an Obama with a spine. What happened to their puppet, the old “Stepan Fetchit village idiot?”
Obama Tired of Being Their “Nigger”

What had happened? For one thing, Obama was sick and tired of repeating, “Yassa, yassa” to his Jewish masters. Michelle Obama had enough of Rahm Emanuel’s contemptuous attitude toward her and Barack, too. She complained to her husband, Barack: “The Jews treat us and all blacks like we are plantation slaves. They hate us!”

Getting wind of this, the Jews’ lashed out at Michelle with a book published in France, in which France’s First Lady, the prostitute Carla Bruni, says that Michelle told her that living in the White House is “hell.” “I can’t stand it,” Ms. Obama reportedly told Carla Bruni. Bruni, of course, is married to France’s President Sarkozy, a Jew born in Hungary, like his Jew pal, George Soros.

The First Lady, Michelle, had been forced by the Jews to replace her black assistant with Susan Cher, a hard-nose Zionist taskmaster. Even her black appointments and social director had been ousted by White House Jewish controllers. Michelle was fed up.

Jewish Lie: “Obama is a Moslem”

The media went to work to take Barack and Michelle down a few notches. They put out new trash that Obama was “secretly” a Moslem. The Los Angeles Times, Jew-owned as is all the media, threatened to put up a video on YouTube they had previously shelved of Obama years ago speaking to a pro-Palestinian group blasting Israeli treatment of Arabs.

The Jewish elite has also contacted their friends, John Hagee and other Judaizer and Zionists in the Christian evangelical community. Expect harsh, increasing criticism of Obama in coming months and possibly even a huge protest rally by these pseudo-Christians in Washington, D.C., to demonstrate against Obama’s “anti-Semitism” and support for the Palestinians. Hagee and his lying ilk will trumpet: “God is angry at you, Obama, for opposing His Chosen People, Israel!”

Expect Senator John McCain and homos Lindsey Graham and Joseph Lieberman to viciously attack the President, to support Israel and their Jewish overlords. Sarah Palin, too, will join in the unseemly attack. She is 100% a Jewish puppet.

The Obamas countered this week by attending a Christian church in Washington, D.C.—the first time they had done so in months. Michelle now has to put up with the media, which once touted her as a fashion model, suggesting to magazine readers and TV viewers that the First Lady is “frumpy, out of touch, fat, and stupid.”
Pastor Wright and Farrakhan Spill the Beans About the Jews

Barack Obama had been personally hurt when his former pastor, Chicago’s Jeremiah Wright, publicly complained that he couldn’t so much as get in a phone call to the President. “The Jews in the White House—they control Barack; they won’t let him talk to me,” said Wright.

Another old associate, Louie Farrakhan, surprised everyone when, on a national TV program, he revealed that the Jews had “created” Obama and that Chicago billionaire Jews had bragged that “Barack Obama will be America’s first Jewish President.”

“Do you realize,” Farrakhan solemnly told a shocked interviewer, “that before Barack Obama was elected, he was selected?”

Blacks Disappointed in Obama

Moreover, Barack Obama knew of my own video, Rothschild’s Choice: Barack Obama and the Hidden Cabal Behind the Plot to Murder America (Available on DVD), which exposed the Jews’ plans to use Obama as their weapon to communize America and destroy the Constitution. Obama’s ego took a blow when he realized that more and more people saw him as nothing more than a Jewish mouth, a yes-man.

Even most blacks around the nation were beginning to get the message that Obama was owned by rich Jews hostile to American—and black—economic interests. They bristled at the high unemployment rates of blacks and the billions of dollars for bankers and pennies for ordinary Americans. Blacks had begun to abandon Obama in droves, and Barack was heartsick and chafed to think he would go down in history as a traitor both to his own race and to average Americans, white or black.
Obama Joins Other Courageous Presidents

Barack Obama is not the first President to rebel against his Jewish creators and masters. Eisenhower did it and gave his brilliant farewell address warning of the profit-loving, war-mongering “Military-Industrial Complex.” Richard M. Nixon and John F. Kennedy, too, declared private wars against the Jews, the CIA, and the corrupt bankers. Truman before them did the same.

Truman did everything the Jews told him for years, then he got mad and disgusted and kicked Jewish financier Bernard Baruch out of his office and began to turn the screws against the Communists, whom he knew were the creation and secret-loves of the Jews. That was the birth of the successful Truman Doctrine. They, in turn, cursed Harry and told him they wouldn’t give him a dime to run for another term as President. They told him that as an ex-President, he would get no lucrative corporate board appointments, and no high-paid speaking gigs either and would have to go back to Independence, Missouri a poor man. Harry Truman’s response: “Fine—and go to hell!”

Ike, who in 1956 ordered Israel to withdraw its troops from the Sinai, became a small college President. No big bucks for him after leaving the White House.

JFK was assassinated because the Jews saw he and his brother, Bobby (also murdered), as threats to their whole scheme for global domination.

Clinton and both Bushs generally played ball with the Jews, though George, Sr. was forced out of office because he once threatened to cut off foreign aid money to Israel. Clinton did the same and the Jews punished him with the Lewinsky scandal and impeachment.

George W. Bush kissed the soles of the Jews’ shoes. He sent American troops to die in futile Middle Eastern wars for Israel, and co-operated with the Mossad in the 9/11 atrocity. In return, the Jews gave him two terms as President, made him a multimillionaire many time over, and are publishing he and Laura’s hokey, baloney “memoirs.”

What Will Happen to Obama?

So, what will happen to the brave Barack Obama? Can he win against these beasts who have such a firm grip on the scalps of ordinary American citizens and are even now painting an imaginary target on Obama’s forehead? We shall see. It seems as if Obama is going to try and ally himself closer to what he perceives to be the everyday American. He’ll probably dump a lot of his socialist schemes—which his Jewish handlers favored. He’ll support the American workers, and take on Red China’s unfair trade policies. He will fight the bankers, the insurance crooks, and the globalist corporate traitors on Wall Street. He wants to actually become the President of the People, not the special interests.

The Jews Will Kill Him…Or Depose Him

But, can he hold out against the many weapons the Jews have accumulated over the years? The Jewish lobby is going to pull out all stops to destroy the President. If they don’t kill him, they’ll try to embarrass and shame him through fake media stories and so forth. It will be open season against the Jews’ enemy, Barack Obama. If he’s lucky, he’ll be able to stick around until 2012 and be replaced by a more loyal servant of the Jews.

We shall see if this man has the guts, the gumption, to be a real man and stand up against such a formidable, sinister combination. We’ll know in a few short months whether President Obama will cave in or continue the battle against these monsters.

The Jews and their cohorts have Satan as their everyday companion and guide and he is crafty, cunning, and an able opponent. My advice to Barack Obama: Humble yourself before God, seek Him and give your life totally over to Jesus. Through Him, the weak are made strong, the desert shall see an abundant rain. You can deserve that Nobel Peace Prize. You can have a lasting legacy. You can defeat the evil force that has so oppressed America and the world. You can overcome.

“And he that overcometh, and keepeth my works unto the end, to him will I give power over the nations.” (Revelation 2:26)

POSTNOTE: Rahm Emanuel and David Axelrod have publicly announced they are leaving the White House. Larry Summers, too, is departing. Peter Orszag resigned as Budget Director. The other Jews on my Swindler’s List are afraid that they are next. The war heats up.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


NOTE from Ron: I find this interesting, and post it here because I am lawfully a personal sovereign. I do, however, take exception to the idea of separation. That is old consciousness – an unsustainable paradigm. In unity consciousness, I see everyone as an aspect of me, including, maybe even especially, those who would rule over me. My own ego, when it erroneously wants to be separate, gives rise to the very manifestation of such insanity in goevernments and fraudulent systems of finance and injustice. It is that distortion of my self image that is the foundation for all of Life's lessons that seem painful and create the experience of victimhood.

As a personal sovereign, I take personal response-ability to deal with everyone in as loving a manner as I am humanly capable. However, while I am not separate from any child of God (Creator), I am separate from the system and insane beliefs and practices outlined by whoever wrote this. I am on the planet in a physcial body; but I am aligned with higher spiritual realities that are not of this world's system...yet. Big changes are coming fast! I welcome them, knowing that the old MUST give way to the new.

Provided by: Xavier Hermes

This wonderful message speaking to the claiming of personal sovereignty was circulated a while back. Now seems like an excellent moment to review it once more, for it holds much truth. Personally, I am most certainly signed up for what this says. If it works for you, too, be pro-active about it. Please network this statement far and wide. It is one effective way you can help ensure the final demise of the illuminasti - the old Powers That Were (TPTW) to put them energetically into their proper place. ~ X. Hermes

P.S. I have no idea where this message originated - but it looks guided, to me.

==== To The Governments & People of Earth ====

● We claim the right to exist, and we will defend it.
● We do not seek to overthrow anything. We do not seek to control anything. We merely wish to be left alone.
● All we ever wanted was to live in peace with our friends and neighbors. For a long, long time we bore insults to our liberty; we took blows, we did what we could to avoid injury and we worked through the system to get the offenses to stop. That has now changed.
● We no longer see any benefit in working through the world's systems. At some point, working within a system becomes cowardly and immoral; for us, that point has arrived. Regardless of the parties in power, their governments have continued to restrict, restrain and punish us. We hereby reject them all. We hereby withdraw from them all. We hold the ruling states of this world and all that appertains to them to be self-serving and opposed to humanity.
● We now withdraw our obedience and reclaim the right to strike back when struck. We will not initiate force, but we do reserve the right to answer it. We did not choose this – it was forced upon us.

==== To The Governments of Earth ====

● You are building cages for all that is human. In the name of protection, you have intruded into all areas of human life, far exceeding the reach of any Caesar. You claim ultimate control of our property and our decisions, of our travels and even our identities. You claim ownership of humanity far beyond the dreams of any Emperor of any previous era. Understand clearly: We reject your authority and we reject your legitimacy. We do not believe that you have any right to do the things you do. You have massive power, but no right to impose it upon us and no legitimacy. We have forsaken you. We are no longer your citizens or your subjects.
● Your systems are inherently anti-human, even if all their operators are not. We are not merely angry young people. We are fathers and mothers; aunts, uncles and grandparents; we are business owners and trusted employees; we are mechanics and engineers and farmers. We are nurses and accountants and students and executives.
● We are on every continent.
● This is not a burst of outrage; this is a sober declaration that we no longer accept unearned suffering as our role in life. For long decades we sat quietly, hoping that things would turn around. We took no actions; we suffered along with everyone else. But after having our limits pushed back again and again, we have given up on your systems.
● If our fellow inhabitants of this planet wish to accept your rule, they are free to do so. We will not try to stop them. We, however, will no longer accept your constraints upon us. From now on, when you hurt us, we will bite back. If you leave us alone we will leave you alone and you can continue to rule your subjects.
● We are happy to live quietly. But if you come after us, there will be consequences. You caused this because of your fetish for control and power. The chief men and women among you are pathologically driven to control everyone and everything that moves upon this planet. You have made yourselves the judge of every human activity. No god-king of the ancient world ever had the power that your systems do.
● You have created a world where only the neutered are safe and where only outlaws are free.

==== To The People of Earth ====

● We seek nothing from you. We do not want to rule you and we do not want to control you.
● All we wish is to live on earth in peace. As always, we will be helpful neighbors and generous acquaintances. We will remain honest business partners and trustworthy employees. We will continue to be loving parents and respectful children. We will not, however, be sacrificial animals.
We reject the idea that others have a right to our lives and our property. We will not demand anything from you, and we will no longer acquiesce to any demands upon us. We have left that game. We reject all obligations to any person or organization beyond honesty, fair dealing and a respect for human life.
● We will shortly explain what we believe, but we are not demanding that you agree with us. All we ask is that you do not try to stop us. Continue to play the game if you wish; we will not try to disrupt it. We have merely walked away from it. We wish you peace.

==== To Those Who Will Condemn Us ====

● We will ignore you.
● We welcome and seek the verdict of a just God, before whom we are willing to expose our innermost thoughts. Are you similarly willing?
● We would stand openly before all mankind if it were not suicidal. Perhaps some day we will have to accept slaughter for our crime of independence, but not yet.
● Your criticism and your malice are much deeper than mere disagreements of strategy or philosophy. You do not oppose our philosophy, you oppose our existence. Our presence in the world means that your precious ideals are false. Some of you would rather kill us than face the loss of your ideologies, just as those like you have either hated or killed every sufficiently independent human.
● You present yourselves to the world as compassionate, tolerant and enlightened, but we know that your smooth words are costumes. Oh yes, we know you, servant of the state; don't forget, we were raised with you. We played with you in the schoolyard, we sat next to you in the classroom. Some of us studied at the same elite universities. We watched as you had your first tastes of power. We were the boys and girls standing next to you.
● Some of us were your first victims. We are not fooled by your carefully crafted public image.

==== What We Believe ====

#1: Many humans resent the responsibilities that are implied by consciousness. We accept those responsibilities and we embrace consciousness. Rather than letting things happen to us (avoiding consciousness), we accept consciousness and choose to act in our own interest. We do not seek the refuge of blaming others, neither do we take refuge in crowds. We are willing to act on our personal judgment, and we are willing to accept the consequences thereof.
#2: We believe in negative rights for all: That all humans should be free to do whatever they wish, as long as they do not intrude upon others; that no man has a right to the life, liberty or property of another; that we oppose aggression, fraud and coercion.
#3: We do not believe that our way of life, or any other, will make life perfect or trouble-free. We expect crime and disagreements and ugliness, and we are prepared to deal with them. We do not seek a strongman to step in and solve problems for us. We agree to see to them ourselves.
#4: We believe in free and unhindered commerce. So long as exchanges are voluntary and honest, no other party has a right to intervene – before, during or after.
#5: We believe that all individuals should keep their agreements.
#6: We believe that honestly obtained property is fully legitimate and absolute.
#7: We believe that some humans are evil and that they must be faced and dealt with. We accept the fact that this is a difficult area of life.
#8: We believe that humans can self-organize effectively. We expect them to cooperate. We reject impositions of hierarchy and organization.
#9: We believe that all humans are to be held as equals in all matters regarding justice.
#10: We believe that the more a man or woman cares about right and wrong, the more of a threat he or she is perceived to be by governments.
#11: We believe that there are only two true classes of human beings: Those who wish to exercise power upon others – either directly or through intermediaries – and those who have no such desires.
#12: Large organizations and centralization are inherently anti-human. They must rely upon rules rather than principles, treating humans within the organization as obedient tools.

==== Our Plans ====

● We are building our own society. We will supplement traditional tools with networking, cryptography, sound money, digital currency and anonymous messaging.
● Our society will not be centrally controlled. It will rely solely on voluntary arrangements. We welcome others to join us. We are looking for people who are independent creators of value, people who act more than talk, and people who do the right thing because it is the right thing.
● We will develop our own methods of dealing with injustice, built on the principles of negative rights, restitution, integrity and equal justice.
● We do not forbid anyone from having one foot in each realm – ours and the old realm – although we demand that they do no damage to our realm. We are fully opposed to any use of our realm to facilitate crime in the old realm, such as the hiding of criminal proceeds.
● We expect to be loudly condemned, libeled and slandered by the authorities of the old regime. We expect them to defend their power and their image of legitimacy with all means available to them. We expect that many gullible and servile people will believe these lies, at least at first.
● We will consider traps laid for us to be criminal offenses. Any who wish to join us are encouraged to distribute this declaration, to act in furtherance of our new society, to voluntarily excel in virtues and to communicate and cooperate with other members of the new society.
● We are The Free and The Unashamed. Free, unashamed men cannot be ruled.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE

OBAMA WILL TRIUMPH - SO WILL AMERICA - posted September 23, 2010

Commentary by Ron: I posted this, not so much because I agree with what it contains, but rather because I used to read Francis Shaeffer's books when I was a fundamentalist Christian. I was surprised to see his son taking this position.... Now, about Obama, I did not vote for him. I did not trust him. I do not see the "results" young Frank itemizes below. On the other hand, I have read and posted many channeled messages, purportedly from a Higher perspective, in which Obama is seen as a Star Seed and more-or-less a bridge between the old paradigm and the new. If it were not for the timing, convinced big changes are in store for our world – good changes – I would see Obama as just another puppet in a long line of presidential prostitutes serving the International Bankers, aka, the Illuminati. Because I do strongly believe that we are on the threshold of a major shift in consciousness and paradigm, I opt to continue to give Obama the benefit of the doubt; and as I did for George Bush Jr. before him, pray that he completes his soul's assignment. Soul assignments may not always seem like the LIght. In fact, they are often not Light filled. However, darkness is often used by Divine Counsel to accelerate change and the evolution of consciousness. While things may appear evil to the superficial observer, the more astute visionary may often see things that are missed by the former. I trust that Frank may be such a visionary. For all of our sake, I hope so.

By Frank Schaeffer, a New York Times best selling author

Before he'd served even one year, President Obama lost the support of the easily distracted left and engendered the white hot rage of the hate-filled right. But some of us, from all walks of life and ideological backgrounds – including this white, straight, 57-year- old, former religious right wing agitator, now progressive writer and (given my background as the son of a famous evangelical leader) this unlikely Obama supporter – are sticking with our President. Why? – because he is succeeding.

We faithful Obama supporters still trust our initial impression of him as a great, good and uniquely qualified man to lead us.

Obama's steady supporters will be proved right. Obama's critics will be remembered as easily panicked and prematurely discouraged at best and shriveled hate mongers at worst.

The Context of the Obama Presidency

Not since the days of the rise of fascism in Europe, the Second World War and the Depression has any president faced more adversity. Not since the Civil War has any president led a more bitterly divided country. Not since the introduction of racial integration has any president faced a more consistently short-sighted and willfully ignorant opposition – from both the right and left.

As the President's poll numbers have fallen so has his support from some on the left that were hailing him as a Messiah not long ago; all those lefty websites and commentators that were falling all over themselves on behalf of our first black president during the 2008 election.

The left's lack of faith has become a self-fulfilling "prophecy" – snipe at the President and then watch the poll numbers fall and then pretend you didn't have anything to do with it!

Here is what Obama faced when he took office - none of which was his fault:

● An ideologically divided country to the point that America was really two countries
● Two wars; one that was mishandled from the start, the other that was unnecessary and immoral
● The worst economic crisis since the depression
● America's standing in the world at the lowest point in history
● A country that had been misled into accepting the use of torture of prisoners of war
● A health care system in free fall
● An educational system in free fall
● A global environmental crisis of history-altering proportions (about which the Bush administration and the Republicans had done nothing)
● An impasse between culture warriors from the right and left
● A huge financial deficit inherited from the terminally irresponsible Bush administration.

And those were only some of the problems sitting on the President's desk!

"Help" from the Right?

What did the Republicans and the religious right, libertarians and half-baked conspiracy theorists – that is what the Republicans were reduced to by the time Obama took office – do to "help" our new president (and our country) succeed? They claimed that he wasn't a real American, didn't have an American birth certificate, wasn't born here, was secretly a Muslim, was white-hating "racist", was secretly a communist, was actually the Anti-Christ, (!) and was a reincarnation of Hitler and wanted "death panels" to kill the elderly!

They not-so-subtly called for his assassination through the not-so-subtle use of vile signs held at their rallies and even a bumper sticker quoting Psalm 109:8. They organized "tea parties" to sound off against imagined insults and all government in general and gathered to howl at the moon. They were led by insurance industry lobbyists and deranged (but well financed) "commentators" from Glenn Beck to Rush Limbaugh.

The utterly discredited Roman Catholic bishops teamed up with the utterly discredited evangelical leaders to denounce a president who was trying to actually do something about the poor, the environment, to diminish the number of abortions through compassionate programs to help women and to care for the sick! And in Congress the Republican leadership only knew one word: "No!"

In other words the reactionary white, rube, uneducated, crazy American far right, combined with the educated but obtuse neoconservative war mongers, religious right shills for big business, libertarian Fed Reserve-hating gold bug, gun-loving crazies, child-molesting acquiescent "bishops", frontier loons and evangelical gay-hating flakes found one thing to briefly unite them: their desire to stop an uppity black man from succeeding at all costs!

"Help" from the Left?

What did the left do to help their newly elected president? Some of them excoriated the President because they disagreed with the bad choices he was being forced to make regarding a war in Afghanistan that he'd inherited from the worst president in modern history!

Others stood up and bravely proclaimed that the President's economic policies had "failed" before the President even instituted them! Others said that since all gay rights battles had not been fully won within virtually minutes of the President taking office, they'd been "betrayed"! (Never mind that Obama's vocal support to the gay community is stronger than any other president's has been. Never mind that he signed a new hate crimes law!)

Those that had stood in transfixed legions weeping with beatific emotion on election night turned into an angry mob saying how "disappointed" they were that they'd not all immediately been translated to heaven the moment Obama stepped into the White House! Where was the "change"? Contrary to their expectations they were still mere mortals!

And the legion of young new supporters was too busy texting to pay attention for longer than a nanosecond. "Governing"?! What the hell does that word, uh, like mean?"

The President's critics left and right all had one thing in common: impatience laced with little-to-no sense of history (let alone reality) thrown in for good measure. Then of course there were the white, snide know-it-all commentators/talking heads who just couldn't imagine that maybe, just maybe they weren't as smart as they thought they were and certainly not as smart as their president. He hadn't consulted them, had he? So he must be wrong!

The Obama critics' ideological ideas defined their idea of reality rather than reality defining their ideas-say, about what is possible in one year in office after the hand that the President had been dealt by fate, or to be exact by the American idiot nation that voted Bush into office. twice!

Meanwhile back in the reality-based community – in just 12 short months President Obama:

● Continued to draw down the misbegotten war in Iraq (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Thoughtfully and decisively picked the best of several bad choices regarding the war in Afghanistan (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Gave a major precedent-setting speech supporting gay rights (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Restored America's image around the globe (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Banned torture of American prisoners (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Stopped the free fall of the American economy (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Put the USA squarely back in the bilateral international community (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Put the USA squarely into the middle of the international effort to halt global warming (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Stood up for educational reform (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Won a Nobel peace prize (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Moved the trial of terrorists back into the American judicial system of checks and balances (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Did what had to be done to start the slow, torturous and almost impossible process of health care reform that 7 presidents had failed to even begin (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Responded to hatred from the right and left ... with measured good humor and patience (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Stopped the free fall of job losses (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Showed immense personal courage in the face of an armed and dangerous far right opposition that included the sort of disgusting people that show up at public meetings carrying loaded weapons and carrying Timothy McVeigh-inspired signs about the "blood of tyrants" needing to "water the tree of liberty". (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)
● Showed that he could not only make the tough military choices but explain and defend them brilliantly (But that wasn't good enough for his critics)

Other than those "disappointing" accomplishments – IN ONE YEAR – President Obama "failed"! Other than that he didn't "live up to expectations"!

Who actually has failed...

...are the Americans that can't see the beginning of a miracle of national rebirth right under their jaded noses. Who failed are the smart ass ideologues of the left and right who began rooting for this President to fail so that they could be proved right in their dire and morbid predictions. Who failed are the movers and shakers behind our obscenely dumb news cycles that have turned "news" into just more stupid entertainment for an entertainment-besotted infantile country.

Here's the good news: President Obama is succeeding without the help of his lefty "supporters" or hate-filled Republican detractors!

The Future Looks Good

After Obama has served two full terms, (and he will), after his wisdom in moving deliberately and cautiously with great subtlety on all fronts - with a canny and calculating eye to the possible succeeds, (it will), after the economy is booming and new industries are burgeoning, (they will be), after the doomsayers are all proved not just wrong but silly: let the record show that not all Americans were panicked into thinking the sky was falling.

Just because we didn't get everything we wanted in the first short and fraught year Obama was in office not all of us gave up. Some of us stayed the course. And we will be proved right.

PS. if you agree that Obama is shaping up to be a great president, please pass this on and hang in there! Pass it on anyway to ensure that his "report card" gets the (we the people) attention it deserves.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


The Summons (below) was read and posted today by Lydia White Calf outside Westminster Cathedral in London, England where Pope Joseph Ratzinger held a mass. Later, more than 10,000 people marched through the streets, calling among other things for his arrest and trial. The Tribunal to which Ratzinger is being summoned will be convened in London on April 4, 2011. I had the honor of standing today in the midst of this joyous groundswell of justice in London. I was interviewed on major TV networks and the Reuters news service. Thank you one and all! The best is yet to come (including video coverage)! - Kevin Annett

Papal visit: thousands protest against Pope in London

The International Tribunal into
Crimes of Church and State

A Convening of a Forum of Justice under International and Common Law
Cause No. ITCCS 001 2011 UK, Docket 001 A


To: Joseph Ratzinger, aka The Pope and Pontiff of the Roman Catholic Church

BE ADVISED that you have been listed as a primary witness in an adjudication of a matter before this Court, which is a Tribunal of International and Indigenous Judges. Your presence is hereby requested on Monday, April 4, 2011 at 10:00 am, at a location to be disclosed, in the City of London, England.

Said Tribunal is convened pursuant to international Law, indigenous tribal Law, the Rule of Natural Law and the Law of Nations. Your presence is required to participate in the examination of issues and questions regarding the following matters and charges:

1. Your responsibility and liability as head of the Roman Catholic Church for the crimes of genocide, murder, warfare, forced removal from traditional lands, slave labour, institutionalized racism, theft of resources, child trafficking and pedophilia, and other crimes against indigenous peoples and children, arising from the Indian Residential School system in Canada established and maintained by Roman Catholic Church and the government of Canada.

2. Your failure to reply or respond to a public Letter of Demand issued to you from the Friends and Relatives of the Disappeared dated February 4, 2008, asking that you identify the burial sites and cause of death of children who died in Indian Residential Schools in Canada established and run by your church.

3. Your promulgation and enforcement of a policy of concealing and denying violence and rape against children within your Church, and your practice of actively concealing, protecting and aiding and abetting child rapists and other criminals within your Church, and of thereby perpetrating an international obstruction of justice.

You may desire to consult with your attorney in regards to this matter, or have an advocate attend the hearings with you. You may submit written documents and materials, but be advised that they do not carry the same weight, or can substitute for or replace, your personal testimony.

BE ADVISED that any failure by you to respond to this PUBLIC SUMMONS, or failure to attend this Tribunal, can be interpreted to mean that you do not dispute the charges made against you laid forth in this document and by witnesses and other material, and may result in a verdict against you made in absentia.

Due to the Nation to Nation status of this issue, involving the original Nations of the North American continent as holders of Allodial Title, and its concern with matters concerning internationally recognized Crimes against Humanity, this Tribunal and its findings will be monitored by human rights specialists and representatives of governments, International agencies, indigenous Nations and the public media.

This Tribunal will be open to the public and the media. Its officers will submit its findings in the form of a final comprehensive report to the United Nations High Commissioner for Human Rights, the International Criminal Court, and other bodies.

Duly Signed and Delivered this 18th Day of September, in the year 2010, in the City of London.

(signed in the original)

Royce White Calf, Elder
Oglala Lakota Nation
Acting Secretary, The International Tribunal into Crimes of Church and State
American Section: c/o 1000 Walker St., Unit 223, Holly Hill, Florida USA 32117
ITCCS Communication 002 2011 UK, Docket 002

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE

JON STEWART INTERVIEW WITH JESUS! - posted Monday, September 6, 2010


I woke up last night to the sound of laughing and realized I'd fallen asleep with the TV on. It was 3 AM and I knew it was Jon Stewart but I had to fumble around for my glasses to see who his guest was. Unbelievable! It was Jesus, in his robe and all. His nose was bigger than I thought, his skin a lot darker, but his eyes were more piercing than I'd ever imagined. It was like light came out instead of going into them.

Jon was making some joke about both of them being Jews and Jesus, after laughing harder than I thought he would, said quite seriously to Jon, "Yeah, that's one of the weirdest things, isn't it? How could they forget that?"

Jon was all over him with questions from the daily news. What was his take on the whole Mosque/Ground Zero fiasco? Jesus said he'd seen some newscasts on the story and couldn't believe the drama and fear it was bringing up. "They want to build a public building for prayer, education and community gathering. That's a good thing. A better thing perhaps, would be the construction of an interfaith building, There's room for everyone, and it's these distinctions between religions that's causing all the problems in the first place."

Jon looked incredulous. "An interfaith building??"

"Yes, a multi-tasking mosque, with a synagogue, chapel and meditation hall in it. A building where people of different faiths come together to make a better world together. That's the point of religion right? It's not about doctrine. It's a plan for action, an opportunity to be a bigger force for good. Religion is just the map. Faith is the real adventure."

"I don't know...." said Stewart, making one of those funny mouth movements he does after hearing a strange idea.

Jesus pipes in, "What could be better in that spot than a building that represents, by its very structure, a coming together, a new vision that goes beyond religious borders? It's like taking a good idea and making it great. The real prophets of the day know this. Where are their voices? Why aren't you interviewing them?"

"Hmm, I thought I was," says Stewart, tapping his pencil on the desk.

"You know why you have border issues here? Because you believe the borders are real, like they MEAN something. Muslin against Christian, Mexican against American, Republican against Democrat-all those borders are made up. You put up walls to defend your ideas-and not even your OWN, but ideas passed down to you from someone else-and then you make other people look like demons. It's no wonder this country is in a state of collapse. You don't even get it how connected you are. You're like five fingers on a hand who think they're separate and make up reasons why not to get along."

Jon sat there with his mouth open.

"You're like children playing war games. You spend all your time, all your energy attacking the "other side" instead of realizing you need to bridge the two sides in order to get across to a higher level  of thinking. Even news shows are at war. Look at how you make fun of FOX. What light does that add to the world? All the time you could be giving to real visionaries, all the ways you could be role-modeling good behavior, showing the audience how it really WORKS to bring great and opposing minds together, and you sit there poking fun at another station. That's really enlightened, isn't it?"

This was the first time I'd ever seen Jon Stewart speechless. He looked like an embarrassed 6th grader. No pencil tapping now. More like a puppy with his tail between his legs.

"What in the world are you people doing? The ones who call themselves "religious" are often the most immature, the most judgmental and intolerant. What is THAT about? That's exactly the opposite of what every religion teaches. And I mean EVERY religion,"

Jesus said, as he looked away from Stewart and spoke right to the camera.

"All the religions say two basic things," he said, holding up his fingers in a peace sign.

"First, there is no distance between you and this one you call God. God is the creative force behind all things. It's invisible, but you are the manifestation of it. I'm telling you, the Sistine Chapel should have been a mirror."

The audience laughs, but Stewart stares into those deep eyes of the Nazarene.

He goes on, " You are the eyes, the hands, the feet of that creative force. That energy is in you. It's called your breath." He holds up his index finger and taps on it a few times. "That's the first thing. Don't think there's some man out there pulling strings. Grow up. This civilization-if you can call it that-is YOUR creation. This earth, it is not a bunch of resources to be exploited. It is not to be owned. It is your mother, the womb that you sprang from. You are its consciousness, its neural cells. The whole earth is the organism that you belong to. You did not come down to earth, you came up from earth, as I did. Its well-being is in your hands. Can you be proud of what you're doing? Are you going to be the ones who kill it off, after all that talk about pro-life?"

Jesus was getting a little worked up, like that day he stormed through the temple turning over the merchants' tables. Jon cut to a commercial, "And we'll be right back to hear the 2nd basic thing from our guest tonight, ladies and gentlemen, the Jewish prophet Jesus of Nazareth. Stay tuned..."

They were laughing about something when they returned from the commercial, Jesus stretched out in his chair with his long lanky legs covered by his tunic, his sandaled feet hidden under the desk.

"OK," Jon says, "You were saying there were two things. Let me see if I got this right. There's no bearded guy up there on a cloud. That God we talk about and fight over is the creative force inside us and around us? It's invisible and we're like....(a long pause) its shadow?"

"Not exactly," says Jesus. We're like the physical form of the same energy. The ice cube version of water or steam. Same elements, different form. The sea and the iceberg. You're all icebergs in the Sea of God," he said, half-laughing at his own quaint metaphor. "But the problem is you don't realize that underneath it all, you're all connected. There's just one big iceberg with a lot of tips. The truth is, you're Creation continuing the co-creation of Itself."

"Oh my," says Stewart. "Let's leave that discussion to Bill Moyers, What about number two? What's the number two thing we're supposed to know?"

Jesus holds up his two fingers again, tapping the tip of his middle finger. The camera zoomed in so closely on him I could see a scar on his forehead. "It's not so much what you need to know-that's part of the problem, all these peoples' belief systems. That's what gets you in trouble. No one has to believe in me to get to heaven. A...there is no heaven to get to and B, it's not what you believe but how you act that matters. If anyone learned anything from reading that Bible they should have picked up that one. There's 3000 references to helping the poor in there.  But let me get back..."

"Yes," says Stewart. "The second thing.."

"The second thing is this: forget everything you ever learned in any holy book and just treat everyone like a brother and a sister. I mean that literally. If it were your brother coming across the border...your sister with cancer and no health care....your child unable to get an education....your mother with no food in her house. And even further, your brother who was gay or hated gays, your sister who was a corrupt politician, your brother who bombed an abortion clinic, your sister who got an abortion. What does it look like to love unconditionally? To bridge differences, to come together over what we can agree on? Can you get through one day without thinking you're better or less than another? That's the thing to strive for. That is living faithfully."

"But...but..." says Stewart. "What about the Tea Partyers, the terrorists, what about Fox News and hate crimes?"

"If you think they are so different from you, be the opposite of what you think they are and enact that powerfully in the world. Don't focus on who's wrong. Just be a greater force for good."

"Not focus on who's wrong? How could I do my show?"

"Exactly. Remember what Gandhi said? Be the change you want to see in the world?"

"Sure. I have that quotation on my refrigerator."

"Well, it's time to take it further. You're evolving as a people. You've come through the Dark Ages, the Middle Ages, the Renaissance, the wrongly named Period of Enlightenment. You're now in the Information Age. You are growing your consciousness. In the physical world, you have Olympic marathon trainers who run 10 miles or more a day. They spend every waking hour in training, eating the right foods, researching the right clothing and equipment, working out, following a discipline. And in the metaphysical world, the spiritual world, you have people doing the same-they are your mystics and prophets-engaging in spiritual practice, accelerating their wisdom, expanding their consciousness, transcending judgment and radiating love into the world. You might be in that category.,."

Stewart does one of his choking, ahem things, putting his hand over his mouth. "Out of the question," he says frankly. "I thrive on judgment."

"Good to know yourself. You're all evolving at different rates. In the fall, when you look at a maple tree, you see leaves that are green, yellow, orange and red. They don't all change at the same time. And that's what makes life exciting. You all know different things. That's why you need each other. Like that guy Ken Wilbur said, "You're all right, only partly so."

Stewart nods his head in agreement, tapping his pencil on the table again.

"But back to Gandhi. I agree with what he said, but I'll say it a different way, just to shake things up a bit, which I love to do. By the way, it'd make a great bumper sticker:

Be the God you want to see in the world."

"Oh-oh, sounds blasphemous to me," says Stewart.

"You know as well as I do, every good idea starts out as a blasphemy."

"OK, great, we're out of time," says Stewart, as the camera swings over for a shot of the audience. They're all standing, some crying and laughing at the same time, the most incredible look of collective awe I've ever seen. And Jesus walks over like Jay Leno and starts shaking hands with them. What a night!"

© Jan Phillips - September 3, 2010 -May happiness prevail...

Click to sign up for Jan's monthly Museletter


Just in from Jan at 6pm: Lots of you emailed asking for the youtube link to the Jon Stewart interview with Jesus. It's not on youtube because the show never happened. It only happened in my imagination and I reported it just as it occurred. Transcribed it right out of my journal. Glad you liked it (most of you anyway.)

Here's the link to the story on Huffington Post:

My favorite responses:

1. Holy cow! I gotta see that. Where can I find it??
P.S. Was it the real Jesus or a lookalike?

2. I think that you are taking things too far to stand there like a prophet dressed in white. Better that you should have had one against the wailing wall with a nice scarf around your head.

3. Your belief will bring ruin to the world.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE

LOVE BRINGS "DEAD" BABY BACK TO LIFE - Thursday, August 26, 2010

What a wonderful story. ONLY LOVE PREVAILS! Love does more than make the world go round. Read this true story of love which gave life to an prematurely born child.

Miracle mum brings premature baby son back to life with two hours of loving cuddles after doctors pronounce him dead!

It was a final chance to say goodbye for grieving mother Kate Ogg after doctors gave up hope of saving her premature baby. She tearfully told her lifeless son - born at 27 weeks weighing 2lb - how much she loved him and cuddled him tightly, not wanting to let him go. Although little Jamie's twin sister Emily had been delivered successfully, doctors had given Mrs Ogg the news all mothers dread - that after 20 minutes of battling to get her son to breathe, they had declared him dead.

baby survival

Awful moment: Kate and David clasp each other and their son Jamie, circled, after being told he did not survive the birth. They were given the child to say their goodbyes but then, miraculously, two hours later he began to show signs of life.

Jamie Ogg miracle baby

Signs of life: A smiling Kate holds Jamie after it becomes clear that her son is going to survive.

Having given up on a miracle, Mrs Ogg unwrapped the baby from his blanket and held him against her skin. And then an extraordinary thing happened. After two hours of being hugged, touched and spoken to by his mother, the little boy began showing signs of life. At first, it was just a gasp for air that was dismissed by doctors as a reflex action. But then the startled mother fed him a little breast milk on her finger and he started breathing normally. 'I thought, "Oh my God, what's going on",' said Mrs Ogg. 'A short time later he opened his eyes. It was a miracle. Then he held out his hand and grabbed my finger. He opened his eyes and moved his head from side to side. The doctor kept shaking his head saying, "I don't believe it, I don't believe it".'

Jamie Ogg miracle baby

Proud mum: Kate with son Jamie when they appeared on Australian TVl. The boy was born prematurely with twin sister Emily at 27 weeks.

Jamie Ogg miracle baby

Sweet slumber: Five-month-old Jamie sleeps in his mother's arms as she gives an account of his remarkable survival.

The Australian mother spoke publicly for the first time yesterday to highlight the importance of skin-on-skin care for sick babies, which is being used at an increasing number of British hospitals.

'He started gasping more and more regularly. I thought, "Oh my God, what's going on?" A short time later he opened his eyes. It was a miracle.'

In most cases, babies are rushed off to intensive care if there is a serious problem during the birth. But the 'kangaroo care' technique, named after the way kangaroos hold their young in a pouch next to their bodies, allows the mother to act as a human incubator to keep babies warm, stimulated and fed. Pre-term and low birth-weight babies treated with the skin-to-skin method have also been shown to have lower infection rates, less severe illness, improved sleep patterns and are at reduced risk of hypothermia.

Mrs. Ogg and her husband David told how doctors gave up on saving their son after a three-hour labour in a Sydney hospital in March.

Jamie Ogg miracle baby

All smiles: It was after Kate gave her son some of her breast milk on her finger that he began breathing regularly.

Enlarge   kangaroo care

'The doctor asked me had we chosen a name for our son,' said Mrs, Ogg. 'I said, "Jamie", and he turned around with my son already wrapped up and said, "We've lost Jamie, he didn't make it, sorry".

'It was the worse feeling I've ever felt. I unwrapped Jamie from his blanket. He was very limp. 'I took my gown off and arranged him on my chest with his head over my arm and just held him. He wasn't moving at all and we just started talking to him. 'We told him what his name was and that he had a sister. We told him the things we wanted to do with him throughout his life. 'Jamie occasionally gasped for air, which doctors said was a reflex action. But then I felt him move as if he were startled, then he started gasping more and more regularly. I gave Jamie some breast milk on my finger, he took it and started regular breathing.'

Mrs. Ogg held her son, now five months old and fully recovered, as she spoke on the Australian TV show Today Tonight. Her husband added: 'Luckily I've got a very strong, very smart wife. She instinctively did what she did. If she hadn't done that, Jamie probably wouldn't be here.'

Read more:

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Posted by Gordon Duff


By Gordon Duff STAFF WRITER/Senior Editor

How can a nation like the United States be duped into two wars and total bankruptcy? It would be one thing if the “truth” about 9/11 was internet conspiracy theory. This isn’t the case. It was all right there in everyone’s living room. They fooled us once and then fooled us again and again. Yes, America has some tail to kick but this time, maybe we should make sure our boot goes up the right rear end for a change.

The real hole in the Pentagon, before construction equipment enlarged it was so small a man had to duck his head to enter. For 9 years, this photograph was captioned “Second Floor.”  This photograph has a firefighter in the foreground and, unless gravity was suspended on 9/11, he is standing on the Pentagon’s lawn. Listen to CNN describe a crash site with no aircraft parts of any kind, seats, bodies, wings, engines, tail section….none of it. Can it be this simple?

YouTube - Veterans Today -

The CNN reporter at the Pentagon immediately after the “crash” found no aircraft debris.   After closing off the site, the next morning, huge pieces of plane were hauled away, pieces that weren’t in any of the photographs on 9/11.  I hate it when media stooges scripted by the real terrorists don’t check the time carefully enough.

YouTube - Veterans Today -

Watch a BBC reporter talk about a building collapsing that was still standing, actually with very little damage, right behind her.  Yes, Americans are that easy to lie to.

YouTube - Veterans Today -

Watch Larry Silverstein tell network news that WTC 7, the same virtually undamaged building was “pulled” by firefighters.  Since making this statement, no single individual, firefighter, 9/11 Commission member or anyone else has backed up this wild claim.  Need we mention that setting demolition charges alone would require weeks?

YouTube - Veterans Today -

Here, Dan Rather on CBS describes the collapse of Building 7 as “like films of controlled demolition we have seen, buildings deliberately destroyed by well placed dynamite….”

Some Americans are burning Korans to celebrate 9/11.  Some are deeply disturbed about an Islamic community center being built nearby.  If I might suggest, perhaps 9/11 might be better served as “hallowed ground” if it were a place of execution.  A great nation could transplant it’s mightiest oak to the site.  That hallowed oak and a few lengths of hemp used with intelligence and consideration on our enemies at home and abroad would best honor our dead.

Just a thought….

There is currently no conclusive forensic evidence that the airliners indicated nor the hijackers accused were ever involved in 9/11 in any way.

Perhaps worst of all, Fox News itself, released the following story indicating that 60 Israeli’s were arrested after 9/11, some active duty military who had advance knowledge of 9/11.  Later, the numer exceeded 200, tied to espionage and suspected terrorism.  Yes, the term “terrorism” is used.  All investigations were eventually quashed.  You can come to your own conclusions as to what is and isn’t being said.

YouTube - Veterans Today -

Yes, Americans are that dumb.  You wonder why our banks are empty.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


By: Ellen Brown, t r u t h o u t | News Analysis

Over 62 million mortgages are now held in the name of MERS, an electronic recording system devised by and for the convenience of the mortgage industry. A California bankruptcy court, following landmark cases in other jurisdictions, recently held that this electronic shortcut breaks the chain of title, voiding foreclosure. The logical result could be 62 million homes that are foreclosure proof.

In a Newsweek article a year ago called "Too Big to Jail: Why Prosecutors Won't Hit Wall Street Hard in the Subprime Scandal," Michael Hirsch wrote that we were unlikely to see trials and convictions like those in the savings and loan scandals of the 1980s, because fraud and blame have been so widespread that there is no one to single out and jail. Said Hirsch:

"The sad irony is that in pleading collective guilt, most of Wall Street will escape whipping for a scheme that makes Bernie Madoff's shenanigans look like pickpocketing. At the crest of the real-estate bubble, fraud was systemic and Wall Street had essentially gone into the loan-sharking business."

"Unfortunately," he added, "prosecution of fraud is the only way you're going to get reform on Wall Street."

Sure enough, a year later we got a banking reform bill that was so watered down that Wall Street got nearly everything it wanted. The too-big-to-fails, rather than being whittled down to size, have grown even bigger, circumventing antitrust laws; and they are being allowed to carry on pretty much as before. The Federal Reserve, rather than being called on the carpet, has been given even more power; and the Consumer Protection Agency - the main part of the bill with teeth - has been put under the Fed's watchful eye. Congress and the Justice Department seem to have bowed out, leaving no one to hold the finance industry to account.

But the best laid plans even of Wall Street can sometimes go awry. In an ironic twist, the industry may wind up tripping over its own Achilles heel, the Mortgage Electronic Registration Systems or MERS. An online computer software program for tracking mortgage ownership and rights, MERS is, according to its web site, "an innovative process that simplifies the way mortgage ownership and servicing rights are originated, sold and tracked. Created by the real estate finance industry, MERS eliminates the need to prepare and record assignments when trading residential and commercial mortgage loans." Or as Karl Denninger puts it, "MERS own website claims that it exists for the purpose of circumventing assignments and documenting ownership!"

MERS was developed in the early 1990s by a number of financial entities, including Bank of America, Countrywide, Fannie Mae, and Freddie Mac, allegedly to allow consumers to pay less for mortgage loans. That did not actually happen, but what MERS did allow was the securitization and shuffling around of mortgages behind a veil of anonymity. The result was not only to cheat local governments out of their recording fees, but to defeat the purpose of the recording laws, which was to guarantee purchasers clean title. Worse, MERS facilitated an explosion of predatory lending in which lenders could not be held to account because they could not be identified, either by the preyed-upon borrowers or by the investors seduced into buying bundles of worthless mortgages. As alleged in a Nevada class action called Lopez v. Executive Trustee Services, et al.:

"Before MERS, it would not have been possible for mortgages with no market value ... to be sold at a profit or collateralized and sold as mortgage-backed securities. Before MERS, it would not have been possible for the Defendant banks and AIG to conceal from government regulators the extent of risk of financial losses those entities faced from the predatory origination of residential loans and the fraudulent re-sale and securitization of those otherwise non-marketable loans. Before MERS, the actual beneficiary of every Deed of Trust on every parcel in the United States and the State of Nevada could be readily ascertained by merely reviewing the public records at the local recorder's office where documents reflecting any ownership interest in real property are kept.…

"After MERS, ... the servicing rights were transferred after the origination of the loan to an entity so large that communication with the servicer became difficult if not impossible... . The servicer was interested in only one thing - making a profit from the foreclosure of the borrower's residence - so that the entire predatory cycle of fraudulent origination, resale and securitization of yet another predatory loan could occur again. This is the legacy of MERS and the entire scheme was predicated upon the fraudulent designation of MERS as the 'beneficiary' under millions of deeds of trust in Nevada and other states."

MERS now holds over 62 million mortgages in its name, including over half of all new US residential mortgage loans. But courts are increasingly ruling that MERS is merely a nominee, without standing to foreclose on the collateral that makes up a major portion of the portfolios of some very large banks. It seems the banks claiming to be the real parties in interest may have short circuited themselves out of the chain of title entitling them to the collateral.

Many of our contributors have become unemployed or are struggling. Please help keep Truthout afloat if you can - click here to donate what you can afford.

Technicality or Fatal Flaw?

To foreclose on real property, the plaintiff must be able to produce a promissory note or assignment establishing title. Early cases focused on MERS' inability to produce such a note, but most courts continued to consider the note a mere technicality and ignored it. Landmark newer opinions, however, stress that this defect is not just a procedural. but a substantive failure, one that is fatal to the plaintiff's case.

The latest of these decisions came down in California on May 20, 2010, in a bankruptcy case called In re Walker, Case no. 10-21656-E-11. The court held that MERS could not foreclose because it was a mere nominee and that as a result plaintiff Citibank could not collect on its claim. The judge opined:

"Since no evidence of MERS' ownership of the underlying note has been offered and other courts have concluded that MERS does not own the underlying notes, this court is convinced that MERS had no interest it could transfer to Citibank. Since MERS did not own the underlying note, it could not transfer the beneficial interest of the Deed of Trust to another. Any attempt to transfer the beneficial interest of a trust deed without ownership of the underlying note is void under California law."

In support, the judge cited In re Vargas (California Bankruptcy Court), Landmark v. Kesler (Kansas Supreme Court), LaSalle Bank v. Lamy (a New York case) and In re Foreclosure Cases (the "Boyko" decision from Ohio Federal Court). (For more on these earlier cases, see here, here and here.) The court concluded:

"Since the claimant, Citibank, has not established that it is the owner of the promissory note secured by the trust deed, Citibank is unable to assert a claim for payment in this case."

The broad impact the case could have on California foreclosures is suggested by attorney Jeff Barnes, who writes:

"This opinion ... serves as a legal basis to challenge any foreclosure in California based on a MERS assignment; to seek to void any MERS assignment of the Deed of Trust or the note to a third party for purposes of foreclosure; and should be sufficient for a borrower to not only obtain a TRO [temporary restraining order] against a Trustee's Sale, but also a Preliminary Injunction barring any sale pending any litigation filed by the borrower challenging a foreclosure based on a MERS assignment."

While not binding on courts in other jurisdictions, the ruling could serve as persuasive precedent there as well, because the court cited nonbankruptcy cases related to the lack of authority of MERS, and because the opinion is consistent with prior rulings in Idaho and Nevada Bankruptcy courts on the same issue.

RICO and Fraud Charges

Other suits go beyond merely challenging title to alleging criminal activity. On July 26, 2010, a class action was filed in Florida seeking relief against MERS and an associated legal firm for racketeering and mail fraud. It alleges that the defendants used "the artifice of MERS to sabotage the judicial process to the detriment of borrowers"; that "to perpetuate the scheme, MERS was and is used in a way so that the average consumer, or even legal professional, can never determine who or what was or is ultimately receiving the benefits of any mortgage payments"; that the scheme depended on "the MERS artifice and the ability to generate any necessary 'assignment' which flowed from it"; and that "by engaging in a pattern of racketeering activity, specifically 'mail or wire fraud,' the Defendants ... participated in a criminal enterprise affecting interstate commerce."

Local governments deprived of filing fees may also be getting into the act, at least through representatives suing on their behalf. Qui tam actions allow for a private party or "whistle blower" to bring suit on behalf of the government for a past or present fraud on it. In State of California ex rel. Barrett R. Bates, filed May 10, 2010, the plaintiff qui tam sued on behalf of a long list of local governments in California against MERS and a number of lenders, including Bank of America, JPMorgan Chase and Wells Fargo, for "wrongfully bypass[ing] the counties' recording requirements; divest[ing] the borrowers of the right to know who owned the promissory note ...; and record[ing] false documents to initiate and pursue non-judicial foreclosures and to otherwise decrease or avoid payment of fees to the Counties and the Cities where the real estate is located." The complaint notes that "MERS claims to have 'saved' at least $2.4 billion dollars in recording costs," meaning it has helped avoid billions of dollars in fees otherwise accruing to local governments. The plaintiff sues for treble damages for all recording fees not paid during the past ten years and for civil penalties of between $5,000 and $10,000 for each unpaid or underpaid recording fee and each false document recorded during that period, potentially a hefty sum. Similar suits have been filed by the same plaintiff qui tam in Nevada and Tennessee.

Axing the Bankers' Money Tree

Most courts continue to look the other way on MERS' lack of standing to sue, but the argument has picked up enough steam to consider the rather stunning implications. If MERS is not the title holder of properties held in its name, the chain of title has been broken and no one may have standing to sue. In MERS v. Nebraska Department of Banking and Finance, MERS insisted that it had no actionable interest in title, and the court agreed.

An August 2010 article in Mother Jones titled "Fannie and Freddie's Foreclosure Barons" exposes a widespread practice of "foreclosure mills" in backdating assignments after foreclosures have been filed. Not only is this perjury, a prosecutable offense, but if MERS was never the title holder, there is nothing to assign. The defaulting homeowners could wind up with free and clear title.

In Florida, Jacksonville Area Legal Aid attorney April Charney has been using the missing-note argument ever since she first identified that weakness in the lenders' case in 2004. Five years later, she says, some of those homeowners are still in their homes. According to a Huffington Post article titled "'Produce the Note' Movement Helps Stall Foreclosures":

"Because of the missing ownership documentation, Charney is now starting to file quiet title actions, hoping to get her homeowner clients full title to their homes (a quiet title action 'quiets' all other claims). Charney says she's helped thousands of homeowners delay or prevent foreclosure and trained thousands of lawyers across the country on how to protect homeowners and battle in court."

If courts overwhelmed with foreclosures decide to take up the cause, the result could be millions of struggling homeowners with the banks off their backs and millions of homes no longer on the books of some too-big-to-fail banks. Without those assets, the banks could again be looking at bankruptcy, as was pointed out in a San Francisco Chronicle article by attorney Sean Olender following the October 2007 Boyko decision:

"The ticking time bomb in the US banking system is not resetting subprime mortgage rates. The real problem is the contractual ability of investors in mortgage bonds to require banks to buy back the loans at face value if there was fraud in the origination process.

"... The loans at issue dwarf the capital available at the largest US banks combined and investor lawsuits would raise stunning liability sufficient to cause even the largest US banks to fail...."

Nationalization of these giant banks might be the next logical step - a step that some commentators said should have been taken in the first place. When the banking system of Sweden collapsed following a housing bubble in the 1990s, nationalization of the banks worked out very well for that country.

The Swedish banks were largely privatized again when they got back on their feet, but it might be a good idea to keep some banks as publicly-owned entities, on the model of the Commonwealth Bank of Australia. For most of the 20th century, it served as a "people's bank," making low interest loans to consumers and businesses through branches all over the country.

With the strengthened position of Wall Street following the 2008 bailout and the tepid 2010 banking reform bill, the US is far from nationalizing its mega-banks now. But a committed homeowner movement to tear off the predatory mask called MERS could yet turn the tide. While courts are not likely to let 62 million homeowners off scot-free, the defect in title created by MERS could give them significant new leverage at the bargaining table.

Ellen Brown developed her research skills as an attorney practicing civil litigation in Los Angeles. In "Web of Debt," her latest book, she turns those skills to an analysis of the Federal Reserve and “the money trust.” She shows how this private cartel has usurped the power to create money from the people themselves, and how we the people can get it back. Her eleven books include Forbidden Medicine, Nature’s Pharmacy (co-authored with Dr. Lynne Walker), and The Key to Ultimate Health (co-authored with Dr. Richard Hansen). Her websites are,, and

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


"Much of life can never be explained but only witnessed" ~ Rachel Naomi Remen, MD

NAIROBI (AFP): A baby hippopotamus that survived the tsunami waves on the Kenyan coast has formed a strong bond with a giant male century-old tortoise in an animal facility in the port city of Mombassa officials said. The hippopotamus, nicknamed Owen and weighing about 300 kilograms (650 pounds), was swept down Sabaki River into the Indian Ocean, then forced back to shore when tsunami waves struck the Kenyan coast on December 26, before wildlife rangers rescued him.

"It is incredible. A less-than-a-year-old hippo has adopted a male tortoise, about a century old, and the tortoise seems to be very happy with being a 'mother'," ecologist Paula Kahumbu, who is in charge of Lafarge Park, told AFP.

"After it was swept away and lost its mother, the hippo was traumatized. It had to look for something to be a surrogate mother. Fortunately, it landed on the tortoise and established a strong bond. They swim, eat and sleep together," the ecologist added. "The hippo follows the tortoise exactly the way it followed its mother. If somebody approaches the tortoise, the hippo becomes aggressive, as if protecting its biological mother," Kahumbu added.

"The hippo is a young baby, he was left at a very tender age and by nature, hippos are social animals that like to stay with their mothers for four years," he explained.

"Life is not measured by the number of breaths we take, but by the moments that take our breath away."

This is a real story that shows that our differences don't matter much when we need the comfort of another. We could all learn a lesson from these two creatures of God. "Look beyond the differences and find a way to walk the path together."

Save the Earth... it's the only planet with chocolate.
"Those who bring sunshine into the lives of others, cannot keep it from themselves."

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


By Xavier Hermes: Saturday, 24-Jul-2010 15:09:04

A few days back I was awakened at about 1.00 a.m. in the morning, with the beginning 'buzz' of an incoming communication. This has not happened for a while. I went to my computer and started to type, not knowing where the words were to take me. In actuality they connect to some deeply esoteric work that a small group of us have been engaged in for a few months, and where we took our latest initiative only this last week (see the end of this article for hints!). This seems to be almost an announcement, fascinating in its time-proximity and content. All we need to do now is manifest its delivery! Read below to see what I mean…Xavier Hermes

There is an upcoming event that begins and ends with a new cosmic sound that will resonate through our local Universe. The Bible refers to it as ‘The Word’, and it sets the tone for the whole of our physically manifested reality. This sound is also a key that allows many energy structures of a controlling nature that have long been locked in place to become unlocked and set aside. It is related to ‘the music of the spheres’ which is generally understood to denote the frequencies of various planetary bodies, forming a kind of musical scale. This cosmic sound is the key note of the scale that the spheres represent. The scale is also one related to the advancing of consciousness. Different levels of consciousness are arranged along and activated by this scale. The new sound replaces one of a lower frequency, and in so doing it moves the whole scale upwards. By activating a new consciousness structure it invites and enables a return to full consciousness for all of humanity.

Here on Earth, there is indeed an expectation of an event in the near future that will have a sudden and highly beneficial change effect. Many and various sources are predicting it, using all kinds of languaging. This is a single moment event that will be quite different in its impact from the daily escalating effects of the evolutionary pressures currently upon us - however much they may escalate and whatever changes they activate. This ‘key sound’ we refer to is sudden, happening, as the bible says, ‘in the twinkling of an eye’.

Veils will be rent asunder; old energy-based humanity-control systems will finally collapse; that which is a containment for humanity – with all its embedded programming of separation and dumbing down - will no longer be effective. The long battle for the souls of humanity will have been won, and we shall start to ‘have our true selves back’.

The great shift that has been held back, and held back, and held back to build it’s potential will happen as this cosmic sound arrives, and in an instant all will change, huge potentials will be released. The Earth and its planetary environment will never be the same. The Universe will never be the same either, for Earth represents the bottom rung of the consciousness ladder for fully sentient beings, indeed, it is the very densest and most challenging environment that beings like us, built to the human blueprint which exists all over our Universe, have ever survived in. Every other level of consciousness is ‘layered’ above that Earth base consciousness point along the scale that we refer to. If (as will now happen) the base level is allowed to rise dramatically, then all others will do the same. The whole scale will have shifted upwards, a new tone having been set, and it will effect every aspect of physicality.

This event is not tied in to 2012. Although it could happen after 2012, it is essentially imminent. Humanity itself is a large part of what will trigger this, and bring it forward – and humanity, as calibrated by its mass consciousness, is now more than ready to move, to make the jump. The required critical mass has already been established.

This jump is hugely profound. David Iyke comments that it takes us from a frequency set that is, for us, the lowest of all survivable levels, to the highest frequency that beings like us, still in physical bodies, can inhabit. Many ascensions have happened before in other places, but the size of the probable jump is why this ascension is unique. Our frequencies were, at the time of High Atlantis, well above where they are now. The fall was, in large part, engineered by outside forces (though humanity was not entirely blameless in what happened), and it has contributed massively to what has been learned on our subsequent journey.

For the reason of this gross outside interference we have been given a dispensation to jump back to where we were…or much higher (which is what is most likely). Already, in the last couple of years, the mass consciousness on our planet has leapt forward profoundly, yet it has much further to go, and in very short order, and the new tone sweeping our physical Universe enables this.

One of the powerful elements that has held humanity back is a system by which that thought-form called by some ‘the Illuminati Agenda’, essentially a suite of negative programming, has been constantly broadcast at us. We cannot simply ignore this, because well over half of humanity has been fitted (against our collective will) with a symbiotic energy structure that acts as a receptor, placed low in the back of the head, which ensures that we ‘keep on listening’. It is a kind of living and reproducing implant which is passed down the generations, although it does deteriorate after a few such until it finally needs replacing. It is those of us who are the now the distant descendants of the cross-breeding between man and the Annunaki that are especially vulnerable to this implant (which cross-breeding also denotes that well over half of us here are hybrid humans). The broadcast programming effectively 'runs interference' through our intellect, amongst other things, over-ruling the heart in matters of our judgement and understanding.

The insertion and reinforcing of this negative programming of the Illuminati Agenda is what keeps us separating into ‘tribal and cultural’ groups; it is what keeps us fighting; it is the source of many unnaturally low frequency thoughts and actions that cause who we really are (naturally much higher frequency incarnated beings) to be hidden behind and over-run by imposed low-level programming. The whole program system is designed to bring us down and keep us down.

A second factor is bringing these imposed control systems to an end. A few month back I posted an article called ‘Throwing Away the Ace’. It is about the Illuminasti inserting all sorts of memes and social / religious taboos to make sure that we surfs don’t start using our magic – because the Illuminasti are highly vulnerable if we do. So, a group of people took this on board and realised that our magic (which, coming from a higher frequency than the Illuminasti’s, will out-gun them) needed to be fully invoked in service to the whole. I shall re-post that article as an attachment to this one.

As a result of this decision to invoke our magic in service to the whole, a powerful group of people designed, specially constructed and commissioned a team of intelligent entities, working for the light – a team that is rapidly disassembling the whole illuminasti agenda broadcast and control system. The group of humans, using a technology that the Illuminasti use for negative control, have adapted it to create these powerful entities entirely dedicated to protecting the emerging light and the ascension process. They are like veritable bulldozers in the face of energetic opposition, and are ever more empowered by the energies that are ranged against them, which they absorb and utilise for their own operation.

Over the next month these Illuminasti broadcast control systems will simply cease to exist, their many broadcast points (both on and off planet) both the physical and enery-structure elements having been destroyed. As I check with my dowsing the program is nearing completion at over 85%. The receptors within many of us have been adapted to allow us to receive our true, higher heart qualities (a God-level broadcast we have been largely cut off from) and once again fill the space that has been occupied by the low level control program with something far more noble; far more appropriate to who we truly are. These are the six heart qualities first brought back to our attention by the wingmakers.

The six qualities (for those few who are not already familiar with them) are:

Appreciation: Showing gratitude and thankfulness as a positive emotion or attitude in acknowledgment of the soul-growth potential of all aspects of the world around us and in those challenges we face

Compassion: Being a deep awareness of and sympathy for another's suffering, the humane quality of understanding the suffering of others and wanting to do something about it

Forgiveness: The process of setting aside resentment, indignation or anger as a result of a perceived offence, difference or mistake, and/or ceasing to demand punishment or restitution.

Humility: The quality of being modest, reverential, even politely submissive, and never being arrogant, contemptuous or rude

Understanding: Showing comprehension of a situation or attitude while being discerning about it and empathetic towards others involved

Valour: Strength of mind in regard to danger; that quality which enables a person to encounter danger with firmness; personal bravery; courage; prowess; intrepidity;

The actual words for each of these qualities has it’s own frequency, rather like the ‘musical’ scale referred to above, and especially when spoken out loud and with clear intent. They have been largely in dissonance with the old and long-running Illuminasti agenda programs, but they will be entirely in harmony with that which is released by the New Tone. Each of these qualities are a part of the cosmic scale mentioned at the beginning of this article. The action to re-establish these higher qualities through entities engineered for the task has been consciously taken by human beings, and draws the power to do so from our collective consciousness. The cosmic unlocking, the sound that is arriving shortly corroborates and reinforces this action. Between the two, my strong sense is that humanity’s move back to who we really are really cannot be stopped.

And it is happening, fully in play, right now.

Xavier Hermes – -
Throwing Away the Ace - the Illuminasti really don't want you using your magic!

NOTE from Ron: Look at these commonly accepted New Age and New Thought beliefs and see if they are serving the Highest Good or not.

In Response To: Illuminasti's consciousness control systems being de-activated: Upcoming 'Tone' changes physical reality permanently (X_Hermes)

A repost and re-edit from a few months back. XH


Now, this may be a little controversial – and healthy if it is!

I am very well aware of those teachings that tell us that, to the extent that we can move forward and hold higher energies, we must concentrate on this task as it helps to raise the whole. I have written about this extensively over the years, having received what to me is very sound guidance of good integrity on the subject: but, there is a problem in there somewhere, one that I sense is really of key importance.

The Illuminasti are past masters at creating confusion (since it is a powerful part of their ‘divide and rule’ philosophy). Often, in governmental legislation drawn up by their embedded agents, a directive will appear on one page, only to be directly contradicted on another. In that it gets lots of people spinning and frustrated, the confusion so created makes a platform for the next move – which, of course, is likely to be yet another piece of manipulation. Take this general ‘sowing confusion’ approach as a theme / technique that appears in many other places. Close to home, they will often set one piece of spiritual wisdom directly against another – both seeming eminently reasonable – and have exactly the same effect of leaving us spinning and frustrated. And disempowered.

Also, they like to seed ‘memes’ – ideas that run through whole sectors of the population, often ideas that seem quite reasonable, but actually manipulate in a subtle way. Some of these memes (the ‘spiritual’ ones) can be paired against actual wisdoms = the same effect again. I sense that much ‘New Age’ and spiritual thinking has been and is littered with such memes, although, to date, I have only spotted a few.

Back to the topic in hand.

I am quite certain that a key element of our spiritual journey up through frequency is the progressive move from ‘service to self’ to ‘service to the whole’. I do not have any doubts about this – and I believe this kind of service (however it looks to the individual) can be given without putting ones frequency at risk. As long as we are aware that there are always risks that can, indeed, diminish our frequencies, and protect ourselves accordingly.

As an ex-trekkie I remember the Borg in Star Trek – perhaps you do too? These high tech hive-cubes floated through space absorbing every life-form they came across. The while, they broadcast the terrifying phrase ‘resistance is futile….’ A great piece of intimidation, highly effective – few would turn and fight them.

Now, lets imagine another warring group, here on Earth and claiming an absolutely dominant position (even though their numbers are tiny). Yep, you’ve got it – the Illuminasti. Their greatest fear is ascending humanity coming into its power, against which they have no defence – and they know it. Just like the Borg, they are putting out the message / meme that says:

• Don’t look back
• You are only responsible for yourself and your own frequency
• Don’t resist or engage
• Never focus on negative things (= their works and intent), you will only give it / them energy
• You (as a spiritually elite group) have now been separated onto a higher path, don’t worry about the others they can now take their own paths
• The Illuminati are defeated, you don’t have to worry about them
• And so forth.

These are all so very, very close to the truth, but


Much too close to the Borg’s ‘resistance is futile’ position for my liking. After all, if you were the Illuminasti on one side of the war, and you could get your opposition (= us) to simply roll over, you would be delighted. Saves so much efforting! And the opposition, us, would be completely subjugated in the process.

This whole scenario stands four-square against the ‘service to the whole’ which I take to be an imperative of our evolutionary journey.

We are in the ultimate asymmetrical war. It is a war over the evolution (or not) of the human soul on planet Earth – this means us, and there is no way we can simply duck out. The Illuminasti come at the population with poisoning, chemtrails, wars, monetary collapses, homeland security, etc, etc – you know the menu well. Its all the old 3D stuff. One of their weapons of choice is the artificially generated frequency (range) used for dumbing down, agitating, creating suicidal feelings, etc. HAARP, Radio masts, TV frequencies, mobiles are all a part of this.

But, this is where the asymmetry comes in: we hold a powerful trump card that they cannot have – the absolute ultimate frequency weapon, which gets ever more potent as our own frequencies rise. We are gifted with the power to create, seal off, mirror back, decree against – and many other frequency-based techniques. Yes, we have to learn the way, but used in a context of high integrity, there is no reason why the use of such techniques should damage our own frequencies. Indeed, acting in integrity, and with a pure heart, my understanding is that the spiritual warrior will actually increase personal frequency while doing the warrior’s work

This is surely about RIGHT ACTION. The key message is not about not acting for our ‘spiritual welfare’ – that is the Illuminasti meme I believe is running: it IS about taking real action in a form that does not sacrifice the frequencies of those spiritual warriors who are able to engage, choosing to be involved and being pro-active. Maybe, direct action is not for everybody, but for me, in the context of the need for service to the whole, what is really out of integrity is:

• Not looking back but leaving the others to their fate (= another pawn off the board)
• Being selfishly responsible for ourselves and our own frequencies to the exclusion of what is happening to others ( “ )
• Not being willing to resist or engaging in the face of great crimes against humanity ( “ )
• Being not prepared to focus on negative things (= the collected works of the Illuminasti) so as to understand what is being done and find ways to negate the many despicable moves being made against humanity (= the whole)
• Believing that we (as an evolving spiritual elite) have now been rewarded by being separated onto a higher path, so we don’t need to worry about the others as they can now take their own paths which will be completely appropriate for them (= we are very ‘off the hook’! and disabled in the process.)
• Believing that Illuminati are defeated, so we don’t have to worry about them. (they are, in fact, exceedingly dangerous right to the very last moment – especially as they sense that they are loosing!)

We don’t need to engage in a forever battle, but to keep helping the rearguard as we move on upwards. It affects the nature and extent of our ascension, and what we finally succeed in creating as our New Reality.

Meanwhile, the poor, sensitive, misunderstood and downtrodden Illuminasti would like us to throw our ace away, please.

Yeah, right!

Xavier Hermes

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Fulfillment of the Cosmic Plan will require YOU to step up to the Role of Co-Creator with this Divine Plan (YES YOU) We Are The Ones We Have Been Waiting For!

By Dr. Carl J. Calleman,

In recent years there has been a radically increased interest in the Mayan calendar and especially its end and so many ask what this tells us about the future. Surprisingly, many people ask this question as if the answer had nothing to do with themselves or the choices they make. Few seem to have considered that the fulfillment of the cosmic plan will require of them to step up to the role of co-creators with this divine plan. This is not to say that human beings can just create anything they want at any point in time. The waves of consciousness brought by the Mayan calendar still defines the framework of our existence and what we may or may not be able to create in any given era. Yet, only the creativity that is consistent with a new wave will be favored and this will again be evident as we enter the ninth, and highest, wave of the Mayan calendar system. It is thus pertinent to ask what consciousness the ninth wave will create and what it will require of us to be able to step up to becoming co-creators with this wave.

To address this we need to consult the ancient Maya and look at their only inscription, which describes the meaning of the end of their calendar, the Tortuguero Monument 6. This says that at that point in time the nine-step entity, Bolon Yookte, (Fig 1) will “descend.”* What this means in a more straight language is that a combination of nine cosmic forces, nine wave movements, will simultaneously manifest fully. In this ancient Mayan way of looking at the meaning of the end of the calendar there is thus nothing that speaks of an end to the world. Rather, what the end of the calendar system is all about is a completion, or fulfillment, of evolutionary processes that have been going on from the beginning of time and led the world to what it is today.

These nine cosmic forces are the nine evolutionary progressions (Underworlds), each through thirteen energies that the prophetic Mayan calendar system is made up from, a system, which significant events in biological and historical evolution correlate extremely well with. The different progressions each develop a different frame of consciousness and currently we are most strongly influenced by the eighth wave. It is however the ninth and highest of these wave movements that will bring about the final shift to unity consciousness that will culminate as the calendar comes to an end. I feel it is imperative to realize that these nine cosmic forces are not acting separately from the human beings, but through their influence on us and so they will only manifest inasmuch as the humans align with them. I feel we also need to consider that the co-creation of this highest level requires that we are truly committed to its purpose. It is in preparation of this somewhat mysterious ninth wave that I am encouraging the celebration of the Conscious Convergence, July 17-18, 2010, as a point to focus on aligning with the highest and decisive wave of the Mayan calendar system, the ninth wave.

Many people have an intuitive sense that the end of the Mayan calendar will bring a shift in consciousness. Yet, it is rarely clearly stated or explained exactly what is the source of such a shift, how it will happen or what would be its nature. Maybe however shifts in consciousness are actually a little less mysterious than many people tend to believe. In fact, shifts in consciousness have been happening from the beginning of time and continue to happen whenever there is a significant energy shift in the Mayan calendar, such as between any of its days and nights.

Fig 1. The Cosmic Pyramid, or the nine-step-god (Bolon Yookte), whose nine waves will simultaneously manifest as the Mayan calendar comes to an end.

Despite all these previous shifts in cosmic history I feel however that there is something very special and significant with the new consciousness that may be expected to be generated by the ninth wave.

To begin with, for all that we know it is designed to bring a shift to unity consciousness where the human mind no longer will be dominated by any dark filter (see Fig 2). We will in other words become “transparent” and I believe this is the particular consciousness – seeing reality the way it is with no separation - that so many are waiting for. Not just any consciousness, but one that transcends the dualities of the past and aids the human beings to see the unity of all things. The reason that this kind of unity consciousness can be beneficial to the planet, and to mankind, is that it is one that leads to the transcendence of all separation (between man and woman, man and nature, ruler and ruled, east and west, etc). I feel that without the manifestation of such a shift in consciousness the world will sooner or later come to an end. People with a dualist and separating consciousness are somewhat like cancer cells in the body of the Earth with little regard to its larger whole and would eventually generate a collapse of its ecosystem. Only a shift to unity consciousness will forever stop the unchecked exploitation of the Earth and on a deeper level make us understand that we are part of creation and need to live in harmony with it. But will such a shift just happen automatically?

Fig 2. Yin/Yang-polarities of the Human Mind created by the Five Highest Waves of the Cosmic Pyramid (Bolon Yookte).

As mentioned above global consciousness shifts have their origin in the resonance with the cosmic forces described by the Mayan calendar. Hence, even though some may temporarily have experienced altered states of consciousness it is only in as much as a shift is induced in accordance with the cosmic plan, as we may understand this from the Mayan calendar, that it will be here to stay. Thus, only with the ninth wave may a shift to unity consciousness be regarded as something whose time has truly come. This is the wave that will cap off all of the previous evolution of mankind and build the bridge that will allow us to enter the new world that will follow upon the end of the calendar.

On the other hand the student of the Mayan calendar will know that in order for a consciousness shift to manifest the human beings must be in resonance with it and at some point at least subconsciously have made a choice to align with. Hence, a large-scale consciousness shift is not something that can happen against the will of the human beings. Especially at the highest levels of evolution, such as the ninth, it can only happen through human beings that choose to serve as co-creators. Unfortunately many have been led to believe that there is some physical event to wait for, such as a pole shift, Nibiru, sun flares, or a galactic alignment, resulting in a passive attitude that has made the Mayan calendar seem disempowering and events as being outside of their power to influence. I believe however that, as the Hopi are saying, “we are the ones that we have been waiting for.” If we make the commitment to do so we can co-create unity consciousness with the ninth wave.

As many readers of this article may have experienced there are spiritual practices, healing techniques and methods for personal development that in fact do cause temporary shifts in consciousness and the experience of unity of all things. Yet, what seems to be missing for such transformations to play a positive role on a larger scale is the commitment of a critical mass of people to create a world based on such unity consciousness. The idea behind the Conscious Convergence, July 17-18, 2010, is thus to create a powerful intention to do so. There is in fact one thing that is always in our power to do – and in the power of all human beings to do - and this is to intend to create and manifest unity consciousness. As the student of the law of attraction will know, all manifestation begins with an intention and without an intention there is no result.

The Conscious Convergence – A Wave of Unity is thus for all those who intend to manifest unity consciousness. (It may be important to point out that it is not about intending any shift of consciousness, but one to unity consciousness). It is for those who authentically will say: “I intend to manifest unity consciousness.” Whatever you believe in, whatever worldview you have, it is still in your power to intend such a shift for yourself and others. The proposed dates are timely for setting the intention to do so in that it leads up to a manifestation of unity consciousness during the ninth wave in alignment with the cosmic plan. Without such a widespread intention it is doubtful whether there will ever be such a shift on this planet either individually or collectively.

Based on the creation of such an intention in the Conscious Convergence it seems natural that people will also want to perform ceremonies and participate in spiritual practices that are manifestations of such a unity consciousness and seek whatever ways are possible to make permanent its results. In fact the Conscious Convergence should be looked upon as the beginning of a process toward deepened unity consciousness that never stops. This is the kind of commitment that I believe will be required. For those desiring to fulfill the cosmic plan, the Conscious Convergence should be an entry point to co-creating the ninth wave and something we should never want to drop out of. To start following the Mayan calendar on a daily basis from this point within the framework provided by the Ninth wave may in fact by itself be a significant factor for developing unity consciousness. Only with deadlines do projects become real and the calendar provides us with a time frame within which this is to be accomplished.

It seems important that manifestations linked to the Conscious Convergence are planned very carefully and express this new unity consciousness so that they are not just thoughtlessly applied expressions of the old world we have been living in. If, for instance, artistic performances are part of the celebration, it seems wise to consider whether these are enhancing the experience of unity of all or if they create an experience of separation between the artists and the audience. The same may apply to the performance of ceremonies if the leader is not truly inclusive. A good example of a ceremony that is an expression of unity consciousness is in my mind when Jack Sully in Avatar is taken up as a member of the people of Pandora. Furthermore, if for the generation of unity consciousness valuable spiritual practices are used it may be considered whether irrelevant worship of founders or gurus can be excluded. Maybe silent and low key common practices are in fact the most powerful manifestations of unity consciousness, but regardless it is important that participants walk their talk and do not recreate dominance structures. How to do this would be for local organizers to decide and here it is only emphasized the importance of approaching this issue with fresh eyes and much attention paid to details.

The name Conscious Convergence alludes to the Harmonic Convergence, a mind-opening gathering on August 17-18, 1987 (1 Imix and 2 Ik) and so it is important to point out the relationship between the two and why after so many years there is a second one, July 17-18, 2010 (13 Eb and 1 Ben)**. The important commonality between the two Convergences is that they both are (essentially) placed in time at a doubling of the 8th and 9th wave movements of the Mayan calendar and hence reflect energy shifts that herald the respective transformations of consciousness brought by these waves. Put in other terms: What the Harmonic Convergence meant to the quantum jump to the eighth wave the Conscious Convergence will mean to the quantum jump to the ninth wave.*** (Hence, it can be understood as a 2nd Harmonic Convergence). Or, if we include the seventh wave and its pre-wave (see Fig 3) for comparison, we may see that it will mean to the preparation for the ninth wave what the European Renaissance meant to the quantum jump to the modern world of industrialism. What is different now, and a challenge for the Conscious Convergence, is that this step cannot be said to be in the interest of separate individuals, but rather of all of humanity.

Fig 3. The three highest waves of the cosmic pyramid and their preparatory waves (in different scales). Examples of how the visions at the beginning of the pre-wave prepares for the full wave consider how the many inventions (on paper) by Leonardo da Vinci around 1498 presaged the real industrial inventions of the 7th wave or how the Harmonic Convergence presaged the much increased interest in the Mayan calendar in the 8th wave.

From these parallels (Fig 3) we may see that the Conscious Convergence is not by itself the beginning of the ninth wave, which does not start until Mar 9, 2011.**** Rather this celebration initiates a wave, a pre-wave, that precedes and paves the ground for the ninth wave and directly leads into it. The Conscious Convergence is thus tremendously important as a point for creating the intention of unity consciousness even if this will only be fully developed later with the ninth wave. Maybe it will in fact be humanity’s last chance of setting such an intention, which almost with necessity must exist at an early point if we are to elevate ourselves above the economic chaos that we may expect in the years ahead. In my own view the hope for the future lies exactly in learning to surf on this ninth wave and so transcending, rather than getting caught up in, all the dualities and conflicts of lower Underworlds. If this is so it must also be expected that the Conscious Convergence will meet with much resistance from all those forces that are defending the ego-based operation of the old world and the massive hierarchies this has generated. As a small example of this a commercial media industry has now emerged around ”2012” where it is speculated about what is going to happen as if this were independent of the intentions and creative direction people choose. Naturally we will also come to be faced with our own cynicism and apathy towards the state of the world and thoughts will come back to us as: “this is not possible”, “the world will not change”, etc and it is for this reason a strong commitment will be needed.

The Conscious Convergence is meant to be a very inclusive event that can be embraced by everyone who intends the emergence of unity consciousness regardless of his or her views about the Mayan calendar or otherwise. It is about positively and constructively using a window of opportunity and so participation in this only requires an insight that the consciousness shift must come out of the evolutionary processes that we are currently part of. Thus, a shift to unity consciousness is not something that will simply drop down on us from the sky at some date in the future, but can only evolve from the point where we are at the present moment. It is a basic tenet of the law of attraction that providence only moves when you are committed and so far the commitment for a transition to unity consciousness has not surfaced on a larger scale or even been proposed previously.

For this event to be successful in generating the intention for the shift to the consciousness of the ninth wave a massive participation in it will be desirable also at preparatory stages. The preparatory efforts have to be shared by the millions that intend for a shift in consciousness to take place. To bring it about a collective effort will thus be needed and already making a choice to participate is part of creating the intention that has been discussed here. Initially, there will be a great need for people to take initiatives to disseminate the call for the Conscious Convergence around the world. It is important to approach organizations to have them embrace it. Then there will be the need for people to make their unique contributions known through public web sites, social media and other networks. There will also be a need for funding of many aspects of the activities and for staff, which can be done through to, a 501c3 non-profit, public benefit corporation. Then, there will be a need for creative planning of events and the creation of a network between these. Individuals and organizations who wish to participate in this global program are invited to join the discussion for particulars of the shared intention and to connect with others around the world that will be co-creating this intentional wave of unity consciousness. A discussion forum has been initiated at:

My own view is that this is the last chance that human beings will have to truly align themselves with the cosmic plan. It is now or never and if you do not think that the Conscious Convergence has something to do with you you probably have not studied the Mayan calendar seriously enough. Hence, there can be no proxies for your participation in the transformation of the world as the calendar comes to an end. The final descent of Bolon Yookte, the Nine Waves (Nine Lords of Time or Nine Underworlds, or whatever name you prefer) is upon us and it is not without reason that the number nine is sacred in so many spiritual traditions. Nine is the destiny number of humanity and so it will be your own choice whether you want to be part of co-creating this destiny.

Carl Johan Calleman, Stockholm, 11 Ahau (March 7, 2010).

Carl Johan Calleman has a Ph. D. In Physical Biology from the University of Stockholm and has been a Senior Researcher at the University of Washington in Seattle and a cancer expert for the WHO. He is the author of The Purposeful Universe (Inner Traditions, 2009) a book that presents a new theory of biological evolution based on the Cosmic Tree of Life. He currently teaches at the online International Metaphysical University ( held his first talk with the mention of the end of the Mayan calendar in 1979 and is the only professional scientist to have studied the meaning of the Mayan calendar (many professional Mayanists have studied the calendar as such, but not its reality basis in biological and historical evolution). He is among other things the author of Solving the Greatest Mystery of Our Time: The Mayan Calendar (Garev, 2001) and The Mayan calendar and the Transformation of Consciousness (Inner Traditions, 2004). His web site is, and he is also associated with the web sites, and

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


Sunday, 27-June-2010
By Benjamin Fulford

We are on the verge of something that will be bigger than the Cambrian explosion.

For 3 billion years, individual life-forms were so small they could only be seen with a microscope. Then, in a geological eye-blink, a vast cornucopia of macroscopic life appeared. A similar phase-transition is imminent.

We now possess a set of tools that gives us God-like power. With that power comes God-like moral responsibility. We have, or will soon have: the ability to manipulate our genes at will, access to virtually unlimited free energy and real-time full-spectrum communications abilities. This will allow for the birth of a plethora of communities that will take on the aspects of super-beings. We know these now as governments, cultures, societies, corporations, religions, individuals etc. However, with the new technology, that is about to change.

The new communications tools mean Democracy can be made to function in real-time; creating communal super-brains. The new genetic tools mean some people will begin to manipulate their own genes in order to become immortal super-beings. The unlimited energy supplies will give us super-powers.

Despite efforts by some power-holders to stop this wave of change, it is inevitable. It cannot be stopped, only channeled.

That means it is of the utmost urgency for humanity to gather all its collective wisdom in order to make the change a benevolent one. We will need to fashion a base for this transformation. It must be like a perfect diamond, reflecting from every angle the desires and wishes of all creatures, great and small.

I believe the very core of this diamond can be fashioned out one moral principle of the greatest purity. It is what I call the Sudra principle.

The Sudra were the original aboriginal inhabitants of India. When the Aryan invaders came, part of the Sudra’s folk knowledge was taken and incorporated into the belief system of the invaders, the rest was destroyed. The Sudra were then forbidden from possessing knowledge. They punished any Sudra who learned to read and write by cutting his or her tongue out. Then, for thousands of years, these people toiled as slaves, imprisoned by their ignorance.

Such a thing must never be allowed to happen again. Hence the Sudra principle: any change is allowed as long as there are no losers.

Another way of looking at it is to examine the base of what we call good and evil. Good is when life energy increases, evil is when it decreases.

In times of plenty, life increases, leading to more and more cooperation, bigger communities and more complexity. Evolution is powered then mainly by the forces of reproduction. Creatures that produce the most offspring prevail but, even those with less offspring continue to reproduce and change for the better. The collective knowledge gathered by life over its 3.5 billion-year experience of various times of plenty can be thought of as the wisdom of the good.

In times of famine, there is strife, communities dissolve and evolution is powered by the strong eating the weak. Knowledge gathered by life over such periods can be thought of as the wisdom of the bad. The Asians call this Yin and Yang.

Life is now headed for what is likely to be a billions of years long, and exponentially expanding, period of Yang or plenty. However, we cannot know when hard times or new enemies will come again and thus, we will need to maintain and nurture all the life knowledge gathered in bad times.

With this in mind, let us now consider the principle governing body of our present world. In ancient Babylonia there emerged a proto-brain, ancient and powerful, that evolved for millenia. It was a gathering of the brightest minds, centered around a single uber-mind, who ruled over the masses. In Europe, this type of gathering came to be known as the illuminati. For centuries it functioned in a way that brought civilization to new heights. There was a gathering of the self-appointed best and brightest who strived to pool their collective wisdom in order to do the greatest good for the greatest number. They achieved marvels and dominated the world for over 3 centuries.

At their core was a family of what may have been the most intelligent humans ever born: the Rothschilds. They pooled their collective knowledge and made sure it was successfully transmitted and built upon from generation to generation. However, they faced discrimination because of their Jewish ancestry and were forced to hide in the shadows. Their secret government was the Freemasons. At the top sat the Illuminati. At the very center sat a grand patriarch or king. Their source of power was control over money and knowledge. With the demise of the Ming Emperors they took on the role of the most highly evolved form of collective mind on the planet.

Unfortunately, it was fatally flawed by arrogance, racism and an inability to form equal relations with other cultures. It was thus unable to truly control the world.

Nonetheless, it was they who conceived of, and financed, the American Revolution. When America became isolationist, detached from world events and hard to control, the Rothschilds mounted a long campaign to get control of America. They succeeded, at last, through their agent John Rockefeller.

John Rockefeller and his cronies usurped the throne of the Western uber-mind. It was then the nightmare began. He conceived of a horrific long-term plan to enslave the human race. His idea was to enforce total, collective control over all humans. The final vision was to install mind-control devices in the brains of all his subjects. Eventually mankind would evolve into a single brain: His brain. Absolute power made him criminally insane. His plan meant all other human brains on the planet would be crushed into slavery worse than that of the Sudra.

To achieve this long-term goal, humanity needed to be captured and enslaved. To do this he relied mainly on the wisdom of the evil. This meant traumatizing humanity into submission through war and brainwash. The twentieth century became one of horror and destruction for both humans and nature.

The final denouement was supposed to be an Armagedon created by him to purge the world of foreign peoples he could not control. The humans who survived would all have mind-control chips put into their brains.

Fortunately for us all, the Rockefellers finally stand defeated. Humanity is about to wake up from a long and terrible nightmare.

The brilliant minds gathered inside the U.S. armed and intelligence forces will no longer have to spend their time and brain-power on behalf of an insane man. This means that instead of contemplating war scenarios and studying cryptography, they will take on the job of helping humanity navigate into the future. They could start by eliminating poverty, environmental destruction, ignorance and disease from the planet.

The new areas of study for the brilliant mathematicians they employ will be things like Fibonacci numbers, probability theory, fractal expansion theory, thermodynamic phase changes and who knows what other incredible things.

We are about to enter an age of wonder.


Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this PagE


June 18, 2010 []

By Shepard Ambellas & Alex Thomas

In the last few months, a strange series of events has taken place surrounding the April 20th BP Gulf oil spill. The Intel Hub will attempt to lay out some of the seemingly unbelievable facts in a manner which can easily be understood.

Between March 22nd and March 24th, several drills involving an oil spill took place.“Spills Of National Significance” was a drill ran by DHS and the Coast Guard. The SONS documents were first broke by the Intel Hub on May 8, 2010. More than a week later, ABC News would of course take credit for the story.

We now know, through witness testimony, that there were cracks reported in the drill casing two weeks prior to the disaster. Goldman Sachs sold 44% of their total holdings, 4,680,822 shares of BP stock in the first quarter of 2010. Goldman Sachs earned about $ 266 million on the sale.

Apparently, Halliburton also had some psychic insight on what was soon to come. Eleven days before the explosion aboard the Deepwater Horizon, Halliburton purchased an oil spill prevention firm. Halliburton was the lead company in charge of cementing the Deepwater rigs as well.

Just hours before the rig explosion, The Bureau of Land Management took part in a surprise inspection aboard the Deepwater Horizon. A four man team quickly flashed credentials to a supervisor and was then allowed access to the entire rig. Zac Zimmerman reveals in this interview how odd this particular BLM visit really was. Not to mention,many rigs have burned for weeks at a time without collapsing.

Another important fact is that Obama, along with DHS and the Department of the Interior, sent SWAT teams to the gulf to inspect all platforms and rigs. One must question, why would you deploy over 30 SWAT teams in response to an oil spill unless it was an act of terrorism, an act of war, or they if they were sent to carry out some sort of covert operation?

Federal regulators sent a SWAT team of inspectors into the Gulf of Mexico area to ensure compliance with safety rules on deep water drilling rigs. Source

We must also look into what organizations the major players belong too. It now appears that there are too many interlocking connections for this to be a coincidence. British Petroleum has ties to the Queen of England. The C.E.O. of BP Pacific, Peter Sutherland is a Trilateral Commission member, a Bilderberg member and a financial adviser to the Vatican. Tony Hayward has also attended numerous meetings of the world elite and was caught selling his stock in BP justweeks before the disaster.

Wackenhut, also known as G4S, has been hired by BP to block and or arrest reporters who attempt to probe the workers and staged media location in and around Grand Isle, LA. Wackenhut is a known arm of the Bilderbergers and also has ties to other agencies. There has been numerous confirmed staged media events that have taken place in and around Grand Isle. One such eyewitness reporter called into the Decompression Session and described how he and other members of the mainstream media were led to a small area on the beach where a staged photo op took place. He reported the presence of Army personal and that if he were to leave the barrier to either side, he would have been immediately arrested.

Next one must look at the CIA, Evergreen Air, and their connection to chemtrail spraying and the Gulf oil spill. The following is an excerpt of an article we did that linked Evergreen Air to the spraying of Corexit, the deadly chemical being sprayed over the spill by the cover of night. This was documented in the article ” BP Crop Dusting U.S. Population Under Cover of Night“.

The Intel Hub
Alex Thomas & Shepard Ambellas

On May 19th, The Waco Tribune Herald reported that an Evergreen Air Supertanker 747 had trained at Texas State Technical College-Waco, where it flew 100 feet in the air and dropped water on targets applied to the ground. Evergreen Air was training for its planed run to fly over the spill while dropping a substance that could break up oil that threatens to damage the coastline. As we all know the chemicals being used underwater are considerably worse than the oil itself. It is now safe to say that the chemicals that were dropped from the air are just as bad, if not worse. It is possible that the fly overs are still happening at this very moment. Read more

One of Evergreen Air's Facilities, Oregon

Evergreen Air is a known CIA front company. The Intel Hub, along many others, have established this fact without a reasonable doubt. This evidence was backed by witness testimony. Once this is established, one must realize just how deep the rabbit hole may actually go?

As it turns out the deadly chemical Corexit is linked to the Rothschild’s, a known controlling party of the New World Order global crime syndicate.

Army deployments to the Gulf have been confirmed by the president. It is now a reality. National Guard troops have been mobilized. Workers have been bused in and out by the masses, none wearing protective gear such as gas masks or full bio suits. Reports are circulating that the workers could be prisoners and may be part of the Army Inmate Labor Program defined in this Document 210-35.

We have had numerous reports of people in the Gulf region who have fallen ill with “flu like” symptoms. Many people have reported the smell of toxic chemicals in the region. Clinics in some Gulf regions are reportedly at an elevated capacity. Birds have been seen migrating north, while sharks and dolphins seek shallower waters in Florida. This would seem to signify the presence of toxic air and water content. Poison gases from the oil mixed with the Corexit appear to be an Orwellian combo of death. Fish are turning up on the banks of streams in several states. Plants have burn holes through them from acid rain as reported in Texas, Arkansas, and Tennessee.

Most insurance companies do not cover “oil damage”. As the acid rain and hurricanes push inland in the coming months, we may see a rise in property damage claims. The likely winners being the very people who caused the problem.

The way Obama is treating the oil spill is somewhat erie. His use of war terminology seems to signal the true magnitude of this disaster. Terms such as ” Battle Plan” seem to be paving the way for militarization of the streets of America.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


June 18, 11:14am ~ Miami Holistic Health Examiner

By Jed Shlackman

As the drama of crude oil gushing into the Gulf of Mexico continues to unfold there are many commentaries and analyses being published and spoken. These address this situation from a variety of contexts. The commentary being presented in this article is probably unlike any others you've heard. It seeks to examine the archetypal, psychospiritual level of the phenomena we encounter in our lives. On this level, the dark oil filling the waters of the Gulf of Mexico and potentially spreading much further is a reflection of the eruption of long-suppressed dark emotional content of our individual and collective subconscious.

In psychology, Carl Jung became widely recognized in the 20th Century for his exploration of the spiritual side of psychology and the elements of our psyche. Jung, a Swiss psychiatrist who had studied with Sigmund Freud before making a mark with his own writings and teachings, discussed the collective unconscious as well as the unconscious shadow aspect of the human mind. Jung explored the wisdom of ancient cultures and spiritual traditions as well as mythologies from around the world, looking at the common, archetypal themes that appeared. In spiritual and metaphysical teachings water is the element of the emotions. It is a feminine element, corresponding with the unconscious part of the psyche. We normally only see the surface of a body of water - most of the water is what is below the surface. Our unconscious mind is like this as well - it contains all that is below the surface of our awareness.

As oil has erupted to fill the Gulf of Mexico this can be seen as a breaking forth of dark unconscious material that is ready to reach the surface and become visible so that it can be faced and dealt with. This dark, unconscious material has been built up for great lengths of time. The oppression and abuse of humanity is deeply connected to the forces that govern the oil industry - but this is a reflection of how we all oppress and abuse ourselves and others. Many are busy pointing fingers at BP (British Petroleum) or the American Government to assign blame to the crisis in the Gulf region, describing how the profit motive contributed to reckless endangerment of the environment and human lives. Yet, how many people could honestly say they aren't putting materialistic desires ahead of the health and well-being of themselves and others? Most people do this all the time without even thinking about it. In the book Poisoned For Profit: How Toxins Are Making Our Children Chronically Ill, authors Philip and Alice Shabecoff describe how toxic compounds have proliferated in our civilization, with most people exposing their children to hazardous chemicals due to ignorance or denial and many people participating in coverups of these matters.

From pharmaceutical companies and doctors prescribing toxic drugs and vaccines, to lawyers and politicians protecting corporations from liability for their poisoning of the public, our culture has become dominated by materialistic preoccupations that lead to the abuse of humans and the environment. Massive deceptions have been employed to maintain these corrupt systems. In Denise Breton and Christopher Largent's ground-breaking book The Paradigm Conspiracy, the authors review how all the major institutions of our society have become addictive and abusive, yet people continue to go along with these abuses rather than facing the truth and breaking out of the addictive cycles in order to create soul-supporting, empowering social constructs. As oil continues to gush into Earth's waters, we see that the pressure of suppressing our awareness of the dark side of human civilization cannot be maintained. We have an opportunity to become more proactively aware of the patterns in our lives and our society and make changes to bring about balance and harmony in our environment and within ourselves. The more we ignore things and suppress things the more intense will be the unpleasant consequences, as life gives us feedback about our distortions and imbalances.

Presently, the age of deception that we live in is coming to a climax. The Internet is very much a reflection of this climactic time, as it presents a network in which all human knowledge can be shared instantly with anyone, anywhere on the Earth. Numerous writers, researchers, and teachers have come forward to expose the dark side of human civilization and present alternatives to empower humanity. From natural health cures to suppressed zero-point free energy technologies, you can read about paradigm-shifting information that would have never come to one's awareness in past eras. Information about devious conspiratorial forces is becoming more and more publicized, with major news organizations now discussing things like the Bilderberg Group elite gatherings and the Skull & Bones secret society. Prominent public figures have been talking openly about the reality of extraterrestrial beings interacting with our planet, and sexual misconduct by public figures and people in major church and governmental institutions is increasingly coming to public awareness. These are examples of dark or hidden phenomena in society coming to the surface.

On an individual level many people are finding that they are having to face the unresolved emotions from dark episodes in their past. Globally, weather is becoming unstable, volcanoes and earthquakes are shifting the Earth and releasing pressure, and oil leaks are filling the waters with dark fluids that mirror the upwelling of the unconscious shadows of humanity. Those who are on a healing path can embrace this, appreciating the opportunity to face the multiple levels of toxicity that have accumulating and take steps to release these patterns and integrate oneself. If we merely suppress the darkness then we just create bigger crises that are feedback provided by Creation to help us awaken to reclaim our integrity and wholeness.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


Fred, you get it! As I do! It's never been about divide and conquer. It's not competition, but cooperation that will save the day...and the planet...and us, the people. I've always liked Swami Beyondananda (Steve Bhaerman) for, indeed, he has a remarkable gift for showing us truth through humor. I hope everyone on your list gets it...really understands enough to get beyond our pettiness and narrow-mindedness. Go Right! Go Left! Get Centered! As Dennis Kucinich said when asked why he would have chosen Ron Paul as his running mate if he were chosen as the Democratic nominee, "A plane needs a right wing and a left wing to fly." The ONLY thing that really matters is integrity: integrating the opposites into a harmonious whole that dances rather than clashes. May peace prevail in me.

On 6/10/2010 8:59 PM, Fred wrote:
To my friends ~

I rarely forward email "blasts," even when I agree with the writer's point of view, that take political or religious or even sociological stances...except, perhaps, very selectively. In this instance, this writer has a profoundly revelatory insight on "oil spills and blood spills" that I'm passing along to everyone in my address book (please pardon any duplications), with the encouragement to read it through. It's not that long, it's easy reading and it's worth matter who you are, what "side" you're on or what you're dealing with individually at the moment. If we all read this and give it just a measure of unbiased, open consideration, we might just begin to change our perspectives and start the process of "reinventing" ourselves...and our world.

This is sent to you with care and respect.


By Steve Bhaerman

Sometimes it's just not funny.

There is nothing funny about oil hemorrhaging in the Gulf of Mexico, or blood flowing in the Mediterranean - just the sad joke that we humans are largely the cause of our own suffering. And we are largely clueless as to how and why.

For millennia, we have been under the spell of the lowest common dominator, the notion that it's a you-or-me world, that to survive we must dominate or be dominated. Never mind that at the root of every religion and ethical system is some version of the Golden Rule. We have as a species chosen to apply this law selectively to those in our own family, tribe or nation. When we feel threatened - not necessarily ARE threatened, but feel threatened - we very easily adopt a conveniently modified version of the rule: "Doo-doo unto others before they can doo-doo unto you."

So, for tribes or nations to be manipulated by a sociopathic few, all these misleaders need to do is convince their people of an external threat, and this protective mechanism is activated. While fight-or-flight is a necessary response to an immediate danger, the blood flow to the hindbrain has to come from somewhere. It comes from the forebrain, the place of creative thinking and discernment. In other words, when we are in fear we are less intelligent.

In places like the Middle East, the us-vs.-them story is well established, and each atrocity by the other builds the story one more story high. The one thing the Palestinian terrorists set to blow themselves up and the Israeli soldiers firing on civilians have in common is the belief, "We are the good guys."

It's this belief alone that turns good guys into bad guys. It's how America justified using atomic weapons on Japan, napalm on Vietnamese, and bombs on Iraqi and Afghan citizens. It's the cost of war, paid by the other guy - the bad guy.

From the Mideast ... to the Midwest

In order to bring this notion home, literally and figuratively, we need to take what is happening in the Mideast, and apply it in the Midwest. Just as surely as the Israelis and Palestinians are at war, we the people of America have been divided into two warring tribes, the Red Tribe Republicans and the Blue Tribe Democrats. The main difference between these two tribes is that the right wing understands there is a war going on; the left wing merely feels assaulted.

Here's why.

Whether you believe it's an actual conspiracy, or merely the out-picturing of our divided collective consciousness, the body politic has been split into left-brain and right-brain, masculine and feminine. The political left represents the values of novelty and nurturance; the right stands for structure and protection. Each of these tendencies - progressive and conservative - represents a healthy biological impulse. However, separately they are incapable of wise rule. Why? Well, imagine living your life using only half your intelligence, or worse yet with two parts of your psyche constantly in mortal combat.

Consequently, each political party represents a toxic distortion of a valuable asset. Put bluntly, the Republicans represent the abusive male, the Democrats the enabler female. All of the muscle is on one side; all of the compassion is on the other. Instead of working together, these two opposing impulses have inflicted a deadly autoimmune dysfunction on the body politic. Who benefits? Those who have the most to lose by these two divided forces uniting as an integrated, whole "we the people."

In a healthy, integrated, whole system the forces of protection protect life. Consider the eggshell. It is absolutely necessary to protect the egg during development. However, for a chicken to be born, the shell must break. Structure must yield to life.

In our distorted, divided system the structures designed for protection all too often protect the predator. That's why back in the 1930s, Gen. Smedley Butler, at the time America's most decorated Marine, wrote a booklet called War is a Racket, where he confessed that most of the defending he did during the early part of this century was for United Fruit and U.S. Rubber. In the nearly 80 years since Butler's pamphlet, we have seen the simple desire for defense and protection rigidify into a Military Industrial Complex, a structure largely in service of itself, in partnership with the American empire.

Interestingly, the more libertarian right represented by Ron Paul know about Smedley Butler and his assessment of war, whereas he is an unfamiliar figure to most on the left. That's because each political polarity has it's own information pipeline telling them the "truth." The left is told that the Ron Paul variety of populist - as represented currently by the Tea Parties - are backward racists and isolationists. Meanwhile, the right wing impropaganda machine bangs away at the notion that "liberals hate America," making them as much of an enemy as Al Qaeda is.

Progressives are outraged by the assaults of Limbaugh, Beck and the like, but cannot respond effectively or courageously. Why? Because all the martial energy has been marshaled over on the other side. The right, meanwhile, doesn't dare empathize with the downtrodden, lest we empower welfare cheats. In having their attention focused on the lowly criminal, they are conveniently distracted from the highly criminal.

We are a political house divided, a body politic afflicted with bi-polar insanity. Somewhere in the netherworld, Machiavelli is smiling, for his lesson of divide-and-conquer has been well learned by our misleaders. We the people have learned to identify so much with what divides us that we completely ignore the common virtues and values we share as non-sociopathic humans.

It's Either an Awakening ... Or a Wake

Which brings us to the oil spill.

The major missing piece in this web-of-life threatening tragedy is our ability to act in unison in a moment of crisis. The bi-polar political dysfunction has bred so much mutual distrust, that we've wasted valuable time and energy in obfuscation and blame. But the problem goes deeper than that, as deep as the subconscious programming of "survival of the fittest." We are so programmed with fear of not enough - Swami calls this "scare city" - that we spend our attention, intention, time and resource on protection and acquisition, at the expense of other healthy human "cellular souls."

The cost of this agreed-upon greed, goes beyond the trillions of dollars spent and the millions of lives lost. We now have a rupture in the web-of-life itself, as the fluid we value more than life gushes uselessly and harmfully into the ocean, unstoppable by the magic of technology. Like Disney's Sorcerer's Apprentice, in our ignorance and innocence, we unleashed a power far too powerful for our Mickey Mouse consciousness.

And the good news is?

If we choose to use it as such, the oil spill may be the significant emotional event that bumps us out of the illusion of separation and into a healthier relationship with one another and the planet. What is called for is no less than a spontaneous spiritual evolution from children of God to adults of God, from victims and villains to aware, responsible co-creators. It's never happened before. But never before have we faced such a blatant and immediate human-caused disaster, one that calls into question our fitness as a species.

As many of us have seen in the "try this" or "try that" emails that have been circulating, there is no dearth of potential remedies or even solutions. We already have the worldwide network of communication to create an open-source approach to a situation that threatens every one of us. Necessity is indeed the mother of invention ... and intent is the father. What an opportunity for the people of this world to "gather under one big intent" to take the initiative to create a worldwide "we the people" authority to, for the first time, confront a species-wide threat as a species.

This would not be some top-down New World Order, but a bottom up, grassroots "new world ordering," where we access the heart-and-soul essence of who we are, an essence that has been lost through millennia of domination and programmed fear. It would mean gathering in intentionally diverse groups, and using existing polarities to stretch ourselves beyond the limited choices we currently perceive. It would mean calling forth the Sacred Masculine and the Sacred Feminine, to act in accord as dynamic duo dance partners. It would mean taking the obsolete political polarities of progressive and conservative, and turning them into healthy intentions by asking, "How do we wish to progress?" and "What do we choose to conserve?"

I know, I know. I am proposing a sane world. I must be crazy.

But the question to ask ourselves and one another is, how sane is the institutionalized, homicidal, suicidal insanity we have now? As the saying goes, if we keep on the same path, we will arrive at where we are going. Even if we are able to stanch the current oil flow, and we contain the damage to "just" one ocean, what will the next blow be? Will we be able to recover, or will it just be a matter of time before a human-made disaster kills us?

In our book Spontaneous Evolution, Bruce Lipton and I point out the phenomenon of "spontaneous remission," where an individual is told their condition is untreatable and terminal, and yet something mysterious and miraculous happens. They recover, and show no sign of the disease whatsoever. While we might imagine this some super-human miracle, when we look deeper we find that the recovery is preceded by a profound change of belief, and change of behavior.

In other words, a spontaneous remission is often the result of a "spontaneous remissioning." And so the choice is before us to collectively change our mission from "dominate or be dominated" to re-growing the Garden together.

This has been the wake up call we have been waiting for. And the snooze button is no longer working.

Steve Bhaerman is a writer and uncommontator who has written and performed comedy as Swami Beyondananda. He is also the co-author with Bruce Lipton of Spontaneous Evolution: Our Positive Future and a Way to Get There From Here (Hay House: 2009). He can be found online at If you like what you read, and want to get more of it, subscribe to Notes From the Trail here.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


By Ron Paul

The spotlight remains on the Greek sovereign debt crisis as the riots continue. The terms of the Greek bailout from the IMF and Eurozone countries remain contentious with citizens on all sides. Europeans hate having their governments throw public money away as much as Americans do. The Greeks are not happy about having their taxes raised while their pensions and salaries are cut. Meanwhile, it is rumored by the Financial Times, AFP and others that Greece may spend more than it saves from austerity measures on arms deals with Germany, France and the US as a potential condition of receiving bailout funds. If true, it is certainly not unprecedented for the global military industrial complex to benefit from deals made by their friends in the central banking community. After all, war is the health of the state. The last thing big government proponents want is for peace to break out in the world.

This free flow of fiat money from around the globe to Greece will not really save Greece as much as it will grant a temporary reprieve to central bankers from the consequences of their mistakes. Sadly, this will come at the expense of the Greek people and taxpayers in Europe and America. Taxpayers are of no consequence to either European or American central bankers. Even the mere desire for complete information on what they are up to in our name is rebuffed, as we saw last week in the Senate with the failure of Senator Vitter’s amendment containing my language to fully audit the fed. The hubris of powerful and secretive central bankers seems to know no bounds.

If someone incurred debts against you as an individual, without your knowledge or consent, you would call it identity theft. You would call your bank for a full accounting of the debts incurred in your name, and after some verification, those debts would be declared invalid and you would not be held responsible for them. Furthermore, if the culprit was found, they would be prosecuted and sent to jail.

Not so with governments and central banks. Governments that are supposed to be of the people and for the people routinely incur debts against the people. Some governments even borrow money to oppress their citizens, and then expect them to pay for their own oppression with interest. With a fiat monetary system, the sky is the limit for how much debt a government can place on the backs of the people.

We have reached the point in the United States where the debt our government has accumulated against us is mathematically impossible to pay off. Harder times, likely due to a wave of hyperinflation, will eventually find its way to our streets and I am fearful of how Americans will react. My hope is that we will come together peacefully and help each other, and that enough of us will be aware that the blame rests securely on the shoulders of the Federal Reserve and the special interests. They should not be looked to for salvation. They should not be given more power. Rather, they should be stripped of the powers that allowed them to create this mess in the first place.

Resistance to public transparency regarding public debts should be denounced in the strongest of terms, and the central bankers that incurred them should be seen as no better than common identity thieves.

Posted by Ron Paul (05-17-2010, 10:58 AM) filed under Civil Liberties, Foreign Policy, Monetary Policy ~,tx14_paul,blog,999,All,Item%20not%20found,ID=100517_3701,TEMPLATE=postingdetail.shtml

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


Monday, May 17, 2010 2:14am (PDT) ~

The Federal Reserve Board crime syndicate called in their last reserves last week in a desperate Battle of the Bulge maneuver to stave off their inevitable collapse. Their servants in the Bank of Japan and their partners in the European Central Bank and the BIS all promised to squeeze another $1 trillion out of their slave peoples in order to preserve and expand their empire. However, the effort is doomed for the same reason the Battle of the Bulge failed, they do not have the fuel they need.

The owners of the Central Banking crime syndicates have had their way for so long, they are still in a state of denial and confusion about what is happening. For so long they spend billions and trillions while their slave people were forced to use tokens worth tens or hundreds. The result was a complete disconnect between the realms of high finance and the world of the ordinary mortal. What is happening is that the ordinary mortals have woken up.

The so-called Lehman Brothers crisis in 2008 was the beginning of the final chapter for these criminals. When the Russians and the Chinese told the Feds to either pay the money they owed in cash or else face nuclear war, they threatened the Congress with martial law unless they passed the TARP bill to provide $700 billion. The problem is that they were talking $700 billion in real slave currency, not their imaginary fiat currency. Then since that bill passed, the corporate media slaves began doing some math and realized that TARP had ballooned to $23 trillion. Since world GDP is only $60 trillion, the corporate media and financial slaves began to finally wake up and realize something was seriously wrong with the world view being foisted on them. The numbers they are being fed no longer add up and they can do the math. This means the Satanic media and mind control grid is becoming increasingly dysfunctional.

That is why the markets were only fooled for one day by the promise of another illusory $1 trillion to be wrung from the slaves in the West. Instead of being fooled, the market slaves began to actively bet against the Euro. Gold, meanwhile shot up in value. This is the exact opposite of what the would be controllers were planning.

It is like watching a slow-motion train wreck. The Euro and the Federal Reserve Board are both collapsing in slow motion. The new financial system is almost ready to go. As mentioned before the 90% of US dollar held by non-Americans will be backed by gold and renamed, now likely as Renminbi or people's currency. The American Republic will be restored and they have already printed their new greenbacks. These will have less international purchasing power than Federal Reserve Debt notes meaning Americans will be forced to buy more American goods and US industry will once again be internationally competitive.

The signs of this change are now everywhere to be seen in the West. The Governor of the Bank of England, for example, publicly warned the US was headed the way of Greece. This was widely reported even in the corporate propaganda news. The ever spreading criminal investigations of Wall Street also continued to expand. Now the rating agencies are being investigated along with the big Wall Street criminal institutions.

There are also signs of revolt within the secret enforcement establishment. For example, the Black Dragon Society was contacted last week by some Mexicans on the run from CIA hit squads. They said officials working inside the HAARP electro-magnetic weapon facility visited Mexico to warn the Feds were planning to hit Mexico with an earthquake in May. This means the workers at HAARP are starting to revolt, depriving the Satanist Feds of one of their last weapons.

Attempted new fake terror attacks are now being exposed by whistleblowers almost immediately. The latest case is the so called Times square attempted bombing which insiders immediately denounced as a false flag operation aimed at justifying further attacks on Pakistan. Pakistan's ISI is no longer obeying the CIA as a result of this stupid maneuver.

Also, when the Federal Reserve Board crime syndicate once again tried to order my assassination, I was warned by three different people, one in the CIA, one in MI6 and one in the Yakuza. The Yakuza promptly contacted the two would-be hit men and asked them (politely) to back off. The Yakuza now have in their possession a complete list of all top Federal Reserve Board crime syndicate cronies in Japan.

There is still much I cannot report at the present time in order to protect people's lives and prevent sabotage. However, I can say that for various technical and logistical reasons the announcement of the new financial system is still going to take a bit more time.

In the meantime, please enjoy watching the demise of an ancient Satanic crime syndicate and the dawn of freedom for humanity. The day the top bosses of Federal Reserve Board crime syndicate, their cronies in Washington and in the corporate propaganda media go to jail is not far off.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


NOTE, May 14, 2010: Mary Elizabeth: Croft is a "freeman" - a lady who has taken back her STRAWMAN from the system using the Canadian equivalent of the UCC-1 as I am in the process of completing. (There are several steps involved.) Her articles are interesting to me in that she, as I do, approaches the matter from a spiritual perspective. While I do not yet see all that she is saying as valid for me at this stage in my awakening, what she says does provide food for thought for me. Perhaps you will also find her ideas catalytic.

© by Mary Elizabeth: Croft,
First Published as: Knowing Who You Are

Origins of Slavery, aka Commerce

In the Garden of Eden, the serpent suggested to Eve, that if she were to eat of the fruit of the tree of knowledge of good and evil, her eyes would be opened and she would be as God. So, she and Adam ate the Amanita Muscaria mushroom (which resembles an apple) …. a hallucinogen which allowed them to realize that they are, indeed, God–– just as the serpent had said. It also allowed them to see that their nakedness meant that they are slaves, since, in the Garden, slaves wore no clothing. When they realized that their true nature was God, they clothed themselves accordingly. The LORD God (ego mind) didn’t like the fact that his slaves now knew they were God/Divinity, so he threw them out. Now, they were responsible for finding their own food, clothing, and shelter. Certainly, they had been protected, in the Garden, (read: “received benefits and privileges”), but their true freedom meant that they were now completely responsible for their lives. This was probably not too worrisome for them, now, with their gained knowledge that they are God.

In the 8th book of The Ringing Cedars of Russia [Anastasia] series, we read that the slave-owners realized that, one day, the slaves, who out-numbered the masters 10 to 1, would finally catch onto how to escape, one way or another. So, the masters “freed” them by offering the slaves coins. The slaves were now free to clothe, feed, and house themselves, in any way they chose. The added bonus was that the more they worked, the more coins they received, the better food, clothing, and housing they could acquire …. but, they were still slaves, only now they were slaves to the coins.

Mankind, in his fear for his survival, has always wanted to control his environment and other people. So, mankind has never known anything but slavery. People who insist that the commercial system was designed to work for everyone––if only the public servants would do their jobs and, if only there weren’t so much greed––are just being naive. Nothing is going to change the system of slavery. We cannot change anything outside ourselves without first changing our minds about what we think is outside ourselves. We must do as the original slaves (Adam and Eve), did …. realize that we are God, get up the gumption, and leave the Garden.

One slave might be smart enough to find a hole in the fence and probably escape the Garden, yet, he dare not come back and tell the others how he did so. Even if he did, the hole would already have been fixed. But, inevitably, another slave has an even more clever idea about how to get out, so he gathers all the other slaves and, for a fee, tells them how to get out. Why don’t the other slaves ask, “If you’ve found an escape, why are you still here?… talking about how to get out? …… not because you care about us, or you wouldn’t be charging us.”

Many slaves have “found” legal material which the slave-owners have deliberately left lying about so that the slaves will give their attention to that, rather than to remembering they are God and able to escape. They don’t want a repeat of Adam and Eve, so they keep them busy with other distractions: sports, shopping, school, TV, and expensive seminars on “how to escape”.

But there is no escape as long as the slaves are resisting slavery. They are putting all their energy into not being a slave and this only affirms that they are, indeed, slaves. We become what we most resist. This is all part of the big plan to keep the slaves in their heads, as opposed to affording them the time and peace of mind to look into their hearts and remember who they are. If they did, just as Adam and Eve did, they would cover their nakedness, i.e.: clothe themselves in the “frequency of love”. Slaves who have attained this high frequency are the most dangerous slaves to have around because they can awaken the other slaves.

The “seminar” slaves are not a threat to the slave-owner because these slaves are being kept busy looking for the solution outside themselves. The real threat is slaves who have risen above the level of being controlled. They even appear different which will get the attention of the others. The slave-master must expel them, just as the LORD God did with Adam and Eve. For most, being outside the garden is a daunting prospect, but for those who have realized the frequency of love, the thought of expulsion is freeing. They trust their intuition and know they will be safe.

There is no way of escape, as long as the slaves focus on papers that the slave-owner deliberately left for them to find and study. The way out is to remember who we are. See paragraph one.

Imagine kids playing Monopoly, on the living-room floor, in the evening. Dad walks by and says, “Wrap it up, kids. Bedtime!” The kids beg Dad to play with them. Dad knows that if he joins them in the game, he will become one of them, and the kids will manage, surreptitiously, to keep him in the game and bedtime will be a long way off. The instant Dad sits down and asks, “What are the rules of the game”, the kids know they have won, because he is now IN the game. But, Dad knows who he is and says, “I’m not playing; I don’t care what the rules read, or even if you are following the rules; you do what I say.” There is nothing the kids can say or do, now that Dad refuses to give them his attention, energy, time, or emotion which they required, in order to continue to play.

In several of the “checkpoint” videos, where Border Patrol stops people, I notice that those who do not cave, are ultimately told, “Our superiors feel that, uh, we got better things to do than to play this game with you, sir, so we’ve been ordered to allow you to depart the checkpoint.” What they are really saying is, “We were told to say, ‘we have to let you go, if we cannot get you to play our game with us…… sir’.” When we stop consenting to play, the game will end. Got it?

“Business” is None of My Business

Hence, I neither know nor care how the banks, government, corporations, institutions play the game of commerce. I do know that complication indicates the presence of lies because only Truth is simple. Knowing the details of their game would not benefit me…. it is their game. I do know that their accounting system requires NOTHING from me. I have more important things on which to put my time, attention, energy, and emotion. I am doing all I can to ascend to the frequency of love so that I can escape their slavery.

So, what I did to handle their desire to involve me was to tell them that I neither know nor care about how they play their game. Public servants have only 3 things to do at their places of employment: 1. provide me their goods and services; 2. manage the accounting thereof, which without the commerce game, wouldn’t be necessary, but, it is up to them to do what they do, to balance their books. This is their business, not mine. 3. Cash Confiscation. They must do their job, i.e.: get cash from me, or they will not get paid. (See paragraph two.) So, they threaten me with “disconnection of service” if I do not “pay”. This is extortion and fraud. Handing over our cash or not has nothing to do with the balancing of their books and ledgers.

Their books were balanced long before we ever received anything from them. In the case of an alleged “bank loan”, no bank would ever hand us thousands of dollars without our first having paid them. Banks are in the business of “profit”, so it is an impossibility that they would trust the slaves to take thousands from them, if they didn’t get it from us, first. So, they do, in the form of a note with a signature. The amount on the note matches, exactly, the amount on the cheque we receive. What does this tell you? It was strictly an exchange of paper. No one gained; no one lost… a perfect example of “equal consideration” which is the prime requirement of all contracts.

At the end of the day, all bank records must prove zero balance. The next morning, nothing could be outstanding or there would be serious grounds for an audit. So, when you get an alleged “loan”, ask the banker, “Will your books balance, at the end of today?” Of course! “So, where, on your books, could what you call my “indebtedness to the bank”, possibly show up?”

Years later, they say you signed papers which indicate your agreement to fork over your cash for the next 30 years. But that contract was based upon fraud, so not only is the contract invalid but also, since there is no statute of limitations on fraud, the mortgager now owes you the amount you have already paid. Tell the trustee of the public trust to write a cheque to the Name and deposit it. We (trust grantors) tell public servants what to do, but, not how to do it. If they require our authorization in order to credit the public trust, via the Name, then, we can let them know we authorize the paper which allows them to do so, but nothing more.

We know that all public accounting is handled by the exchange of paper and digital entries into a computer. That is all there is. Neither money nor cash is required; only paper and digital credit and debit. However, the insidious, prime purpose of this entire game is “Cash Confiscation”. They pretend they are here to serves us, but, their true purpose is cash confiscation.

Here is how they do it: They create a “charge”/debt, for a utility, traffic infraction, or IRS/CRA; it matters not––as long as there is an “amount owing”. They make it up, as it cannot be real. They simply need a reason to charge the public trust and they require a Name, through which to access that credit. Remember, the entire game is about nothing other than “cash confiscation”.

Through years of programming, we have come to believe that we are a Name. We are not. LORD God––the ego mind––named Adam who then named everything in the garden. Only slaves are named. We couldn’t possibly be a Name, when we already know that we are God. The Name is simply a registered corporation, through which the public can access the public trust. What for? For “cash confiscation”. Why? When people have less cash, they are more easily frightened, compliant, manipulated, and controlled––just the way slave-owners want their slaves. This is the only reason for Cash Confiscation…. other than the controllers of the world are buying their way into the underground facilities at Denver airport because they live in fear of some catastrophe. But that’s not important, right now.

Regain Control

We have dominion over them, until we sink to their level which we do by communicating with them, in any way. Then, we are in their frequency. They control the lower frequencies of anger, frustration, and fear. When we regard this from an energetic perspective (and energy is all there is), we see that we must not engage in their insanity. When we do anything at that frequency, we are vulnerable to their control.

The only solution is to remove, from them, our attention, time, energy, and emotion and direct it to the frequency of love. They cannot exist in “love”, yet, we can stoop to anger, frustration, and fear. As they desperately require these emotions from us in order to survive, their full-time job is to devise the means to capture them.

When we look to them for our “remedy” for anything, we are enslaved. This is why they keep us looking “outside ourselves” for answers to everything …. love, money, happiness, peace, health. The solution to all of that is within us, not them. They love it when we get upset over their signing bills to “take away our health freedoms”. Cry me a river. We are above all that.

Every aspect of this game of commerce is a red herring ….. just varying forms of manipulation designed to keep our attention off our Divinity. All “laws” (codes, rules, regulations, statutes, acts, legislations, bills, by-laws, constitutions) apply only to those who legislated them. Therefore, the “remedies” within said “laws”, also, apply only to those who legislated them.

So, whereas they must follow their own “commercial laws”, so then, they have the opportunity to access their “commercial remedies”, available within them. Whereas we have NO obligation to follow their commercial laws, so then, we also have NO opportunity to access their commercial remedies within them.
So, put away all your thoughts of finding a “solution FOR commerce IN commerce” because, although there are many “solutions” and “remedies”, by which a few of us have prevailed, albeit very briefly over the years, these alleged “solutions” and “remedies” were designed by the privileged, to be used by the privileged, …. NOT to be used by the slaves whom they consider us to be. When they realize that it is a slave who has implemented one of their “commercial remedies”, they simply put a stop to it.
All of the “latest processes”, are ‘psy-ops processes’; they are disinformation which comes from the controllers, themselves, in order to distract our attention from the true cause….which is we, and the true solution….which is to clear our minds of the programmed belief that there is an authority outside ourselves.
NO solution FOR commerce can be found IN commerce because commerce is of the ego mind and WE are not. Our solution lies within. Our solution is our dominion.
They do not care WHAT we believe, as long as our beliefs are what THEY promoted because it is the “believing”, itself, ….. the energy, time, emotion, and attention we give them, which allows them to realize their control over us. If we do as they tell us, no matter what that is––whether their rules or their words, we remain under their control.

The controllers believe and obey LORD God, of the Bible, which is their law book because their superiors have sworn upon it. So, we can point to it and declare our Dominion. If they do not accept the Bible, then they have relinquished their option to refer to any of their “laws” which would establish their “authority” over us, because all their laws are derived from LORD God’s laws. They’re sunk, either way, as long as we remember who we are ….. Divinity with Dominion.

I know of no “commercial remedy” or “process” which has consistently worked. Episodic wins are granted only to keep us on the idiotic treadmill of “search for the cure”. I do know, though, of a few who have prevailed, over time, by having declared their dominion over all the earth and over every living thing upon the earth.


In truth, nothing has a name. We do our children a huge disservice by telling them the names of things because this takes them directly into their left brains––the intellect–– where the controllers of the world want us. They do not want us in our right brains––the creative, spiritual mind, with access to our Divinity. The “substance” (consciousness/energy) of man already existed and LORD God (ego) captured that and breathed into it “form”, creating the concept of duality––substance/spirit and form/ego, and named it Adam. Adam then named everything in the “world”. LORD God (ego) has jurisdiction over NAMES/forms/fictions…. and nothing else.

Everything in fiction (forms) …. is of LORD God. This means that we, as God, are unable to recognize it. The minute we do, we step into LORD God’s “form”/fiction/image and leave behind our God-like “substance” and status. If we acknowledge them, other than to order them, as public servants, what to do, we are trapped. The instant we file documents, complete forms, mail legal paper, follow commercial processes, etc. we give up our Divinity, step into their fiction, and behave as if they have authority over us because, at that point, they do.

Example: it is alright for man, created as female, by God, to grow and smoke a plant which we/God created. We have “dominion over all the earth and over every living thing upon the earth”. Since legalities apply to NAMES, it is illegal for MARY to grow and smoke MARIJUANA. As long as we do not identify anything, by NAME––the means by which LORD God gained control, then we remain free from the jurisdiction of LORD God/controllers (cops, bankers, judges, et al). The God of the controllers is LORD God, the ego mind. We/God are Divinity. Spirit mind (God) can control ego mind (Lord God). This means that love (spirit mind) is more powerful than fear and control (ego mind). Now, read again, my article on Ho’oponopono.

The Name is not you, nor is it yours. You couldn’t possibly be a ‘name’. You were not invited to court; the Name was. They have charged the Name, not you. The charging of the public trust is their business, not yours. If they charge, they are obliged to offset. You don’t care how they do it; it has nothing to do with you. You have dominion (rule) over all the earth and over every living thing upon the earth and that includes things made from the earth, e.g.: court documents. They are following the laws of LORD God (ego mind) and you are God/Divinity (spirit mind). You can function at the frequency of love and they cannot. They will not even be able to detect you, because they cannot recognize love. Love is a frequency which they cannot attain, cannot reach, cannot see, cannot be. This is our edge. We have a power which not only can they not handle, have no weapons against, but also they have no experience of it. It is completely out of their realm. “Love” is your tool; USE IT!

The bureaucrats who charged the public trust, did so via the Name and so they must re-pay their debt to the public trust, via the same Name. We know that anything they have us sign or return to them is the paper (voucher, ticket, etc.) which they can use to deposit to the public trust. It’s true that they would prefer we identify with the Name and when they convince us that the Name owes, they hope that we will simply believe that we owe. Then they get to confiscate our cash, but cash never can or will offset a debt derived from a piece of paper. It is oil and water. They do not mix and they are not interchangeable. The only way for them to offset the debt which they created by charging the public trust, via the Name, is to deposit another piece of paper into the public trust, via the Name.

I always tell them that the easiest way for them to zero balance their ledgers and the accounting of the public trust would be to write a cheque to the Name, thereby debiting their account the same amount that they have already credited it (via the charging (debiting) of the public trust), ….. and they can mail the cheque to the above-listed address (mine).

All debt is created on pieces of paper; therefore, all debt can be offset by other pieces of paper.

The very first time I was in court, 14 years ago, I said, “That’s not my name.” I was in handcuffs before I could take my next breath. What does this tell you? I hit them where it hurt. That I didn’t know how to handle the situation, after I made that remark, is unfortunate, but never doubt that the “name game” is the crux of the entire matter.

The ego thinks its purpose is our “survival”. When we feel threatened, our ego kicks in and the results are, inevitably, insane. If we can grasp that “survival” is not our responsibility, we can keep the ego at bay, and trust that “whatever is …. is, or is at least good enough”. Letting go of our attachments to outcomes and accepting results is the key. Our survival is the responsibility of our higher self/oversoul/spirit. So, the ego’s desire to “win the commerce game” is a waste of time and energy, not only because it cannot be done but also because even if it could, the win would produce no tangible or lasting results within any reality, since we are living within an illusion. It is tantamount to identifying oneself as the “winner” of a Monopoly game because the instant the game is over, the “win” ceases to matter. It is all part of the dream/fiction and, as ACIM says, “You forgot to laugh.”

Love is the Currency of the 21st Century

Yes, there will be an end of the economic system, along with everything else we know, because we are the ones who will end it. We are fed up with the insanity of the way it is. Everything will shift, very soon; as soon as we shift. Commerce will end, when we quit playing the game.

We will all soon be doing what we love to do and serving our fellow man by doing so. When we operate from love and we give, we get back way more than we gave. Not only I but also my friend, Nick, among many others, has proved this.

My friend, Nick, is a pilot and flight instructor. He also works on computers and upgrades everyone he can to Linux. He has been serving his fellow man, in various ways, and operating from love, for over 4 years without trading, exchanging, or receiving a paycheque. At the end of every week, somehow, he has enough cash or gifts to take care of his family of six. He operates purely on donation and his intuition. Sometimes he receives nothing, sometimes he receives a little, and sometimes he receives a lot. He relies upon his higher self /intuition /oversoul to tell him what to do, where to go, how to be. He knows that he and his family will be taken care of and all that he has is precisely what he requires – no more and no less. At the end of his day, it is always enough. Nick does not charge his fellow man, he has faith in his intuition, and he claims he has never been happier. Being a former, very-devoted, evangelical, born-again, spirit-filled Christian, this was quite a change, for the better. For those who wonder, “compared to what?”, I have pictures of Nick with his Cadillac, one of his many motor homes, his aeroplane, and his huge house with a huge yard. After studying law, scripture, and history he realized that all the problems on earth come from everyone competing against each other and, one day, said to his wife, “I just can’t do this anymore; I am part of the problem.” So, he walked away from it all. He says he has not a care in the world, any longer. “Everything is handled. I just have to do my part everyday and that is all. Life has never been better.”

“You are an aspect of the infinite so, to that which you imagine to be real, you actually give life. So the idea of what you might call ‘negative entities’ – ‘they’ can have lives of their own; ‘they’ can have an existence and self-awareness, but the only way you can interact with any negative consciousness is by being of that frequency and attracting it. One of the easiest ways to be of that frequency and to attract it is to fall for the idea that you have to fear it because you really believe that it is more powerful than you are. It isn’t; … it would like you to think so because that’s what generates the fear it needs to survive. But, you are not less powerful. Whatever you choose is what you are and whatever you are is what you attract and, if you know you choose to be a reflection of the positive manifestation, then you might be able to be aware of the fact that there might be negative manifestations, but they can never interact with you in any effectual way. You will become literally invisible to them.” –– Bashar

The “world” is only a projection of what goes on in our minds, so, those whom we call “controllers of the world” are really only “controllers of our minds”. The only reason they are “controllers of our minds” is because WE ARE NOT. The instant we take control of our minds, our world will become the way WE want it and it will immediately cease to be the way ‘they’ want it.

The work that is exigent is to take control of our minds …. not of the world, not of others, not of our circumstances, not of anything; only of that which goes on in our minds. Turn away from the world; turn away from everything; turn away from everyone, and turn to yourself. The purpose of life is “mind management”.

The only thing going on ‘in the world’ is that which I am perceiving and, in order to perceive it, I had to imagine it, first. I am the creator of all that I experience.

We do not see things as they are; we see them as WE are. –– Anais Nin

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


© by Mary Elizabeth: Croft,
First Published as: Knowing Who You Are

Ho’oponopono is an ancient Hawaiian art by which we discover that we are 100% responsible for every experience of our lives. Through self-identity, the four phrases of Ho’oponopono allow us to be responsible for all our thoughts, feelings, behaviour, problems, relationships, actions and reactions, circumstances, and even the opportunities which come our way. By taking 100% responsibility we can erase programming, data, memories, and beliefs, in order to get closer to Zero. By “cleaning on” our subconscious, we can become clear to receive inspiration from Divinity. With inspiration, we can recall the power we were meant to have.

Worry about, judgement of, or engagement in a problem reveals to Divinity that we do not require its assistance. We do have “free will” to do so, however, what we resist will persist until we let go of it and allow Divinity to erase it from our memory. The phrases which energetically allow for this are: “I love you; I’m sorry; Please forgive me; Thank you.” Dr. Hew Len worked as a psychotherapist at Hawaii State Hospital for the criminally insane and never met with any patients, in session. He knew that his seeing them as insane was due to his memory and data, so he worked with this concept, not with the patients. After two years, all but two patients had left the hospital and it was closed.

We are constantly living in our memories. We can never experience anything as ‘new’ and our ability to “Be Here Now” is prevented. What if we had no emotional memory? We could then see everything, clearly, as Here and Now. Ho’oponopono allows the Divinity within us to erase the memories which are causing us to react to all information, persons, and situations.

It is important not to have expectations of outcomes. We know this, yet, it is difficult to avoid. I recall when I ate only alkaline food for a couple of weeks. Certain aspects of my body, which I never would have imagined would heal, did heal; and others, which I had hoped would heal, did not. So, this is all up to Divinity to erase those memories as it deems to be in the best interest of us all … as the one.

Every problem we encounter is an opportunity to ‘clean on it’. If the problem appears to be someone else’s, it is up to us to clean on it because, in the here and now, WE are experiencing it; therefore, it is ours to heal. “If you spot it, you got it.”

Ho’oponopono allows us to be at peace. Whatever or whoever is disturbing us is only due to our perceiving it … or them, based upon a memory. It might be due to data which we both share, and this is possible if we have a previous experience with them. This is usually the case because we have lifetimes upon lifetimes with those who appear to be unknown to us now. The finale is: we just don’t know anything so the solution is to repeat the phrases and trust that Divinity will erase the programs, data, memory, fear, belief, and trauma and we will be free. Trying to “figure it out” (why am I ill? … why don’t I like that fellow? … why did I create this situation?) is only a waste of time and energy because not only can we never know, but also “knowing” will not assist our spiritual evolution. “Why” doesn’t matter; so, asking “why?” only placates the ego-mind and this is how it maintains its vice-grip control of us.

Everything but “peace” is a memory! This means that all ‘negative’ thoughts, annoying circumstances, disease, our reaction to people, and everything, other than peace of mind, is a memory. It is not real in the here and now. The conscious mind is capable of processing only 15 bits of the 11 million bits of information we perceive subconsciously, every second. It is idiocy to think that we know what is going on in the world. We couldn’t possibly know what is going on with anything or anyone, anywhere, any time, ever. We are clueless! Fifteen bits, of the 11 million which impact any given circumstance, are hardly enough information upon which to make any sort of wise discernment or take any sort of appropriate action. We are missing the bulk of the information to do so. Better to leave this in the hands of Divinity and one way is to repeat the phrases which invite that power to do so.

Ho’oponopono teaches that we have three levels to the mind. Memories release from conscious to subconscious to super-conscious to Divinity which erases them from the world. Our usual waking state is in memory and so, we are deaf to Divinity’s inspiration. By taking 100% responsibility and “cleaning on” everything, all the time, we release memories, open to inspiration, and ultimately reach Zero state where we feel peace. We then become an empty vessel for Divinity to provide us all that we require.

Not only do we not know anything but also we have no need to know anything. The desire for information and knowledge is our conscious mind/ego’s desire to remain in control. But, that’s impossible because it cannot process the vast amount of information with which we are presented every second. It is lose/lose, so our intent to learn as much as we can about any given situation is laughable. I am reminded of when my mid-wife asked me, “So, are you ready to have this baby?”, who was due in two days, and I answered, “I just wish I had time to read one more book on the subject.” She sternly looked me in the eye and said, “YOU need to have read one LESS book.” She knew that I was an information junkie, I over-analyzed everything, and I had a belief that if I knew, intellectually, everything there was to know about bearing my baby, I would be a ripping success when, in fact, I noticed, as I was in labour and delivery, that my intellect and vast knowledge had absolutely nothing to do with my experience. The entire event was a success, due to my intuition, not my information.

For those of you who are searching for a solution to our commercial woes, my intent is that you realize that doing so is an attempt to correct the system – that which lies outside ourselves. It is not only impossible but also a ludicrous concept, now that we know that there is nothing ‘out there’. There is no ‘world’ out there. It is all within each of us and what we see is a mirror image of what we bring to any waking moment. There is only we, facing our memories. Those whom we meet in commercial situations – cops, judges, bankers, et al – are only there for us to realize that we must clean on our memory, traumas, beliefs – whether from ‘another time and space’ or just last week. Bumping into those whom we deem ‘thugs’ is only our opportunity to clean on it so that it does not occur again. Blaming them only further empowers them and disempowers us.

The world is not being done TO you; the world is being done BY you. The world is not coming AT you; it is coming FROM you. When you go to a position of being “at cause” instead of being “at effect”, then you are no longer a victim. – Gary Renard

I wish I could tell you that the degree of our desire could impact our success; alas, I cannot. This ought not to keep us from doing it though because it is the ONLY way to put an end to all this nonsense that we have all experienced. There is no other solution. There is no solution IN commerce FOR commerce; it is all within US and the instant we accept 100% responsibility for our experiences, it will all come to a screeching halt… whenever that is meant to be. It is determined by Divinity, not us, and although we are a duplication of divinity, it is not our business. As long as we pour our time and energy into something which is outside ourselves, we are pouring them down the drain. The solution is within ourselves and no amount of knowledge, processes, information, remedies, etc. can relieve us of the horrors which we have all suffered, by our own memories. We must quit listening to others, reading, learning, or studying commercial “solutions”. Only we can clear this up for ourselves and when we do, it will be cleared for us all. Remember, Dr. Hew Len cleaned only on himself: “What is it in me that causes me to experience these people as insane?” He worked only on his memories and, within months, these “criminally insane” people were no longer so. Can’t we do the same to stop the viciousness which is solely our own lifetimes of memories? Of course we can. We can no longer spend our time and energy on looking outside ourselves for a solution to what appears to be the problems “in the world”. The “world situation” is not “in the world”; it is in our memories and only we can clean on those memories and only Divinity can erase them so that we are no longer at the effect of them.

“When we clear our personal stuff, we can go cosmic.” – Barbara Marciniak

What appears to be going on in the world is none of our business because it is only ‘details’. We already know how insane the ‘world’ is, so the details are immaterial. We have enough going on within ourselves to keep us busy. But, notice that the propaganda is designed to keep our attention on healing the mirror image (world) and away from healing ourselves. We have no idea what is going on in the world. We must quit pretending that we do. Information and knowledge are red herrings. It is the global elitists’ way of saying, “Look over here, at the image, so that you will not look to the source. Ignore the man behind the curtain – the cause – because the cause is we and as soon as we recall our power, it is we who can change that which appears to be ‘in the world’.

The elitists want us searching for palliatives for what is in the mirror; they do not want us to heal the cause. We can heal the cause by asking Divinity to erase our memories, in order to effect a cure for what is going on because, since “Peace Begins with Me”, we would then have 100% control over what is going on in the mirror/world. As long as we continue to look where they point, to see how bad it all is, we remain powerless. This is how they want us … out of control and powerless. If we take 100% responsibility for ALL of it, we recall our power and have the energy to shift the entire situation, via shifting the projector – the mind. That which appears to be going on in the world is really only a result of what is going on in the mind. The only place our attention ought to be is on us and ‘cleaning on’ those memories which are preventing us from experiencing peace. There is no authority outside of us. We are the authority – both the cause and the cure. There is no one and nothing else.

We are meant to act, immediately, upon inspiration. If we are confused about what we ‘hear’, we are to clean on it. We must stop giving our memories our power. They are what keeps us from living our lives. Everything in our lives which pains us is always, only a result of our memory. When we clean on our memories and Divinity erases them, they are gone from the world because we are the source of all the problems which appear to be in the world.

There are hundreds of billions of info-bits which we subconsciously perceive every day and we react to them via our memories. Based upon these memories, which we couldn’t possibly begin to discover, we have developed beliefs. ‘Good’ beliefs are as detrimental as ‘bad’ beliefs, as they are all based upon only memories, not upon any facts because there are no “facts”; there are only experiences. We have beliefs about God, other people, events, health, wealth, love, and life itself. It is never-ending and it is ALL the past. E.g.: think about how many times eggs, have gained and lost status: “good food - bad food”. Only our personal experiences of anything, is important. But, those experiences are all influenced by memory, opinions, propaganda, facts, science, history, etc. There is only here and now.

Peace Begins With Me

If there is to be peace on earth; it must begin with each one of us, individually. There is nothing to do, out there. Nothing out there can be “corrected” without first correcting our memories, beliefs, programming, knowledge, data, judgements, information, “truths”, opinions, etc. which is ALL garbage. “The Information Era” was a huge boon, but it has back-fired on us in that we now ‘know’ too much. This has titillated our left brain to grasp at greater amounts of data – the very thing we want to erase. We have no need of what we think is “important information” because we do not have the capacity to assimilate it.

Once you decide to titillate instead of illuminate . . . you create a climate of expectation that requires a higher and higher level of intensity. – Bill Moyers.

Dr. Hew Len says that when we are willing to take 100% responsibility for whatever we experience in our life, we can then go on to the next step where we say, “I am sorry for bringing, to this situation, whatever is going on in me, that I experience the world this way. Please forgive me for whatever it is that caused this”. Once we ‘let go’, the Divine can shift the energy and this will impact the entire cosmos.

We never experience life’s events accurately; we experience only our reaction to them. When we meet people, we do not experience them the way the Divine created them, so we ought to be thinking, “I am sorry for what ever is going on in me that I do not experience him the way Divinity created him; please forgive me”. If we want to rid the problems of others, we must rid our own, first. Our memories dictate our experiences and, ergo, our experiences are inauthentic. When we do not take responsibility for our experiences, not only do we miss the here and now but also we resort to blaming others for any ‘bad’ experiences. When conscious and unconscious memories are erased, they stop dictating our reactions.

The most important questions of creation are, “Who am I?” and “Who’s in Charge?” We must “know thyself”. When we know that we are Divinity, we are capable of taking 100% responsibility and this grants us the power to experience authentically. The whole world is within us and, by being 100% responsible, (saying “I love you; I’m sorry; please forgive me; thank you”), we regain our power, we change, and the world changes, too.

Unfortunately, for those of us who pride ourselves on our intellect, our intellect does not have the ability to erase memories from our subconscious mind because that is not its function. When we have 11 million bits per second of information coming at us, of which we are conscious of only 15, (Tor Norretranders - The User Illusion), our conscious mind can not make our decisions; it is memories that choose our resultant behaviour. The function of the intellect, according to Dr. Hew Len, is to make the choice between whether we are going to take 100% responsibility for everything we experience in our lives, or not. This is similar to the concept of A Course In Miracles: We are three minds: the ego, the spirit, and the one who chooses to which one to listen. We must learn to chose ‘spirit’/Divinity to be the one to dictate our actions and experiences.

David Ike says, “The cliché, “knowledge is power” is not true. Knowledge is not power unless you act on it.” I contend that both “knowledge” and “the acting upon it” are what keeps us in the world when our soul’s intent is to get us out of it.

Most are seeking more information, hence, the popularity of “the information superhighway”, however, I want LESS information. I want to unplug; I want less on my mind. I want to “tune in, turn on, and drop-out”…. tune into the frequency of my Divinity, turn on to who I really am: an innocent who has no knowledge of the world, and drop-out of the meaningless barrage of programs, information, beliefs, knowledge, news, data, and memories which only prevent a clear, still, non-judgemental, thought-free, neutral mind. “Zero” – “here and now” – is the only state in which we can receive Divine inspiration.

ACIM (A Course in Miracles) is adamant about this! “I do not know what anything is for; I have given everything I see all the meaning it has for me; I do not understand anything; I am never upset for the reason I think; I see only the past; I see nothing as it is now; My thoughts do not mean anything; My meaningless thoughts are showing me a meaningless world; A meaningless world engenders fear; I have no neutral thoughts; I can escape from the world I see by giving up attack thoughts; God is in everything I see because God is in my mind; I am not a victim of the world I see; I have invented the world I see; I could see peace instead of this; There is nothing to fear”, etc.

Be vigilant, be aware, be disciplined. We are to “clean” before we inflict our preconceived ideas on all people, places, and things. I don’t know what is going on or why, but I would like to make amends for them. Yet we cannot correct what appears to be outside ourselves; we can only ask that Divinity erase what we are bringing to the world. We want to be in tune with ourselves and at peace, not in tune with what is “out there”. When we are at Zero, we operate in the best interests of us all.

Decades ago, my friend broke up with a fellow called, Ralph. She told me that, now, her life was, ALL about “Ralph and NOT Ralph” …. in other words, even when she was not missing Ralph and her life was about not Ralph, that meant that her life was still about “Ralph”. This duality is the entire matter. There is no neutrality in duality or polarity. As ACIM says, “I have no neutral thoughts”, so thoughts themselves are the problem. So, the cliché, “think positive” is a hazardous concept. We do not have thoughts; thoughts have us. When we can reach neutrality, which Dr. Hew Len calls, “Zero”, we are FREE. In meditation, we strive to get to “no thought”. My ego does not want me to meditate because it thrives on my attention and, to the ego, my not paying attention to it means ‘death’. It will do anything to hold my attention, keep me thinking its thoughts, and holding its beliefs. It doesn’t care whether these beliefs are negative or positive, as long as it has the authority, over me, on what to believe.

The PTB, Global Elite, Illuminati, Government, Vatican, Corporations, etc. represent the ego mind. It does not care whether we believe ‘good’ beliefs or ‘bad’ beliefs, as long as we continue to ‘believe’ and look outside ourselves for ‘information’ and situations which corroborate those beliefs. That is where it controls us. Which side of the coin we believe is not the issue; the issue is the coin itself. They do not care which religion, nationality, profession, sports team, TV show, doctor, career, opinions, school, etc., we choose, as long as we do choose, regard it as very important to us, and insist upon identifying with it. All that matters is that our identifying beliefs be well-lodged within our psyche. THIS is what grants them control over us. Neither the ego nor the PTB cares what we believe as long as we have beliefs …. to hold energetic space – space which is meant to be kept clear to receive Divine inspiration. Neither the ego mind nor the PTB wants us clear because both want to remain in control of us so that we cannot spiritually evolve and return to our true ascended soul selves.

“The information age” has gone from an assist to a detriment. We must dismiss all beliefs, information, fears, programming, data, memory, etc., i.e.: “crash the computer”, in order to receive the messages which we truly require in order to become free. Those messages – our inspiration – can come from only our Source/Divinity/Higher Self. We must turn our attention away from the world and what appears to be its problems and get on with this assignment of clearing ourselves, if we are ever to become free.

I love you (I love you, Divinity, which is all of us and everything)
I’m sorry (I’m sorry for bringing, to this situation or this divine being, my memories which are assessing the circumstances and influencing my experience.)
Please forgive me (Please forgive me for bringing my memories, judgements, fear, information, traumas, ‘knowledge’, data, ‘facts’, and opinions of the ‘there and then’ into the Here and Now.)
Thank you (It is done. So be it)

These phrases encompass love, correction, forgiveness, and gratitude. This is all we require to live in love and peace.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


by Patricia Diane Cota-Robles

2010 has been declared the year of manifestation by the Beings of Light in the Realms of Illumined Truth. This is a roller coaster time of miracles and challenges. These extreme experiences are waking Humanity up at warp speed, and our God Selves are not allowing us to go back to sleep. People in every walk of life are reaching out to make a positive difference and at long last we have reached a tipping point. Now it is time for our hopes and dreams to tangibly manifest.

Listen to your heart. We are being called to greater service by the Company of Heaven. It is time for us to fulfill our highest potential. Every moment we are being given chances to add to the Light of the World and to improve the quality of life for ourselves and all Humanity.

Over the past two years we have witnessed everything that conflicts with Heaven on Earth being pushed to the surface to be healed and transmuted into Light. The old paradigms of greed and corruption which have trapped Humanity in the oppressive grip of poverty, war, hatred, pain, and suffering of every kind are crumbling before our very eyes. As a result of this purging, many people are going through incredibly challenging things in every facet of their lives. This is causing people all over the world to feel helpless and overwhelmed.

This situation is creating fear and giving people the erroneous impression that things are getting progressively worse, which has triggered millions of people to respond to their challenges in a desperate survival mode. This is the opposite of the COCREATION MODE and the CONSCIOUSNESS OF ONENESS that is necessary for the manifestation of the New Earth.

To counteract this trend the Company of Heaven has devised a plan, and they are invoking the participation of Lightworkers all over the world to bring the plan to fruition.

In the Etheric Realms above Washington, D. C. is a complex of 5th-Dimensional Violet Flame Temples. The Beings of Light within these Temples have been preparing for millennia for this Cosmic Moment in the Earth's evolution. The frequencies of Divine Light that are necessary in order to transcend the current state of affairs on Earth pulsate within these Temples. These are the frequencies of the 5th-Dimensional Violet Flame that reverberate with the Divine Qualities of Liberty, Divine Justice, Freedom, and Victory.

Even though we are familiar with these attributes of God, the intensity of Divine Light that will be released into the physical plane of Earth when this Portal of Light is opened to full breadth has never been experienced on Earth. The Beings of Light have indicated that these powerful gifts from our Father-Mother God will enable the God Self of each evolving soul to burst the paralyzing grip of our manipulative, fragmented, and fear-based human egos. This wayward aspect of our personality has perpetuated our "dog-eat-dog" and "looking-out-for-number-one" survival modes for aeons of time. This distorted perception of who we really are has prevented us from healing our self-inflicted separation from God and each other.

Saint Germain is the Hierarch of these Temples and he works closely with Archangel Michael, and all of the Beings of Light associated with the Violet Flame, who serve within these Temples. Saint Germain is orchestrating this unfolding Divine Plan, and he will guide us step by step as we God Victoriously accomplish this critical mission.

The activity of Light that we are being called to fulfill is not associated with governments specifically, but it certainly involves every person in the governments of the world at national, state, and local levels. It also includes every man, woman, and child on Earth.

We all know that fundamental change never begins at the top. It is cocreated through the unified efforts of dedicated people working together at a grass roots level. This event is one of those fundamental changes.

The Divine Intent of this facet of the Divine Plan is to open the portal of the Violet Flame above Washington, D. C., so that the Light of God will burst the bonds of Humanity's manipulative human egos, and clear the way for our God Selves to take full dominion of our thoughts, feelings, words, and actions.

Since your God Self brought this information to your awareness, it means that you have agreed at some level to work with the Beings of Light in this holy endeavor. There will be several ways in which people will participate. The most important thing to consider is that you have been preparing for lifetimes to help with this facet of the Divine Plan or you would not be reading these words. Ask your God Self for guidance, then listen to the inner promptings of your heart, and you will KNOW how you can be the most powerful instrument of God during this event.

Lightworkers from all over the world are being asked to gather within the forcefield of the Etheric Violet Flame Temples of Liberty, Divine Justice, Freedom, and Victory which pulsate above Washington, D. C. and the surrounding areas. Together we will form a mighty transformer of Light through which the Light of God will pour to open this portal of Light to full breadth. We will serve as surrogates on behalf of ALL Humanity, and through the transformer of our unified Heart Flames, the God Selves of every man, woman, and child will receive this unprecedented influx of Divine Light.

This must be a joint effort. The Legions of Light cannot do this for us. They can only respond to our willingness to serve as instruments of God in the physical plane. But once we respond to our heart's call, and volunteer to do whatever it takes to be the Open Door that no one can shut, the floodgates of Heaven open to assist us.

These selfless messengers of God will amplify our efforts a thousand times a thousandfold. This means that the more Lightworkers who respond to this clarion call, the more powerful we will be and the more Light the Company of Heaven will be able to add to this Divine Plan.

The vehicle that will be used to gather Lightworkers within the forcefield of Liberty, Divine Justice, Freedom, and Victory is the 24th Annual World Congress on Illumination. This event will take place over the anniversary of Harmonic Convergence, August 14-19, 2010, at the Crystal Gateway Marriott in Arlington, Virginia.

If you have the heart call to travel to Arlington, Virginia, which is in the surrounding area of Washington, D. C., to serve Humanity and all Life in this way, ask the Company of Heaven for assistance. The floodgates of Heaven will open to pave the way for you to attend this activity of Light. Be open, be receptive, and Trust.

This sacred conclave will be a celestial experience for everyone involved. Each day as we successfully fulfill one phase of the Divine Plan, the Spiritual Hierarchy will reveal the next phase of the plan to us. As we sojourn through the various activities of Light under the Divine Guidance of our Father-Mother God and the Company of Heaven, our mission will be victoriously accomplished. This activity of Light will help us to catapult the patterns of perfection for the New Earth into physical manifestation.

The World Congress On Illumination is truly a life-transforming event that will provide you with the opportunity to meet old friends from around the world with whom you have been serving for aeons of time. Fellow Lightworkers will join hearts with you and support you in your selfless service to the Light.

The Divine Plan we are being called to fulfill will be accomplished through various activities of Light. We will be joined at inner levels by the I AM Presences of ALL Humanity and the entire Company of Heaven. All of this will occur within the Infinite Body of our omniscient, omnipresent, omnipotent Father-Mother God, All That Is.

The Beings of Light have been given permission to assist us in unprecedented ways, but the Lightworkers on Earth are the predominant force bringing this Divine Plan into physical manifestation.

Our responsibility is enormous, but when we join our hearts together, we will succeed God Victoriously.

Just for a moment, go within to the Divinity of your Heart Flame, and experience the overwhelming Gratitude and Love pouring forth from the Beings of Light in the Heavenly Realms. Feel the deep appreciation being sent to YOU from On High for your willingness to serve Humanity and ALL Life during this critical moment in the evolution of this blessed planet.


There will be many ways in which Lightworkers all over the world will participate in this unprecedented opportunity. Many will have the heart call to serve as the Hands of God on behalf of ALL Humanity. They will travel to Arlington, Virginia, to become part of the mighty transformer through which the Light of God will flow to open the portal of Liberty, Divine Justice, Freedom, and Victory.

Some Lightworkers will be inspired to travel to various sacred sites to anchor these patterns into Mother Earth's Crystal Grid System. Others will gather with groups in their own locations to weave their Light into this unified activity of Light. And still others will join in consciousness from the solitude of their own sanctuaries.

All of these ways of participating are vital to the success of this Divine Mission. The important thing is that you truly listen to your heart and respond according to YOUR particular facet of this Divine Plan. No matter where you are guided to be, know that we are ALL One. Precious One, your Light and Love are needed NOW!

We are offering a discount of $100 for those who register by May 1, 2010, and a discount of $50 for those who register by June 1, 2010. After June 1, 2010, registration will be full price. Registrations must be paid by July 1, 2010, to ensure your space.

After that date, reservations will be accepted on a space-available basis. Please make your reservations early.

For the information you will need in order to participate in the 24th Annual World Congress on Illumination please click on the link: (If this link does not work, copy and paste it into your browser.)

Patricia Diane Cota-Robles
New Age Study of Humanity's Purpose
a 501 (c) 3 nonprofit educational organization

New Age Study of Humanity's Purpose, PO Box 41883, Tucson, Arizona 85717; FAX: 520-751-2981; Phone: 520-885-7909.

This article is copyrighted, but you have my permission to share it through any medium as long as it is not altered and the proper credit line is included.

©2010 Patricia Diane Cota-Robles

The information in this monthly sharing is being given to Humanity by the Beings of Light in the Realms of Illumined Truth. The Divine Intent of these celestial sharings is to encourage, empower, uplift, and inspire Humanity by allowing us to see the bigger picture during these wondrous but often challenging times.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


By Ignatious O'Reilly – April 1, 2010

WASHINGTON - President Obama, U.S. congressmen and their aides held an emergency four hour-long meeting Wednesday to decide what action to take to stem a sudden and unprecedented mass enlightenment of the US population that threatens to destabilize the Government and create a fiscal crisis.

Millions of citizens jubilantly celebrated their new awareness as they suddenly realized they have been lied to all their lives on just about everything by their psychopathic, conscienceless leaders of major corporations, government and security agencies.

Residents in all major cities across the United States awoke Wednesday morning complaining that they were experiencing an inexplicable mental clarity that was causing them to realize the way they were about to spend their day was utterly pointless, a potential health threat and would only add energy and finances to a powerful wealthy elite that had been ruling their lives since as long as they could remember.

Congress was thrown into chaos when a majority of staff decided to simply stop showing up for work until their bosses resign; in a move of solidarity, energy companies turned off the power to government buildings and military bases, while water companies shut down their water supply; repair people refused to carry out repairs for the politically well-connected and television network staff refused to report the lies they are routinely ordered to tell by their editors.

One Chicago resident's report was consistent with many similar accounts coming in from across the country. Joe, 42 told us how he had become aware of the diversionary, divide and conquer machinations of the psychopathic oligarchs, especially in relation to abortion, health care, immigration, global warming, peak oil, 9/11, fake terrorism, both current wars and past wars, 'necessary police actions', empire building and resource plundering, left vs right, evolution vs creationism, fundamentalists vs everybody else!

"Wow! I sort of felt things weren't right but to suddenly be able to see the true nature of all the lies we've been bombarded with by media and Big Government is just mind-boggling," Joe exclaimed.

"The public seems to have finally understood that they're so sick and going bankrupt because of the FDA/AMA medical mafia and Big Pharma's Gestapo death grip over absolutely everything! I've noticed how food companies, Monsanto and Big Pharma's share prices have exploded over the past few years," said Joe. "I can see it's because they have bought Congress and have a complete monopoly over our food supply, health and non-existent consideration for others' well-being."

Reports are flooding in of people deciding to buy or trade for goods with hand crafters in their own region instead of shopping at Wal-Mart. Rather than buying GMO foods at the supermarket chain stores, they've formed co-ops with their neighbors, bought fresh food in bulk and are getting together to can foods, smoke meats and pickle vegetables – followed by a barbecue. Feeling so connected and enthused by that, ordinary people across the nation are organizing all kinds of meetings to learn all the old skills that their grandparents knew that made them independent.

People are leaving the cities in droves and, en masse, have established themselves on previously restricted government land. This resulted in a veritable frenzy of house-building and barn raising parties followed, once again, by barbecues where home-made pickles were enjoyed by all.

The reasons for the mass-awakening are as yet unclear. One possible explanation has been given by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency where officials have discovered that the normally high levels of fluoride added to the nation's drinking water were "accidentally omitted." It's suspected that workers at water plants are responsible. Government Health officials have advised all citizens to carry on working as normal, eat lots of fast-food and stay glued to their TV sets in the hope that any thoughts generated in people by seeing the reality of the situation will be pacified by toxins, apathy and a return to the steady atrophy of their brains.

Citizens have been urged by the Obama administration to report anyone they witness behaving in a non-consumer-capitalist manner to Homeland Security who, with the help of FEMA, will permanently detain anyone found more than 5 meters from a Television screen.

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page


Note from Ron: Like Steve Beckow, whom I respect a great deal, I also feel strong resonance with Matthew and Salusa, which is why I always post their messages in Metagroups. That being said, I have never had complete confidence in Obama. I did not vote for him; and while I pray for him as I did for his predecessor, I do not see much evidence in the 3D "reality" that would indicate he is anything more than just another cog in the Illuminatie machine. I hope I am totally incorrect; and I know enough not to judge anything totally by appearances. In fact, I'm going to include an email exchange about Obama that I had with one of my readers. It will be below this article, without a separate title.

April 12, 2010:

By Steve Beckow

Many criticisms of President Barack Obama are surfacing these days. One website against the New World Order states that Obama “has stolen your shovel, taxed your asses, … and mortgaged the promised land.” (1) Ben Fulford, in his interview with David Willcock, places Barack Obama in cahoots with Zbigniew Brzezinski and George Soros. (2) David Willcock himself suggests that: “Every person I know who is on the inside, still in black-ops, reveals that there is great hatred of Obama within their ranks because he is NOT working on their side.” (3)

What do spiritual and galactic commentators say about Barack Obama? Is he Golden-Age hero or New World Order villain? I’d like to look at the opinions of spiritual commentator Matthew Ward and galactic spokesperson SaLuSa on the question.

Matthew Ward

Matthew speaks for the Earth’s spiritual hierarchy. Ashtar, commander of the Galactic Federation’s fleet, once informed the author that “I want to tell you why you can trust the information we transmit to Suzy Ward. We know Matthew—all highly evolved beings in the universe know this soul—and his soul and his mother’s vibrate at the same high frequency, where only truth is passed between beings wherever they are, and she is known by us as a uniquely clear receiver.” (4)

Matthew notes that “many of you still are questioning US President Obama’s motives or leadership abilities. Therefore we will speak briefly again about this highly evolved soul who all of you agreed prior to birth would be elected to that position and lead your world into an era of peace.”

“We told you before the primary elections that he would become president, and everything we have said about him and his part of the Golden Age master plan in subsequent messages also is as accurate now as then. …”

Matthew agrees with David Willcock that the steam behind these criticisms comes from Republicans and the Illuminati. [He says.] “While opposition to Obama’s direction from the Republicans in Congress en masse and some members of his own party too is public knowledge, the power behind the dissension—pressure from the Illuminati global web-work—is not. Except for readers of our messages and those from other sources within the light, it is not known that the vociferous and rancorous disagreements within the US government are not as they appear to be, a stubborn partisan bloc or inflexible ideological differences—it is the influence of the light and of the darkness being played out on the United States government stage.” (5)

Matthew tells us that “if only you could know how prudently and wisely he is moving behind the scenes to upset the entire lluminati apple cart, instead of concerns about his direction, there would be rousing cheers.


“The larger purpose to be served by assuring you that Obama’s intentions are aligned with the light is of utmost importance. The energy of negative thoughts about his leadership and all other situations anywhere on Earth that are seen as worrisome is flowing out into your world and delaying effective resolutions to tumultuous happenings everywhere.” (6)

According to Matthew, the mainstream media, while breaking free of Illuminati control, is still not far enough along that curve to give Obama his full due. He details the full extent of the task facing Obama – to dismantle the entrenched Illuminati with American government and society. I quote Matthew’s analysis at length.

“Now then, while Illuminati control of mainstream media has cracked, it has not disintegrated sufficiently so that information they do not want you to know is reported; nor is the full truth given of situations they would like to keep completely quiet but cannot. And you can be certain that nothing is reported that reflects the concerns of lightworkers who are distressed because President Obama has entrusted vital responsibilities to persons known to be affiliated with Illuminati power bases and some of his decisions appear to be strengthening rather than weakening those bases. …

“What is he dealing with? In short, the incremental dismantling of the Illuminati worldwide network. As background on this pernicious ‘umbrella group,’ only the topmost members know the full extent of its infiltration into governments, banking, commerce, religions, education, media, science, entertainment—all bodies that most impact life in your world. Below those few peak individuals are the ones who control the many aspects of the global network. Each has general knowledge about the others but no detailed information about any operations except what he or she is in charge of.

“The farther down the hierarchy a member is, the more secrecy enshrouds the reasons for the Illuminati’s very existence; and at the bottom are the many thousands who simply follow instructions without a glimmer of understanding what real purpose they are serving, somewhat like a 1000-piece jigsaw puzzle dumped out of the box—no piece is aware of the interconnectedness of all the pieces, much less suspect that altogether they form a whole picture. In the case of the Illuminati, that picture is sinister indeed.

“After assuming office, President Obama was briefed on information he had no way of knowing prior to that time, and to continue our analogy, each of the briefers had only a few puzzle pieces. Furthermore, Obama was faced with a dire global economic situation that purportedly started with “toxic” mortgages in the United States, and he needed a knowledgeable, experienced team who could take immediate steps to prevent worldwide collapse. The enormity of the Illuminati’s economic network is known in fullness only by the peak of that group, but by connecting puzzle pieces, Obama has become aware of that entanglement and the fortunes hidden in off-shore banks, but the total picture puzzle that will show how that money has been used to manipulate and dominate the world’s peoples has yet to be put together.

“As difficult as it is to imagine the extent of organizational complexity that is the Illuminati’s base of power and influence, it is even more difficult to totally eliminate it. Discovery and legal means to rid the world of that insidious control are underway, and until all is in readiness, it would be foolhardy to make public those efforts. Thus neither the Illuminati nor the Obama camp want their respective activities to become public knowledge, and the “transparency” he promised in good faith must for a while longer be “behind-closed-doors” instead. As the light continues steadily intensifying and truths no longer can be hidden or denied, you will see the results of his wise course that in this moment seems to belie many of his campaign promises.” (7)

Matthew assures us that “President Obama is a major factor in the master plan” and advises us to “wait and see!”

“Despite the formidable situations Obama inherited and the determined opposition of Illuminati members of Congress and those who are acting under that dark group’s influence, whether by bribery, blackmail or death threats to family, he will pursue his visionary course to benefit his nation and the world.” (8)


SaLuSa says of himself that “I along with my companions represent the Galactic Federation where contact with you is concerned.” (9) SaLuSa speaks “more as the collective voice for our group, while the Galactic Federation have many individuals making contact all over the world.” (10)

SaLuSa believes that Barack Obama is the leader who can subdue the Illuminati. On Feb. 9, 2010, he said: “For many years the Illuminati have used their power to manipulate other countries’ affairs. It has been done through covert actions, so that their influence can bring about changes beneficial to them. The populace, who react against such illegal actions and interference in their sovereignty, knows the truth. We ask you, Dear Ones, who causes insurrection in the first place?

“Many of you understand such situations, and you look for a leader who will take note of your desire for peace with all nations. We will say again that you have a wonderful soul named Barack Obama, and he is clear in his mind as to what he wants to do given the opportunity. With your continued support he will galvanize people into action, and set the path towards a peaceful world.” (11)

SaLuSa is aware that: “There is a chorus of unsettled people who have already lost patience with President Obama, but look for the positive signs and allow for slow progress until he can draw about him the right team. The future of your world lies with him, and it is support and not criticism that is needed.”

“Your faith in him will not be found wanting, but make allowances for the task that lies ahead. He will not fail, and we are his assurance of successfully coming through this period.” (12)

SaLuSa tells us that the Galactic Federation’s attention is given to the U.S. and that they protect President Obama until such time as he is able to exercise full power.

“Our main focus is on the U.S.A. as it is from here that the lead must be given to the rest of the world. We see a President who has great potential and is spiritually sincere, but has not yet been able to wield the power that is his prerogative. He will bide his time until circumstances allow him to strike out, and we shall protect him against attacks on his person. Leading the Light is setting up a challenge that the dark forces fear, as it will bring people together as never before and they shall demand release from their hold.”

In September of 2009, SaLuSa said he does not doubt that we and Obama will win the day. “As individuals who are projecting a new holographic image upon the Earth, you are doing as much as you can to assist in the changes. There is no doubt at all that you will win the day, as it is just a matter of how the final period shall come about. There are a number of moves ahead, and any one could trigger the movement that would signal the beginning of the end for duality. (13)

In another message from as far back as April 2009, SaLuSa assured us that: “There are days to come when at a single stroke the U.S. President shall astound his critics by the changes he will authorize. No President of late has been one specifically chosen by the people, and therefore his decisions will reflect that aspect of his appointment. He is in any event, a highly motivated soul bringing much wisdom and authority with him. He has a great responsibility thrust upon his shoulders, but is equal to the task. Already he is making overtures to foreign powers that would otherwise be considered enemies of the Western World.

“Obama seeks peace instead of hostilities, and knows that he must build trust where previously there was nothing but confrontation. Humanity is being offered the opportunity to consign the past to your history books, and broker a new understanding between each other that leads to friendship and cooperation.”

According to him, it is vital that we support Obama in the weeks and months ahead. “Support for the new look way of governing is vital; as the dark forces will do all they can to disrupt its progress. Read carefully into reports that twist Obama’s words, as much disinformation will be circulated. Be intuitive, and measure the soul that is Obama by his intentions as expressed with wisdom and love for all people. He is charged with a task that holds the future of Mankind in its grasp, and it must not, and cannot fail. His emergence is one that the people of the world can take credit for, as your prayers and longing for a trusted and worthy leader to make peace a reality has been answered.” (14)

I myself regard Matthew Ward and SaLuSa as the most credible among the sources representing the Earth’s spiritual hierarchy and the cosmos’ Galactic Federation. Their support of President Obama has been unfailing and their estimation of him is glowing.

When doubt arises in my mind, I remind myself of the high opinion that these two spokespeople have of him and wait for him to claim his full power and rise to his full stature in the course of events in this pre-Golden Age time of troubles.



(1) See
(2) See ”David Willcock Interviews Benjamin Fulford”.
(3) David Wilcock to Marshall Dudley, email, Nov. 5, 2009.
(4) Passage in which Ashtar speaks in “The Third of Three Letters from Commander Hatonn,” Share11 Yahoo discussion group, Aug. 5, 2009, at
(5) Matthew’s Message, March 29, 2010, at
(6) Matthew’s Message, Feb. 14, 2010, ibid.
(7) Matthew’s Message, June 24, 2009, ibid.
(8) Matthew’s Message, March 10, 2009, ibid.
(9) SaLuSa, Apr. 3, 2009, at
(10) SaLuSa, Sept. 16, 2009, ibid.
(11) SaLuSa, Feb. 9, 2010, ibid
(12) SaLuSa, Sept. 16, 2009, ibid.
(13) SaLuSa, Sept. 7, 2009, ibid.
(14) SaLuSa, April 8, 2009, ibid.

On 3/29/2010, wrote: This makes me heart sick and fearful of what is to become of this great country of ours. Be sure to scroll down and see this quick but important read.

Subject: No one was listening.

Yes, he told us in advance what he planned to do. No one was listening.

Everyone should read this.... The following is a narrative taken from a 2008 Sunday morning televised "Meet The Press'. The author (Dale Lindsborg) is employed by none other than the very liberal Washington Post!

From Sunday's 07 Sept. 2008 11:48:04 EST, Televised "Meet the Press" THE THEN Senator Obama was asked about his stance on the American Flag.

General Bill Ginn' USAF (ret.) asked Obama to explain WHY he doesn't follow protocol when the National Anthem is played.

The General stated to Obama that according to the United States Code, Title 36, Chapter 10, Sec. 171...During rendition of the national anthem, when the flag is displayed, all present (except those in uniform) are expected to stand at attention facing the flag with the right hand over the heart. Or, at the very least, "Stand and Face It".

NOW GET THIS !! – – -

'Senator' Obama replied: "As I've said about the flag pin, I don't want to be perceived as taking sides". "There are a lot of people in the world to whom the American flag is a symbol of oppression.." "The anthem itself conveys a war-like message. You know, the bombs bursting in air and all that sort of thing."


Obama continued: "The National Anthem should be 'swapped' for something less parochial and less bellicose. I like the song 'I'd Like To Teach the World To Sing'. If that were our anthem, then, I might salute it. In my opinion, we should consider reinventing our National Anthem as well as 'redesign' our Flag to better offer our enemies hope and love.

It's my intention, if elected, to disarm America to the level of acceptance to our Middle East Brethren. If we, as a Nation of waring people, conduct ourselves like the nations of Islam, where peace prevails – - perhaps a state or period of mutual accord could exist between our governments."

When I become President, I will seek a pact of agreement to end hostilities between those who have been at war or in a state of enmity, and a freedom from disquieting oppressive thoughts. We as a Nation, have placed upon the nations of Islam, an unfair injustice which is WHY my wife disrespects the Flag and she and I have attended several flag burning ceremonies in the past".

"Of course now, I have found myself about to become the President of the United States and I have put my hatred aside. I will use my power to bring CHANGE to this Nation, and offer the people a new path. My wife and I look forward to becoming our Country's First black Family. Indeed, CHANGE is about to overwhelm the United States of America "

WHAAAAAAAT, the Hell is that!!! Yes, you read it right. I, for one, am speechless!!!

Dale Lindsborg, Washington Post


Thank you for sharing this amazing piece with me.

I completely agree with what Obama said. I am NOT appalled at all, rather gladdened by the fact that he was courageous enough to speak the truth. "...Indeed, CHANGE is about to overwhelm the United States of America" ... and the world! Hatred and ignorance on all sides must be eliminated; and then we WILL have peace on earth. Thank God we have a man in high office who was able to put his hatred aside, to see and articulate so well the obvious truth.

And remember, Pat, I did NOT vote for him and did not trust him. I still do not like all that is happening in regard to his actions and words; but find great encouragement reading his quote that you sent, albeit for a totally different reason. I wish he really would begin to disarm America, to beat our swords into plowshares so that the lion could lay down with the lamb and a little child could play on the hole of an asp. It's time for the eagle to fly with the condor, to unite north and south, east and west - and as the Negro spiritual says, "Remember war no more!"

Perhaps you would feel less sick and fearful, Pat, if you could stop getting so caught up in the rhetoric that is purposefully scapegoating Muslims and start looking into your own heart, as we ALL must do. I'd like to teach the world to sing as perfect harmony. Maybe Obama really is an ambassador from higher dimensions as some claim. (Maybe we all are.) One can only hope so; otherwise we will continue the stupidity and ignorance that have characterized our history for a very long time. May we all learn to take responsibility; for, indeed we all have the ability to respond with love instead of hatred. When we do that, we will change the world. Indeed, the mystical truth, the new paradigm reality of the new physics is raising consciousness everywhere on every continent: We really are ONE people under God!


Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page

Home    Brevard    Orlando    Out of Area    Food for Thought    Links    Top of this Page